GE Multilin 350 Instruction Manual

GE
Grid Solutions
350
Feeder Protection System
Feeder protection and control
Instruction manual
350 revision: 2.0x
Manual P/N: 1601-9086-AK
GE publication code: GEK-113507T
E83849
LISTED
*1601-9086-AK* IND.CONT. EQ.
52TL
© 2015 GE Multilin Inc. All rights reserved.
GE Multilin Inc. 350 Feeder Protection System instruction manual for revision 2.0x.
350 Feeder Protection System, EnerVista, EnerVista Launchpad, and EnerVista SR3 Setup
are trademarks or registered trademarks of GE Multilin Inc.
The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc. This documentation is
furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission
of GE Multilin Inc. The content of this manual is for informational use only and is subject to
change without notice.
Part number: 1601-9086-AK (December 2015)
Storage
Store the unit indoors in a cool, dry place. If possible, store in the original packaging. Follow
the storage temperature range outlined in the Specifications.
To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-
energized state once per year, for one hour continuously.
This product cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European

Union. For proper recycling return this product to your supplier or a designated
collection point. For more information go to www.recyclethis.info.
GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS - 350
Note
• Failure to observe and follow the instructions provided in the equipment manual(s)
could cause irreversible damage to the equipment and could lead to property
damage, personal injury and/or death.
• Before attempting to use the equipment, it is important that all danger and
caution indicators are reviewed.
• If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer or
functions abnormally, proceed with caution. Otherwise, the protection provided by
the equipment may be impaired and can result in Impaired operation and injury.
• Caution: Hazardous voltages can cause shock, burns or death.
• Installation/service personnel must be familiar with general device test practices,
electrical awareness and safety precautions must be followed.
• Before performing visual inspections, tests, or periodic maintenance on this device
or associated circuits, isolate or disconnect all hazardous live circuits and sources
of electric power.
• Failure to shut equipment off prior to removing the power connections could
expose you to dangerous voltages causing injury or death.
• All recommended equipment that should be grounded and must have a reliable
and un-compromised grounding path for safety purposes, protection against
electromagnetic interference and proper device operation.
• Equipment grounds should be bonded together and connected to the facility’s
main ground system for primary power.
• Keep all ground leads as short as possible.
• At all times, equipment ground terminal must be grounded during device
operation and service.
• In addition to the safety precautions mentioned all electrical connections made
must respect the applicable local jurisdiction electrical code.
• Before working on CTs, they must be short-circuited.
Safety words and definitions
The following symbols used in this document indicate the following conditions
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
Note
injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
Note
injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or

Note
moderate injury.
Indicates practices not related to personal injury.

Note
For further assistance

For product support, contact the information and call center as follows:
GE Grid Solutions
650 Markland Street
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
Worldwide telephone: +1 905 927 7070
Europe/Middle East/Africa telephone: +34 94 485 88 54
North America toll-free: 1 800 547 8629
Fax: +1 905 927 5098
Worldwide e-mail: multilin.tech@ge.com
Europe e-mail: multilin.tech.euro@ge.com
Website: http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin
Table of Contents
1. INTRODUCTION Overview ................................................................................................................................1 - 1
Description of the 350 Feeder Protection System..............................................1 - 2
350 order codes..................................................................................................................1 - 5
Specifications.......................................................................................................................1 - 6
Password security....................................................................................................................1 - 6
Protection.....................................................................................................................................1 - 6
Metering........................................................................................................................................1 - 10
Data capture ..............................................................................................................................1 - 10
Control ...........................................................................................................................................1 - 11
Inputs .............................................................................................................................................1 - 12
Outputs..........................................................................................................................................1 - 13
Power supply ..............................................................................................................................1 - 13
Communications ......................................................................................................................1 - 14
Testing and certification .......................................................................................................1 - 14
Physical .........................................................................................................................................1 - 16
Environmental............................................................................................................................1 - 16
2. INSTALLATION Mechanical installation ...................................................................................................2 - 1

Dimensions..................................................................................................................................2 - 1
Product identification .............................................................................................................2 - 3
Mounting ......................................................................................................................................2 - 3
Standard panel mount .........................................................................................................2 - 3
Mounting using the S1/S2/MDP/IAC or SR735 adapter plate............................2 - 6
Drawout unit withdrawal and insertion.........................................................................2 - 10
IP20 Cover (optional) ...............................................................................................................2 - 11
Electrical installation ........................................................................................................2 - 12
Terminal identification ...........................................................................................................2 - 13
Wire range .................................................................................................................................2 - 17
Phase sequence and transformer polarity...................................................................2 - 17
Current inputs ............................................................................................................................2 - 17
Ground and sensitive ground CT inputs ........................................................................2 - 18
Zero sequence CT installation ............................................................................................2 - 18
Voltage inputs ............................................................................................................................2 - 19
Control power ............................................................................................................................2 - 20
Contact inputs ...........................................................................................................................2 - 20
Trip and Close output relays ...............................................................................................2 - 21
Serial communications ..........................................................................................................2 - 23
IRIG-B .............................................................................................................................................2 - 24
3. INTERFACES Front control panel interface........................................................................................3 - 2

Description ..................................................................................................................................3 - 3
Display ...........................................................................................................................................3 - 4
Working with the Keypad....................................................................................................3 - 4
LED status indicators - Front panel with non-programmable LEDs ................3 - 5
LED status indicators - Front panel with programmable LEDs ..........................3 - 6
Relay messages ........................................................................................................................3 - 7
Target messages.....................................................................................................................3 - 7
Self-test errors..........................................................................................................................3 - 8
Flash messages .......................................................................................................................3 - 9
350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL i

Software setup.................................................................................................................... 3 - 9
Quick setup - Software interface...................................................................................... 3 - 10
EnerVista SR3 Setup Software ........................................................................................... 3 - 10
Hardware and software requirements.........................................................................3 - 11
Installing the EnerVista SR3 Setup software ..............................................................3 - 11
Upgrading the software.......................................................................................................3 - 14
Connecting EnerVista SR3 Setup to the relay ............................................................ 3 - 14
Configuring serial communications...............................................................................3 - 14
Using the Quick Connect feature ....................................................................................3 - 15
Configuring Ethernet communications ........................................................................3 - 16
Connecting to the relay........................................................................................................3 - 17
Working with setpoints and setpoint files ....................................................................3 - 18
Engaging a device ..................................................................................................................3 - 18
Entering setpoints...................................................................................................................3 - 18
Setting programmable LEDs..............................................................................................3 - 20
File support ................................................................................................................................3 - 21
Using setpoints files...............................................................................................................3 - 21
Downloading and saving setpoint files ........................................................................3 - 21
Adding setpoints files to the environment ..................................................................3 - 22
Creating a new setpoint file ...............................................................................................3 - 22
Upgrading setpoint files to a new revision .................................................................3 - 23
Printing setpoints and actual values .............................................................................3 - 24
Printing actual values from a connected device .....................................................3 - 25
Loading setpoints from a file.............................................................................................3 - 26
Uninstalling files and clearing data................................................................................3 - 26
Upgrading relay firmware ................................................................................................... 3 - 27
Loading new relay firmware..............................................................................................3 - 27
Advanced EnerVista SR3 Setup features ...................................................................... 3 - 28
Flexcurve editor .......................................................................................................................3 - 28
Transient recorder (Waveform capture).......................................................................3 - 30
Protection summary..............................................................................................................3 - 33
Password security ..................................................................................................................3 - 34
4. ACTUAL VALUES Actual values overview ...................................................................................................4 - 1

A1 Status................................................................................................................................ 4 - 3
Clock............................................................................................................................................... 4 - 3
Contact inputs ........................................................................................................................... 4 - 4
Output relays ............................................................................................................................. 4 - 4
Logic elements .......................................................................................................................... 4 - 4
Virtual inputs .............................................................................................................................. 4 - 5
Remote inputs ........................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
Remote outputs ........................................................................................................................ 4 - 5
Contact inputs summary...................................................................................................... 4 - 5
Output relays summary ........................................................................................................ 4 - 5
Logic elements summary..................................................................................................... 4 - 6
GOOSE status............................................................................................................................. 4 - 6
GOOSE HDR status .................................................................................................................. 4 - 6
RTC Sync Source....................................................................................................................... 4 - 6
Redundancy ............................................................................................................................... 4 - 6
IEEE 1588 PTP (Precision Time Protocol)........................................................................ 4 - 7
A2 Metering .......................................................................................................................... 4 - 7
Current .......................................................................................................................................... 4 - 7
Voltage.......................................................................................................................................... 4 - 8
Power............................................................................................................................................. 4 - 9
Energy ........................................................................................................................................... 4 - 9
Thermal capacity ..................................................................................................................... 4 - 9
ii 350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Clear energy................................................................................................................................4 - 10
A3 Records ............................................................................................................................4 - 10
Event records .............................................................................................................................4 - 10
Transient records .....................................................................................................................4 - 30
Clear event record ...................................................................................................................4 - 30
Clear transient record ............................................................................................................4 - 30
Clear thermal capacity record ...........................................................................................4 - 30
A4 Target messages .........................................................................................................4 - 30
5. QUICK SETUP - Quick Setup settings.........................................................................................................5 - 2

FRONT CONTROL
PANEL
6. SETPOINTS Setpoints Main Menu........................................................................................................6 - 1

Setpoint entry methods.........................................................................................................6 - 3
Common setpoints ..................................................................................................................6 - 3
Logic diagrams..........................................................................................................................6 - 4
Setting text abbreviations ....................................................................................................6 - 4
S1 Relay setup .....................................................................................................................6 - 6
Clock ...............................................................................................................................................6 - 7
Real Time Clock........................................................................................................................6 - 8
Password security....................................................................................................................6 - 10
Access passwords ..................................................................................................................6 - 11
Communications ......................................................................................................................6 - 12
RS485 interface .......................................................................................................................6 - 13
Ethernet.......................................................................................................................................6 - 13
Modbus........................................................................................................................................6 - 14
IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication ......................................................................6 - 15
IEC60870-5-104 protocol....................................................................................................6 - 31
DNP communication .............................................................................................................6 - 32
SR3 IEC 61850 GOOSE details ...........................................................................................6 - 47
OPC–UA Settings .....................................................................................................................6 - 48
Event recorder ...........................................................................................................................6 - 48
Transient recorder ...................................................................................................................6 - 50
Front panel with non-programmable LEDs .................................................................6 - 51
Front panel with programmable LEDs ...........................................................................6 - 52
Installation ...................................................................................................................................6 - 53
S2 System Setup.................................................................................................................6 - 54
Current sensing .........................................................................................................................6 - 54
Voltage sensing.........................................................................................................................6 - 55
Power system.............................................................................................................................6 - 56
Breaker..........................................................................................................................................6 - 56
User curve....................................................................................................................................6 - 57
FlexCurves ...................................................................................................................................6 - 57
S3 Protection........................................................................................................................6 - 58
Current elements......................................................................................................................6 - 61
TOC curves .................................................................................................................................6 - 61
Phase timed overcurrent protection .............................................................................6 - 69
Phase instantaneous overcurrent protection ...........................................................6 - 72
Phase directional ....................................................................................................................6 - 74
Ground/Sensitive Ground timed overcurrent protection.....................................6 - 77
Ground/Sensitive Ground instantaneous overcurrent protection...................6 - 80
Ground directional .................................................................................................................6 - 83
350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL iii

Neutral timed overcurrent protection...........................................................................6 - 88
Negative sequence timed overcurrent protection..................................................6 - 91
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent protection ........................................................6 - 94
Neutral directional..................................................................................................................6 - 97
Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent protection ...............................6 - 102
Voltage elements ..................................................................................................................... 6 - 104
Phase undervoltage...............................................................................................................6 - 104
Phase overvoltage..................................................................................................................6 - 108
Neutral overvoltage...............................................................................................................6 - 110
Negative sequence overvoltage......................................................................................6 - 112
Auxiliary undervoltage .........................................................................................................6 - 114
Auxiliary overvoltage.............................................................................................................6 - 117
Underfrequency.......................................................................................................................6 - 119
Overfrequency..........................................................................................................................6 - 122
Thermal Model........................................................................................................................... 6 - 124
VT fuse fail ................................................................................................................................... 6 - 128
S4 Controls............................................................................................................................ 6 - 129
Change setpoint group ......................................................................................................... 6 - 130
Virtual inputs .............................................................................................................................. 6 - 132
Logic elements .......................................................................................................................... 6 - 133
Breaker control ......................................................................................................................... 6 - 138
Cold load pickup....................................................................................................................... 6 - 139
Breaker failure........................................................................................................................... 6 - 143
Autorecloser ............................................................................................................................... 6 - 145
Synchrocheck ............................................................................................................................6 - 150
S5 Inputs/Outputs ............................................................................................................. 6 - 156
Contact inputs ........................................................................................................................... 6 - 156
Output relays ............................................................................................................................. 6 - 157
Output Relay 1 "Trip" .............................................................................................................6 - 158
Output Relay 2 "Close"..........................................................................................................6 - 160
Auxiliary Output Relays 3 to 6...........................................................................................6 - 162
Critical Failure Relay #7 .......................................................................................................6 - 163
Virtual inputs .............................................................................................................................. 6 - 164
Remote inputs ........................................................................................................................... 6 - 166
7. MAINTENANCE M1 Relay information....................................................................................................... 7 - 2

M3 Breaker maintenance .............................................................................................. 7 - 4
Trip coil.......................................................................................................................................... 7 - 4
Close coil ...................................................................................................................................... 7 - 6
Breaker trip counter................................................................................................................ 7 - 9
M4 Breaker monitor.......................................................................................................... 7 - 12
M5 Relay maintenance ...................................................................................................7 - 12
Ambient temperature ............................................................................................................ 7 - 12
General maintenance...................................................................................................... 7 - 15
In-service maintenance........................................................................................................ 7 - 15
Out-of-service maintenance .............................................................................................. 7 - 15
Unscheduled maintenance (system interruption) .................................................... 7 - 15
A. APPENDIX Warranty................................................................................................................................ A - 1
Repairs .................................................................................................................................... A - 2
Change notes ...................................................................................................................... A - 3
Manual Revision history........................................................................................................ A - 3
iv 350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

GE
Grid Solutions
350 Feeder Protection System
Chapter 1: Introduction
Introduction
Overview
The 350 is a microprocessor-based relay for primary and backup over-current protection
of medium and low voltage distribution feeders. The relay is also suitable for providing
over-current and backup protection for small and medium size motors, transformers,
generators, and distribution bus-bars. The small footprint and the withdrawable option
make the 350 relay ideal for panel mounting on either new or retrofit installations. The
combination of proven hardware, a variety of protection and control features, and
communications, makes the relay ideal for total feeder protection and control. Equipped
with serial (RS485), USB, and Ethernet ports with the possibility of adding redundancy
(IEC62439, PRP and HSR), and a wide selection of protocols such as Modbus, DNP3.0, IEC
60870-5-103, 60870-5-104, IEC61850 GOOSE, OPC-UA, the 350 relay is the best-in-class
for MCCs and PCCs, SCADA and inter-relay communications. The 350 relay provides
excellent transparency with respect to power system conditions and events, through its
four-line 20-character display, as well as the EnerVista SR3 Setup program. Conveniently
located LEDs provide indication of relay operation, alarm, and pickup, as well as breaker,
and relay status.
The 350 relay provides the following key benefits:
• Withdrawable small footprint – saves on rewiring and space. (non-draw out version is
also available)
• Multiple protection groups with the added flexibility of switching through a wide
selection of overcurrent protection and control features.
• Fast setup (Quick Setup) menu for power-system setup and a simple overcurrent
protection configuration.
• Large four-line LCD display, LEDs, and an easy-to-navigate keypad.
• Multiple communication protocols for simultaneous access when integrated into
monitoring and control systems.
350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–1

DESCRIPTION OF THE 350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
Description of the 350 Feeder Protection System

CPU
Relay functions are controlled by two processors: a Freescale MPC5554 32-bit
microprocessor measures all analog signals and digital inputs and controls all output
relays; a Freescale MPC520B 32-bit microprocessor controls all the Ethernet
communication protocols.
Analog Input and Waveform Capture
Magnetic transformers are used to scale-down the incoming analog signals from the
source instrument transformers. The analog signals are then passed through a 960 Hz low
pass anti-aliasing filter. All signals are then simultaneously captured by sample and hold
buffers to ensure there are no phase shifts. The signals are converted to digital values by a
12-bit A/D converter before finally being passed on to the CPU for analysis.
Both current and voltage are sampled thirty-two times per power frequency cycle. These
‘raw’ samples are scaled in software, then placed into the waveform capture buffer, thus
emulating a fault recorder. The waveforms can be retrieved from the relay via the EnerVista
SR3 Setup software for display and diagnostics.
Frequency
Frequency measurement is accomplished by measuring the time between zero crossings
of the Bus VT phase A voltage . The signals are passed through a low pass filter to prevent
false zero crossings. Sampling is synchronized to the Va-x voltage zero crossing which
results in better co-ordination for multiple 350 relays on the same bus.
Phasors, Transients, and Harmonics
Current waveforms are processed four times every cycle with a DC Offset Filter and a
Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). The resulting phasors have fault current transients and
all harmonics removed. This results in an overcurrent relay that is extremely secure and
reliable; one that will not overreach.
Processing of AC Current Inputs
The DC Offset Filter is an infinite impulse response (IIR) digital filter, which removes the DC
component from the asymmetrical current present at the moment a fault occurs. This is
done for all current signals used for overcurrent protection; voltage signals bypass the DC
Offset Filter. This filter ensures no overreach of the overcurrent protection.
The Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) uses exactly one sample cycle to calculate a phasor
quantity which represents the signal at the fundamental frequency; all harmonic
components are removed. All subsequent calculations (e.g. RMS, power, etc.) are based
upon the current and voltage phasors, such that the resulting values have no harmonic
components.
Protection Elements
All protection elements are processed four times every cycle to determine if a pickup has
occurred or a timer has expired. The protection elements use RMS current/voltage, based
on the magnitude of the phasor. Hence, protection is impervious to both harmonics and DC
transients.
1–2 350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION DESCRIPTION OF THE 350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM
Figure 1-1: Single line diagram
BUS
BUS VT
52
79 27P 59P 59_2 59N 81U 81O VTFF

TRIP CLOSE 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
MONITORING
3
50P 50N 51P 51N 50_2 51-2 49 67P 67N METERING
2 2 1 1 1 1 1 TRANSIENT RECORDER
EVENT RECORDER
CLP 50BF 79
1 350 RELAY
AY
50G/ 67G/SG
50G/SG 51G/SG
51G
E
2 1 1
25
27X 59X 1
LOAD 1 1
898742A4.CDR
Table 1-1: Protection functions

ANSI Device Description
25 Synchrocheck
27P Phase Undervoltage
27X Auxiliary Undervoltage
49 Thermal Model
50P Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent
50N Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent
50G/SG Ground (or Sensitive Ground) Instantaneous Overcurrent
50BF Breaker Failure
50_2 Negative Sequence Overcurrent
51P Phase Time Overcurrent
51G/SG Ground (or Sensitive Ground) Time Overcurrent
51N Neutral Time Overcurrent
51_2 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent
59P Phase Overvoltage
59X Auxiliary Overvoltage
59N Neutral Overvoltage
59_2 Negative Sequence Overvoltage
67G/SG Ground (or Sensitive Ground) Directional Element
67N Neutral Directional Element
67P Phase DIrectional Element
79 Autoreclose
81U Underfrequency

DESCRIPTION OF THE 350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
ANSI Device Description

81O Overfrequency
CLP Cold Load Pickup
VTFF Voltage Fuse Failure
Figure 1-2: Main Menu structure
ACTUAL VALUES ACTUAL VALUES

QUICK SETUP A1 STATUS
SETPOINTS A2 METERING
MAINTENANCE A3 RECORDS
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
QUICK SETUP
RELAY STATUS
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
PH CT PRIMARY
[SENS] GND CT PRIMARY
VT CONNECTION
VT SEC. VOLTAGE
VT RATIO
AUX VT SECONDARY
AUX VT RATIO
PH TOC FUNCTION PHASE TOC

GND TOC FUNCTION PH TOC PICKUP
NTRL TOC FNCTN ▼
PH IOC1 FUNCTION PH TOC CURVE
GND IOC1 FNCTN PH TOC TDM
NTRL IOC1 FNCTN GROUND TOC

GROUND TOC PICKUP
SETPOINTS
▼
S1 RELAY SETUP
GROUND TOC CURVE
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
GROUND TOC TDM
S3 PROTECTION
▼ NEUTRAL TOC
S4 CONTROLS NTRL TOC PICKUP
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS ▼
NTRL TOC CURVE
MAINTENANCE
NTRL TOC TDM
M1 RELAY INFO
M3 BKR MAINTENANCE PHASE IOC1
M4 BKR MONITOR PH IOC1 PICKUP
▼
GROUND IOC1
898756A2.cdr M5 RELAY MAINT
GND IOC1 PICKUP
M6 FACTORY SERVICE
NEUTRAL IOC1
NTRL IOC1 PICKUP

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION 350 ORDER CODES
350 order codes

The information to specify a 350 relay is provided in the following order code figure.
Figure 1-3: Order Codes
350 * * * * * * * * * * * *
Interface 350 | | | | | | | | | | | | 350 Feeder Protection System
Language E | | | | | | | | | | | English without programmable LEDs
L | | | | | | | | | | | English with programmable LEDs
Phase Currents P1 | | | | | | | | | | 1 A 3-phase current inputs
P5 | | | | | | | | | | 5 A 3-phase current inputs
Ground Currentsa G1 | | | | | | | | | 1 A ground current input
G5 | | | | | | | | | 5 A ground current input
S1 | | | | | | | | | 1 A sensitive ground current input
S5 | | | | | | | | | 5 A sensitive ground current input
Power Supplyb L | | | | | | | | 24 to 48 V DC
H | | | | | | | | 110 to 250 V DC/110 to 230 V AC
Input/Output E | | | | | | | 10 Inputs, 7 Outputs (2 Form A, 5 Form C)
Current Protection S | | | | | | Standard configuration: 50P(1), 50G(1), 50SG(1), 50N(1),
| | | | | | 51P(1), 51G(1), 50SG(1), 51N(1)
| | | | | | Extended configuration: 49, 50P(2), 50G(2), 50SG(2), 50N(2),
E
| | | | | | 51P(1), 51G(1), 51SG(1), 51N(1)
| | | | | | Advanced configuration: 49, 50P(2), 50G(2), 50SG(2), 50N(2),
M
| | | | | | 51P(1), 51G(1), 51SG, 51N(1), 50_2 (1), 51_2(1)
Control N | | | | | No selection
C | | | | | CLP, 50BF, Autoreclose (79)
Other Options N | | | | No selection
D | | | | Neutral and Ground Directional Elements: 67N(1), 67G(1)
M | | | | Voltage Metering
| | | | Phase, Neutral and Ground Directional Elements: 67P(1),
R
| | | | 67N(1), 67G(1) + Voltage Metering
| | | | Voltage Protection, Phase, Neutral and Ground Directional
P | | | | elements - 27P(1), 27X(1), 59P(1), 59N(1), 59X(1), 59_2(1),
| | | | 81O(2), 81U(2), 67P(1), 67N(1), 67G(1), VTFF(1), 25(1)
| | Standard: Front USB, Rear RS485: Modbus RTU, DNP3.0,
Communicationsc S N
| | IEC60870-5-103
| | Standard + Ethernet (Copper & Fiber - MTRJ),
1 E | | Modbus TCP/IP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104
2 E
| | Modbus TCP/IP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 GOOSE
3 E
| | Modbus TCP/IP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850
| | Standard + Ethernet (Copper & Fiber - MTRJ),Modbus TCP/IP,
4 E | | DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850. OPC-UA
| | Standard + Ethernet - PRP/HSR/1588 (Fiber - MTRJ), Modbus
5 E
| | TCP/IP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850, OPC-UA
Case Design D | Protection Relay with drawout design
N | Protection Relay with non-drawout design
Harsh Environment N None
H Harsh Environment Conformal Coating
a. Ground Current options G1/G5 must match the corresponding P1/P5 Phase currents (i.e. 5A and 1A must not be mixed).
The ground input CT rating must match the phase input CTs.
b. The Language option L is only available on the drawout version
c. Communication options 4E and 5E are only available on the drawout version
898800A7.PDF

SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
Features related to each order number are subject to change without notice.
NOTE:
NOTE
Accessories
• 1819-0103 350 Retrofit Kit for 735
• 1819-0102 350 Retrofit Kit for IAC Relay
• 1819-0101 350 Retrofit Kit for MDP Relay
• 1819-0100 350 Retrofit Kit for S1/S2 Cut-Out
• 18L0-0075 SR3 Depth reducing collar - 1.375”
• 18L0-0076 SR3 Depth reducing collar - 3.00”
• 18L0-0080 SR3 IP20 Kit
Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
NOTE:
NOTE
To obtain the total element operating time, i.e. from the presence of a trip condition to
NOTE:
initiation of a trip, add 8 ms output relay time to the operate times listed below.
NOTE
Password security
PASSWORD SECURITY
Master Reset Password: .................................. 8 to 10 alpha-numeric characters
Settings Password:............................................. 3 to 10 alpha-numeric characters for local and remote
access
Control Password: .............................................. 3 to 10 alpha-numeric characters for local and remote
access
Protection
SYNCHROCHECK (25)
Dead/Live levels for Line and Bus:.............. 0 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
Maximum voltage difference:....................... 0.02 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
Maximum angle difference:........................... 2° to 80° in steps of 1°
Maximum frequency slip: ............................... 0.01 to 5.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Breaker Closing time:........................................ 0.01 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Dead Source function:...................................... None
(DL-DB) Dead Line-Dead Bus
(LL-DB) Live Line-Dead Bus
(DL-LB) Dead Line-Live Bus
(AL-DB) Any Line-Dead Bus
(DL-AB) Dead Line-Any Bus
(OL-OD) One Live-Other Dead
(NBL) Not Both Live

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND/NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TIME OVERCURRENT (51P/51N/51G/

51_2)
Pickup Level:.......................................................... 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level: ...................................................... 97 to 99% of Pickup @ I > 1 x CT
Pickup - 0.02 x CT @ I < 1 x CT
Curve Shape:......................................................... ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse
Definite Time (0.1 s base curve)
IEC Curve A/B/C/Short
IAC Extreme/Very/Inverse/Short
User Curve, FlexCurve™ A/B (programmable curves)
Curve Multiplier:................................................... 0.05 to 50.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset Time: ............................................................ Instantaneous, Linear
Curve Timing Accuracy:................................... ±3% of expected inverse time or 1.5 cycle, whichever is
greater, from pickup to operate
Level Accuracy:.................................................... per CT input
SENSITIVE GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (51SG)
Pickup Level:.......................................................... 0.005 to 3 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Dropout Level: ...................................................... 97 to 99% of Pickup @ I > 0.1 x CT
Pickup - 0.002 x CT @ I < 0.1 x CT
Curve Shape:......................................................... ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse
Definite Time (0.1 s base curve)
IEC Curve A/B/C/Short Inverse
IAC Extreme/Very/Inverse/Short Inverse
User Curve, FlexCurve™ A/B
Curve Multiplier:................................................... 0.05 to 50.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset Time: ............................................................ Instantaneous, Linear
Curve Timing Accuracy:................................... ±3% of expected inverse time or 1 cycle, whichever is
greater, from pickup to operate
TOC (Time Overcurrent) and IOC (Instantaneous Overcurrent)

NOTE:
NOTE PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND/NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT

(50P/50N/50G/50_2)
Pickup Level:.......................................................... 0.05 to 20 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level: ...................................................... 97 to 99% of Pickup @ I > 1 x CT
Pickup - 0.02 x CT @ I <1 x CT
Time Delay: ............................................................ 0.00 to 300.00 sec in steps of 0.01
Operate Time:....................................................... <30 ms @ 60Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP, No time delay)
<35 ms @ 50Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP, No time delay)
Time Delay Accuracy: ....................................... 0 to 1 cycle (Time Delay selected)
SENSITIVE GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50SG)
Pickup Level (Gnd IOC): ..................................... 0.005 to 3 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Dropout Level: ...................................................... 97 to 99% of Pickup @ I > 0.1 x CT
Pickup - 0.002 x CT @ I < 0.1 x CT
Time Delay: ............................................................ 0.00 to 300.00 sec in steps of 0.01
Operate Time:....................................................... <30 ms @ 60Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP, No time delay)
<35 ms @ 50Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP, No time delay)
Time Delay Accuracy: ....................................... 0 to 1 cycle (Time Delay selected)

PHASE DIRECTIONAL (67P)

Directionality:........................................................ Co-existing forward and reverse
Operating: .............................................................. Phase Current (Ia, Ib, Ic)
Polarizing Voltage:.............................................. Quadrature Voltage
(ABC phase sequence: Vbc, Vca, Vab)
(CBA phase sequence: Vcb, Vac, Vba)
Polarizing voltage threshold:......................... 0.05 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
MTA (Maximum Torque Angle): ..................... From 0º to 359º in steps of 1°
Angle Accuracy:................................................... ±4º
Operational Delay: ............................................. 20 to 30 ms
The selection of the “P” or “R” option from “350 OTHER OPTIONS” in the order code table,
NOTE:
will enable the Phase directional element. The polarizing voltage used for this element is
NOTE the line voltage.
GROUND DIRECTIONAL (67G)

Directionality:........................................................ Co-existing forward and reverse
Operating: .............................................................. Ground Current (Ig)
Polarizing Voltage:.............................................. -V0 calculated using phase voltages (VTs must be connected
in “Wye”)
-3V0 measured from Vaux input. (3V0 provided by an
external open delta connection).
MTA (Maximum Torque Angle): ..................... From 0º to 359º in steps of 1°
Angle Accuracy:................................................... ±4º
The selection of the “D” option from “350 OTHER OPTIONS” in the Order Code table, will
NOTE:
enable the Ground Directional element with voltage polarizing 3V0 measured from the
NOTE Vaux voltage input.
The selection of the “P” or “R” option from “350 OTHER OPTIONS” in the order code table,
NOTE:
will enable the Ground directional element. The polarizing voltage used for this element is
NOTE the computed V0 from the measured phase voltage inputs.
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL (67N)

Directionality:........................................................ Forward and reverse
Polarizing:............................................................... Voltage, Current, Dual
Polarizing Voltage:.............................................. - V0 calculated using phase voltages (VTs must be
connected in “Wye”)
-3V0 measured from Vaux input (3V0 provided by an
external open delta connection).
Polarizing Current:.............................................. IG
MTA:........................................................................... From 0º to 359º in steps of 1°
Angle Accuracy:................................................... ±4º
The selection of the “D” option from “350 OTHER OPTIONS” in the Order Code table, will
NOTE:
enable the Neutral Directional element with voltage polarizing 3V0 measured from the
NOTE Vaux voltage input.
The selection of “P,” or “R” option from “350 OTHER OPTIONS” in the Order Code table, will
enable the Neutral Directional elements with voltage polarizing V0 computed from the
measured phase voltage inputs.
The ground polarizing current, IG, is available for selection in both cases.
THERMAL MODEL (49)

Current:.................................................................... Fundamental phasor
Pickup Accuracy:................................................. per current inputs
Timing Accuracy:................................................ See graph below

The graph shows the trip time error with respect to the ratio of cable load and thermal
model pickup setting. With a smaller I/Ipkp ratio, the time error tends to be higher, as
accumulated through the logarithmic formula, the measurement error, and the time of
measurement. For higher I/Ipkp ratios, the time to trip is substantially more accurate. Each
point on the graph represents a trip time error, with the I/Ipkp ratio kept constant during
the test.
PHASE/AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE (27P, 27X)
Minimum Voltage:............................................... Programmable from 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
Pickup Level:.......................................................... 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
Dropout Level: ...................................................... 101 to 104% of pickup
Curve: ....................................................................... Definite Time, Inverse Time
Time Delay: ............................................................ 0.1 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
Operate Time:....................................................... Time delay ±30 ms @ 60Hz (V < 0.85 x PKP)Time delay ±40
ms @ 50Hz (V < 0.85 x PKP)
Curve Timing Accuracy:................................... ±3% of expected time or 1 cycle, whichever is greater, from
pickup to operate
Level Accuracy:.................................................... Per voltage input
PHASE/AUXILIARY/NEUTRAL/NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE (59P, 59X, 59N, 59_2)
Pickup Level:.......................................................... 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
Operate Time:....................................................... Time delay ±35 ms @ 60Hz (V > 1.1 x PKP)Time delay ±40 ms
@ 50Hz (V > 1.1 x PKP)
Time Delay Accuracy: ....................................... 0 to 1 cycle
Level Accuracy:.................................................... Per voltage input
UNDERFREQUENCY (81U)
Minimum Voltage:............................................... 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
Pickup Level:.......................................................... 40.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Dropout Level: ...................................................... Pickup +0.05 Hz
Time Delay Accuracy: ....................................... 0 to 6 cycles (Time Delay selected)
Operate Time:....................................................... Typically 10 cycles @ 0.1Hz/s change
Level Accuracy:.................................................... ±0.03 Hz
OVERFREQUENCY (81O)
Minimum Voltage:............................................... 0.3 x VT
Pickup Level:.......................................................... 40.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Dropout Level: ...................................................... Pickup -0.05 Hz
Time Delay Accuracy: ....................................... 0 to 6 cycles (Time Delay selected)
Operate Time:....................................................... Typically 10 cycles @ 0.1Hz/s change
Level Accuracy:.................................................... ±0.03 Hz

FUSE FAIL
Time Delay:............................................................ 1 s
Timing Accuracy:................................................ ±0.5 s
Elements:................................................................ Trip or Alarm
Metering
PARAMETER ACCURACY RESOLUTION RANGE

3-Phase Real Power (MW) ±1% of full scale 0.1 MW ±100 MW
3-Phase Reactive Power (Mvar) ±1% of full scale 0.1 Mvar ±100 Mvar
3-Phase Apparent Power (MVA) ±1% of full scale 0.1 MVA 100 MVA
3-Phase Positive Watthour (MWh) ±1% of full scale ±0.001 MWh 50000.0 MWh
3-Phase Negative Watthour (MWh) ±1% of full scale ±0.001 MWh 50000.0 MWh
3-Phase Positive Varhour (Mvarh) ±1% of full scale ±0.001 Mvarh 50000.0 Mvarh
3-Phase Negative Varhour (Mvarh) ±1% of full scale ±0.001 Mvarh 50000.0 Mvarh
Power Factor ±0.05 0.01 -0.99 to 1.00
Frequency ±0.05 Hz 0.01 Hz 40.00 to 70.00 Hz
Full scale for CT Input is 3 x CT

NOTE:
NOTE CURRENTS
Parameters:........................................................... Phase A, Phase B, Phase C, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive
Ground, Positive Sequence, Negative Sequence and Zero
Sequence
Accuracy:................................................................ See the Inputs section in Chapter 1: Specifications
VOLTAGES
Parameters:........................................................... Wye VTs: AN, BN, CN, Negative Sequence, Zero Sequence
and Auxiliary
Delta VTs: AB, BC, CA, Negative Sequence, Zero Sequence
and Auxiliary
Accuracy:................................................................ See the Inputs section in Chapter 1: Specifications
Data capture
TRANSIENT RECORDER
Buffer size: ............................................................. 3s
No. of buffers:....................................................... 1x192, 3x64, 6x32
No. of channels:................................................... 14
Sampling rate:...................................................... 32 samples per cycle
Triggers: .................................................................. Manual Command
Contact Input
Virtual Input
Logic Element
Element Pickup/Trip/Dropout/Alarm
Data: ......................................................................... AC input channels
Contact input state
Contact output state
Virtual input state
Logic element state
Data storage:........................................................ RAM - battery backed-up

EVENT RECORDER
Number of events:.............................................. 256
Header: .................................................................... relay name, order code, firmware revision
Content:................................................................... event number, date of event, cause of event,per-phase
current, ground current, sensitive ground current, neutral
current, per-phase voltage (VTs connected in “Wye”), or
phase-phase voltages (VTs connected in “Delta”), system
frequency, power, power factor, thermal capacity
Data Storage:........................................................ Retained for 3 days
CLOCK
Setup:........................................................................ Date and time
Daylight Saving Time
IRIG-B:....................................................................... Auto-detect (DC shift or Amplitude Modulated)
Amplitude modulated: 1 to 10 V pk-pk
DC shift: 1 to 10 V DC
Input impedance: 40 kOhm ± 10%
Accuracy with IRIG-B: ....................................... ± 1 ms
Accuracy without IRIG-B: ................................ ± 1 min / month
Control
LOGIC ELEMENTS
Number of logic elements: ............................. 16
Trigger source inputs per element: ............ 3
Block inputs per element: ............................... 3
Supported operations: ..................................... AND, OR, Pickup / Dropout timers
Pickup timer:.......................................................... 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms
Dropout timer: ...................................................... 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms
BREAKER CONTROL
Operation:............................................................... Asserted Contact Input, Logic Element, Virtual Input,
Manual Command
Function: ................................................................. Opens / closes the feeder breaker
AUTORECLOSE
Reclose attempts:............................................... Up to 4 shots
Time Delay Accuracy: ....................................... 0 to 3 cycles (AR Dead Time selected)
Elements: ................................................................ Inputs, Outputs, Breaker Status (52 status)
SYNCHROCHECK SUPERVISION
Operation:............................................................... Automatically
Function: ................................................................. Close breaker supervision
BREAKER FAILURE
Pickup Level:.......................................................... 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Timer 1 Delay: ...................................................... 0.03 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timer 2 Delay: ...................................................... 0.00 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Time Delay Accuracy: ....................................... 0 to 1 cycle (Timer 1, Timer 2)
Reset Time: ............................................................ <14 ms typical at 2 x pickup at 60 Hz
<16 ms typical at 2 x pickup at 50 Hz
BREAKER TRIP COUNTER
Trip Counter Limit (Pickup):............................. 1 to 10000 in steps of 1

COLD LOAD PICKUP BLOCKING

Operation: .............................................................. Automatically (current level), or by command (asserted
input)
Function:................................................................. Block IOC functions, raise TOC pickup, for selected period of
time
Time Delay Accuracy:....................................... 0 to 1 cycle (block Time)
±50 ms (outage time ≤5 min)
±1 s (outage time > 5 min)
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
High Temperature Pickup:.............................. 20°C to 80°C in steps of 1°C
Low Temperature Pickup: ............................... -40°C to 20°C in steps of 1°C
Time Delay:............................................................ 1 to 60 min in steps of 1 min
Temperature Dropout:...................................... Configurable 90 to 98% of pickup
Temperature Accuracy: ................................... ±10°C
Timing Accuracy:................................................ ±1 second
Inputs
CONTACT INPUTS
Inputs: ...................................................................... 10
Selectable thresholds: ...................................... 17, 33, 84, 166 VDC
±10%
Recognition time:................................................ 1/2 cycle
Debounce time: ................................................... 1 to 64 ms, selectable, in steps of 1 ms
Maximum input voltage & continuous
current draw:................................................... 300 VDC, 2 mA, connected to Class 2 source
Type: ......................................................................... opto-isolated inputs
External switch: ................................................... wet contact
PHASE & GROUND CURRENT INPUTS
CT Primary: ............................................................
1 to 6000 A
Range:......................................................................
0.02 to 20 × CT
Input type:..............................................................
1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order)
Nominal frequency: ........................................... 50/60 Hz
Burden: ....................................................................
<0.1 VA at rated load
Accuracy:................................................................
±1% of reading at 1× CT
±3% of reading from 0.2 to 20 × CT
±20% of reading from 0.02 to 0.19 × CT
CT withstand:........................................................ 1 second at 100 × rated current
2 seconds at 40 × rated current
continuous at 3 × rated current
SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT INPUT
CT Primary: ............................................................
1 to 600 A
Range:......................................................................
0.002 to 3 × CT
Input type:..............................................................
1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order)
Burden: ....................................................................
<0.1 VA at rated load
Accuracy:................................................................
±1% of reading at 0.1× CT
±3% of reading from 0.02 to 3 × CT
±20% of reading from 0.002 to 0.019 × CT
CT withstand:........................................................ 1 second at 100 × rated current
2 seconds at 40 × rated current
continuous at 3 × rated current

PHASE/AUX VOLTAGE INPUTS

Source VT:............................................................... 0.12 to 65 kV / 50 to 220 V
VT secondary range: ......................................... 50 to 240 V
VT ratio:.................................................................... 1.0 to 1500.0 in steps of 0.1
Relay burden:........................................................ <0.25 VA at 120 V
Accuracy: ................................................................ ±1.0% throughout range
Voltage withstand: ............................................. 260 VAC continuous
Outputs
FORM-A RELAYS
Configuration:....................................................... 2 (two) electromechanical
Contact material: ................................................ silver-alloy
Operate time:........................................................ <8 ms
Continuous current:........................................... 10 A
Make and carry for 0.2s:.................................. 30 A per ANSI C37.90
Break (DC inductive, L/R=40 ms):................. 24 V / 1 A 48 V / 0.5 A 125 V / 0.3 A 250 V / 0.2 A
Break (DC resistive):............................................ 24 V / 10 A 48 V / 6 A 125 V / 0.5 A 250 V / 0.3 A
Break (AC inductive): .......................................... 720 VA @ 250 VAC Pilot duty A300
Break (AC resistive): ............................................ 277 VAC / 10 A
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR
Applicable voltage:............................................. 20 to 250 VDC
Trickle current:...................................................... 1 to 2.5 mA
FORM-C RELAYS
Configuration:....................................................... 5 (five) electromechanical
Contact material: ................................................ silver-alloy
Operate time:........................................................ <8 ms
Continuous current:........................................... 10 A
Make and carry for 0.2s:.................................. 30 A per ANSI C37.90
Break (DC inductive, L/R=40 ms):................. 24 V / 1 A 48 V / 0.5 A 125 V / 0.3 A 250 V / 0.2 A
Break (DC resistive):............................................ 24 V / 10 A 48 V / 6 A 125 V / 0.5 A 250 V / 0.3 A
Break (AC inductive): .......................................... 720 VA @ 250 VAC Pilot duty A300
Break (AC resistive): ............................................ 277 VAC / 10 A
TRIP / CLOSE SEAL-IN
Relay 1 trip seal-in:............................................. 0.00 to 9.99 s in steps of 0.01
Relay 2 close seal-in:......................................... 0.00 to 9.99 s in steps of 0.01
Power supply
HIGH RANGE POWER SUPPLY
Nominal:.................................................................. 120 to 240 VAC
125 to 250 VDC
Range: ...................................................................... 60 to 300 VAC (50 and 60 Hz)
84 to 250 VDC
Ride-through time: ............................................. 35 ms
LOW RANGE POWER SUPPLY
Nominal:.................................................................. 24 to 48 VDC
Range: ...................................................................... 20 to 60 VDC
ALL RANGES
Voltage withstand: ............................................. 2 × highest nominal voltage for 10 ms
Power consumption: ......................................... 15 W nominal, 20 W maximum
20 VA nominal, 28 VA maximum
Fuse rating: ............................................................ 5A fuse; time lag, slow blow, 350V 4.5 O.D. X 14.5mm

Communications
SERIAL
RS485 port: ............................................................ Opto-coupled
Baud rates: ............................................................ up to 115 kbps
Response time: .................................................... 1 ms typical
Parity: ....................................................................... None, Odd, Even
Protocol:.................................................................. Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-103
Maximum distance:........................................... 1200 m (4000 feet)
Isolation: ................................................................. 2 kV
ETHERNET (COPPER)
Modes: ..................................................................... 10/100 MB (auto-detect)
Connector: ............................................................. RJ-45
Protocol:.................................................................. Modbus TCP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 GOOSE,
IEC 61850, OPC-UA
ETHERNET (FIBER)
Fiber type: .............................................................. 100 MB Multi-mode
Wavelength:.......................................................... 1300 nm
Connector: ............................................................. MTRJ
Protocol:.................................................................. Modbus TCP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 GOOSE,
IEC 61850, OPC-UA, PRP, HSR
Transmit power: .................................................. -20 dBm
Receiver sensitivity: ........................................... -31 dBm
Power budget:...................................................... 9 dB
Maximum input power:.................................... -11.8 dBm
Typical distance: ................................................. 2 km (1.25 miles)
Duplex:..................................................................... half/full
USB
Standard specification:.................................... Compliant with USB 2.0
Data transfer rate: ............................................. 115 kbps
OPC-UA (OLE FOR PROCESS CONTROL - UNIFIED ARCHITECTURE)
DA Server:............................................................... Transmission of real-time data to Clients
A&E Server: ............................................................ Transmission of Event information to Clients. Acknowledge
and confirmation permitted from Client side
Testing and certification
TYPE TESTS
Test Reference Standard Test Level

Dielectric voltage withstand
(high voltage power supply*) 2200 VAC for one second
(low voltage power supply*) 550 VAC for one second
* Test level is based on basic insulation principle (Power supply I/P terminals tested to Chassis
ground).
Impulse voltage withstand EN60255-5 5KV
Damped Oscillatory IEC61000-4-18IEC60255-22-1 2.5KV CM, 1KV DM
Electrostatic Discharge EN61000-4-2/IEC60255-22-2 Level 4
RF immunity EN61000-4-3/IEC60255-22-3 Level 3
Fast Transient Disturbance EN61000-4-4/IEC60255-22-4 Class A and B
Surge Immunity EN61000-4-5/IEC60255-22-5 Level 3 & 4
Conducted RF Immunity EN61000-4-6/IEC60255-22-6 Level 3

Power Frequency Immunity EN61000-4-7/IEC60255-22-7 Class A & B

Voltage interruption and Ripple IEC60255-11 15% ripple, 200ms
DC interrupts
Radiated & Conducted Emissions CISPR11 /CISPR22/ IEC60255-25 Class A
Sinusoidal Vibration IEC60255-21-1 Class 1
Shock & Bump IEC60255-21-2 Class 1
Seismic IEC60255-21-3 Class 2
Power magnetic Immunity IEC61000-4-8 Level 5
Pulse Magnetic Immunity IEC61000-4-9 Level 4
Damped Magnetic Immunity IEC61000-4-10 Level 4
Voltage Dip & interruption IEC61000-4-11 0, 40, 70, 80% dips, 250/
300 cycle interrupts
Damped Oscillatory IEC61000-4-12 2.5KV CM, 1KV DM
Conducted RF Immunity 0-150khz IEC61000-4-16 Level 4
Voltage Ripple IEC61000-4-17 15% ripple
Ingress Protection IEC60529 IP40 front , IP10 Back
Environmental (Cold) IEC60068-2-1 -40C 16 hrs
Environmental (Dry heat) IEC60068-2-2 85C 16hrs
Relative Humidity Cyclic IEC60068-2-30 6day variant 2
EFT IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1 4KV, 2.5Khz
Damped Oscillatrory IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1 2.5KV,1Mhz
RF Immunity IEEE/ANSIC37.90.2 35V/m (max field), (80MHz-
1GHz with 1KHz sine
and80% AM modulation)
ESD IEEE/ANSIC37.90.3 8KV CD/ 15KV AD
UL508 e83849 NKCR
Safety UL C22.2-14 e83849 NKCR7
UL1053 e83849 NKCR
APPROVALS
Applicable Council Directive According to

Low voltage directive EN60255-5 / EN60255-27 / EN61010-1
CE compliance EMC Directive EN60255-26 / EN50263
EN61000-6-2
UL508
North America cULus UL1053
C22.2.No 14
EAC Machines and Equipment TR CU 010/2011
ISO Manufactured under a registered ISO9001
quality program
EAC
The EAC Technical Regulations (TR) for Machines and Equipment apply to the Customs
Union (CU) of the Russian Federation, Belarus, and Kazakhstan.

Item Description
Country of origin Spain or Canada; see label on the unit
Date of manufacture See label on the side of the 350 unit
Declaration of Conformity and/or Certificate of Available upon request
Conformity
Physical
DIMENSIONS
Refer to Chapter 2 for details
NOTE:
NOTE NON-DRAWOUT UNIT

Height: ..................................................................... 7.98” (202.7 mm)
Width:....................................................................... 6.32” (158.2 mm)
Length:..................................................................... 9.35” (237.5 mm)
DRAWOUT UNIT
Height: ..................................................................... 7.93” (201.51 mm)
Width:....................................................................... 6.62” (138.2 mm)
Length:..................................................................... 9.62” (244.2 mm)
WEIGHT
NON-DRAWOUT UNIT
Weight (net): .......................................................... 2.9 kg (6.4 lbs)
Weight (gross): ..................................................... 4.0 kg (8.6 lbs)
DRAWOUT UNIT
Weight (net): .......................................................... 3.9 kg (8.6 lbs)
Weight (gross): ..................................................... 5.0 kg (11.0 lbs)
Environmental
Ambient temperatures:
Storage/Shipping: - 40C to 85C
Operating: -40C to 60C
Humidity: Operating up to 95% (non condensing) @ 55C (As per

IEC60068-2-30 Variant 2, 6days)
Altitude: 2000m (max)

Pollution Degree: II
Overvoltage Category: III
Ingress Protection: IP40 Front , IP10 back, IP20 cover (optional)
Noise: 0 dB

GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 2: Installation
Installation
Mechanical installation
This section describes the mechanical installation of the 350 system, including dimensions
for mounting and information on module withdrawal and insertion.
Dimensions
The dimensions of the 350 are shown below. Additional dimensions for mounting and
panel cutouts are shown in the following sections.

MECHANICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Figure 2-1: 350 dimensions - Drawout unit

>PP@
107
>76PP@

>PP@

>PP@
+$1'/(1(('672%(527$7('
:+,/(6/,',1*7+('5$:287
81,7,172&$37,9(81,7

>PP@ >PP@

>PP@

CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
Figure 2-2: 350 dimensions - Non-drawout unit
3.96"
(100.6mm)
."
(.mm)
7.88"
(200.2mm)
1.47"
(37.3mm)
7.98" 6.82"
(202.7mm) (173.2mm)
6.23"
(158.2mm)
Product identification
The product identification label is located on the side panel of the 350 . This label indicates
the product model, serial number, firmware revision, and date of manufacture.
Figure 2-3: 350 Product label
Multilin 350 Technical Support:

Worldwide: +1 905 927 7070
Feeder Protection System North America: 1 800 547 8629
Model: 350-E-P1-G1-H-E-S-N-M-2E-N-N www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin
Serial Number: ML1A1-P23000001 Instruction Manual: GEK-113507
MFG. Date: OCT. 28, 2014
Power Supply:
E83849
125-250V 20W
120-240V 50/60Hz 36VA
C UL
R US
Output Ratings: 125 VDC BREAK 0.3A
Input Ratings: 300 VDC @ 2mA MADE IN LISTED
IND. CONT. EQ.
Pollution Degree 2 / Degreé de Pollution 2 CANADA 52TL
The pink color text (i.e. Model, Serial Number, Instruction Manual, MFG. Date) is for
NOTE:
reference only. The text can vary.

NOTE
Mounting
Standard panel mount The standard panel mount and cutout dimensions are illustrated below.

To avoid the potential for personal injury due to fire hazards, ensure the unit is
CAUTION:
mounted in a safe location and/or within an appropriate enclosure.
Figure 2-4: Standard panel mounting - Drawout
Figure 2-5: Standard Panel mounting - Non-drawout

Figure 2-6: Depth Reducing collar (optional)
Panel mounting with depth reducing collar:

1. Mount the collar of required depth (1.375” or 3”) to the unit (captive or non-drawout)
using 4 screws (see above).
2. Mount the combination of unit and collar to the panel using 4 screws as shown above.
Figure 2-7: Mounting tabs (optional)
“V” TABS
BOTTOM TAB
1. From the front of the panel, slide the empty case into the cutout until the bottom tab
clicks into place (see above).

2. From the rear of the panel screw the case into the panel at the 8 screw positions
shown above.
3. If added security is required, bend the retaining "V"tabs outward, to about 90°. These
tabs are located on the sides of the case and appear as shown above.
The relay can now be inserted and can be panel wired.
Figure 2-8: Panel cutout dimensions
5.350” ±0.010”
(135.9 mm ±0.25mm)
4.100” ±0.010”
(104.1 mm ±0.25 mm)
CL
Φ 0.200”
(5.1 mm)
6.900” ±0.010”
(175.3 mm ±0.25 mm)
6.000” ±0.010”
C L (152.4 mm ±0.25 mm)

4.000” ±0.010”
(101.6 mm ±0.25 mm)
Mounting using the

S1/S2/MDP/IAC or
SR735 adapter plate
Retrofit Kit Kit Part Number Adapter Plate Washer Machine Flat Washers (4) Screws with ext.
Lock (8) Screws (8) Lock Washers (4)
350 Retrofit Kit for 735 1819-0103 1463-0012 1430-0003 1408-0015 1430-0039 1410-0112
350 Retrofit Kit for IAC Relay 1819-0102 1463-0011 1430-0003 1408-0015 1430-0039 1410-0112
350 Retrofit Kit for MDP Relay 1819-0101 1463-0011 1430-0003 1408-0015 1430-0039 1410-0112
350 Retrofit Kit for S1/S2 Cut-Out 1819-0100 1463-0011 1430-0003 1408-0015 1430-0039 1410-0112
To avoid the potential for personal injury due to fire hazards, ensure the unit is
CAUTION:
mounted in a safe location and/or within an appropriate enclosure.
The adaptor plate for mounting the 350 directly over the existing S1/S2/MDP/IAC or SR735
mounting plate, is shown below:

Figure 2-9: Adaptor Plate mounting - Drawout case
8.000” 0.114”
203.2 mm 2.9 mm
SCREW 10-32X1/4” PAN HD PHIL

18-8SS WITH EXTERNAL LOCK WASHER
GE PART#: 1410-0112
QTY: 4
TIGHTENING TORQUE: 22 LB-IN
NOTE: USE SCREW & ONE FLATWASHER FOR PANEL
THICKNESS OF 0.090”. USE ADDITIONAL WASHERS OR
11.000” REMOVE WASHERS FOR THINNER OR THICKER PANELS.
279.4 mm
FRONT SURFACE THIS PROVIDES MOUNTING FOR ADAPTER PLATE FOR
PANEL THICKNESS RANGE BETWEEN 0.06” AND 0.125”.
SURFACE WITH FLUSH NUTS
IS THE FRONT SURFACE OF
THE ADAPTER PLATE
18-8 STAINLESS STEEL FLAT WASHER

NO. 10L SZ, .438” OD, .028 - .036” THK,
GE PART#: 1430-0039
SR 350 ADAPTER PLATE QTY: 4
FOR S1, S2, MDP, & IAC
ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS: EXISTING PANEL CUT-OUT FOR

S1, S2, MDP, OR IAC
- THIS STEP IS FOR SR735 REPLACEMENT ONLY: CREATE 4 HOLES
(0.250” DIA) ON EXISTING PANEL AT #10-32 NUT LOCATION SHOWN IN
ADAPTER PLATE AT BOTTOM RIGHT. 18-8 FILLISTER HEAD PHILLIPS MACHINE SCREW
8-32 THREAD, 3/8” LENGTH
- MOUNT THE ADAPTER PLATE IN THE CORRECT ORIENTATION GE PART#: 1408-0015
(FRONT SURFACE OUTSIDE) PER THE VIEW. MAKE SURE QTY: 8
THE MOUNTING SCREWS (GE PART# 1410-0112) DO NOT TIGHTENING TORQUE: 15 LB-IN
PENERTRATE THROUGH THE ADAPTER PLATE FRONT SURFACE.
- MOUNT THE CAPTIVE UNIT WITH THE ADAPTER PLATE.
- SLIDE AND LOCK THE DRAWOUT UNIT INTO THE CAPTIVE UNIT. WASHER LOCK ZINC NO. 8
GE PART#: 1430-0003
QTY: 8
SR350 ADAPTER PLATE FOR S1, S2, MDP, & IAC OR SR350 ADAPTER PLATE FOR SR735
GE PART#: 1463-0011 GE PART#: 1463-0012
QTY: 1 QTY: 1
8.000”
#10-32 NUT
203.2 mm
QTY: 4
6.123”
155.5 mm
SR350 DRAWOUT & CAPTIVE UNIT

9.750” 11.000”
247.7 mm 279.4 mm
SR 350 ADAPTER PLATE

FOR SR735

Figure 2-10: Non-drawout - Adapter plate mounting
8.000" .114"
(203.2mm) (2.9mm)
SCREW 10-32 x 1/4" PAN HD PHIL
18--8 SS WITH EXTERNAL LOCK WASHER
GE P/N: 1410-0112
QTY=4
TIGHTENING TORQUE: 22 IN-LB
FRONT SURFACE
SURFACE WITH FLUSH NUTS
IS THE FRONT SURFACE OF NOTE: USE SCREW & ONE FLAT WASHER FOR PANEL
11.000" THE ADAPTER PLATE THICKNESS OF 0.090", USE ADDITIONAL WASHERS OR
(279.4mm) REMOVE WASHERS FOR THINNER OR THICKER PANELS.
THIS PROVIDES MOUNTING FOR ADAPTER PLATE FOR
PANEL THICKNESS RANGE BETWEEN 0.060" AND 0.125"
NO. 10 SS 18-8 FLAT LOCK WASHER

SZ, .438" OD, .028" - .036" THK
GE P/N: 1430-0039
QTY=4
SR3 ADAPTER PLATE EXISTING PANEL CUT-OUT FOR

FOR S1, S2, MDP & IAC S1, S2, MDP OR IAC
8-32 x 3/8" SS 18-8 FILLISTER HEAD

PHILLIPS MACHINE SCREW
GE P/N 1408-0015 8.000"
QTY=8 (203.2mm)
TIGHTENING TORQUE: 15 IN_LB 6.125"
(158.6mm) .114"
(2.9mm)
NO. 8 LOCK WASHER ZINC

GE P/N: 1430-0003
QTY=8
SR3 ADAPTER PLATE

FOR S1, S2, MDP & IAC 12.000" 10.875"
GE P/N: 1463-0011 (304.8mm) (276.2mm)
QTY=1
OR
SR3 ADAPTER PLATE
FOR SR735
GE P/N: 1463-0012
QTY=1
SR3 NON-DRAWOUT UNIT
ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS:
- MOUNT THE ADAPTER PLATE IN CORRECT ORIENTATION SR3 ADAPTER PLATE
(FRONT SURFACE OUTSIDE) PER THE VIEW, MAKE SURE FOR SR735
THE MOUNTING SCREWS(GE P/N 1401-0112) DO NOT
PENETRATE THROUGH THE ADAPTER PLATE FRONT SURFACE.
- MOUNT THE UNIT ONTO THE ADAPTER PLATE
899702A1.pdf

Figure 2-11: Panel cutout dimensions
5.350” ±0.010”
(135.9 mm ±0.25mm)
4.100” ±0.010”
(104.1 mm ±0.25 mm)
CL
Φ 0.200”
(5.1 mm)
6.900” ±0.010”
(175.3 mm ±0.25 mm)
6.000” ±0.010”
L
C
(152.4 mm ±0.25 mm)
4.000” ±0.010”
(101.6 mm ±0.25 mm)

Drawout unit withdrawal and insertion

Figure 2-12: Unit withdrawal and insertion diagram
8 - 32X3/8IN P/HD PHIL BLK

GE PART # 1408-0306; (QTY:8)
TIGHTENING TORQUE: 15 IN LB
THE HANDLE MUST BE ROTATED 90⁰

WHILE SLIDING THE 350 DRAW-OUT
UNIT INTO THE CAPTIVE UNIT
PUSH THE HANDLE DOWN AND TIGHTEN

KEEP THE HANDLE IN ITS ROTATED THE SCREW UNTIL THE HANDLE IS PARALLEL
POSITION UNTIL THE DRAW-OUT UNIT WITH THE FRONT PANEL SURFACE
IS INSERTED COMPLETELY

IP20 Cover (optional)

The IP20 cover minimizes potential dangers to users by preventing finger contact with
electrical connections at the back of the 350 drawout units.
The IP20 cover is used only with the 350 drawout units.
NOTE:
NOTE Attaching the cover

The steps for attaching the IP20 cover (optional) to the drawout unit are as follows:
Figure 2-13: IP20 Cover mounting - Drawout unit only
1. Place 4 custom standoffs (item#1) using the suggested tightening torque of 8lb-in in
the following order:
A. Remove the 2 mounting screws near letters A and C, of label ABC (item#2), and
mount 2 standoffs.
B. Remove the 2 mounting screws near the letters B and E, of label ABCDE (item#3),
and mount 2 standoffs.
2. Place the IP20 cover (item#4) and secure it with 4 screws (item#5) using the suggested
tightening torque of 8lb-in.
Make sure the device terminals are wired before placing the cover. Use the 5 slots located
NOTE:
on each side of the cover to guide the wires outside of the cover.
NOTE
Retrofit kit for IP20
Before attaching the cover, remove the old labels from the device (see item#2 and item#3)
and replace them with the new labels from the retrofit kit. Attach the cover as described in
the previous section.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Electrical installation
Figure 2-14: Typical wiring diagram - Drawout
DIRECTION OF POWER FLOW FOR POSITIVE WATTS
A B C POSITIVE DIRECTION OF LAGGING VARs
FEEDER Cts BUS Vts
FEEDER
1A OR 5A
52
WYE VT
CONNECTION
CONNECT AUX_VT
AS REQUIRED
+ CONTROL
- POWER
E5 D5 E6 D6 E7 D7 E8 D8 E9 D9 E10D10E11D11E12D12 B1 A1 B2
IA IA IB IB IC IC IG IG V A VA VB V B V C VC V X VX
+ - chassis
gnd
POWER SUPPLY
CURRENT INPUTS VOLTAGE INPUTS

GND STUD
GROUND
BUS
Breaker Aux Contacts

52a
GE Multilin A2 + TRIP
C1 52a (C1 #1) B3
TRIP CIRCUIT
1 TRIP COIL
52a
C2 52b (C1 #2)
52b 350 V A3
C3 INPUT 3 B4 +
C4 INPUT 4 Feeder Protection System 2 CLOSE A4 CLOSE
COIL
CLOSE
CIRCUIT
DIGITAL INPUTS
C5 INPUT 5 52b
V B5
C6 INPUT 6 A5
C7 INPUT 7 3 AUXILIARY B6
C8 INPUT 8 A6
C9 INPUT 9 B7
C10 INPUT 10 4 AUXILIARY A7
C11 COMMON B8
C12 CHASSIS GND A8
PERSONAL 5 AUXILIARY B9
COMPUTER
Front Panel
A9
USB
TYPE B B10
6 AUXILIARY A10
OUTPUT CONTACTS
USB
B11
SHOWN WITH NO
4 WIRE USB A11
CONTROL POWER
7 CRITICAL
Rear Panel
COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE B12
ETHERNET
RJ45 mTRJ RELAY A12
IRIG-B RS485
4 WIRE ETHERNET
10/100 BASE-T 100 BASE-FX
- + COM - + OPEN DELTA VT CONNECTION
OPTIONAL F2 F1 F5 F4 F3 F6
GROUND
BUS
SEE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING

IN INSTRUCTION MANUAL
COM
E9 D9 E10D10 E11 D11

RS485
898728.CDR

CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
Figure 2-15: Typical wiring diagram - Non-drawout

DIRECTION OF POWER FLOW FOR POSITIVE WATTS
A B C POSITIVE DIRECTION OF LAGGING VARs
FEEDER Cts BUS Vts
FEEDER
1A OR 5A
52
WYE VT
CONNECTION
CONNECT AUX_VT
AS REQUIRED
+ CONTROL
- POWER
E5 D5 E6 D6 E7 D7 E8 D8 E9 D9 E10D10E11D11E12D12 L N
IA IA IB IB IC IC IG IG V A VA VB V B VC VC V X VX
+ - chassis
gnd
POWER SUPPLY
CURRENT INPUTS VOLTAGE INPUTS

GND STUD
GROUND
BUS
Breaker Aux Contacts

52a
GE Multilin A1 + TRIP
B1 52a (C1 #1) A2
TRIP CIRCUIT
1 TRIP COIL
52a
B2 52b (C1 #2)
52b 350 V A3
B3 INPUT 3 A4 +
B4 INPUT 4 Feeder Protection System 2 CLOSE A5 CLOSE
COIL
CLOSE
CIRCUIT
DIGITAL INPUTS
B5 INPUT 5 52b
V A6
B6 INPUT 6 A7
B7 INPUT 7 3 AUXILIARY A8
B8 INPUT 8 A9
B9 INPUT 9 A10
B10 INPUT 10 4 AUXILIARY A11
B11 COMMON A12
B12 CHASSIS GND A13
PERSONAL 5 AUXILIARY A14
COMPUTER
Front Panel
A15
USB
TYPE B A16
6 AUXILIARY A17
OUTPUT CONTACTS
USB
A18
SHOWN WITH NO
4 WIRE USB A19
CONTROL POWER
7 CRITICAL
Rear Panel
COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE A20
ETHERNET
RJ45 mTRJ RELAY A21
IRIG-B RS485
4 WIRE ETHERNET
10/100 BASE-T 100 BASE-FX
- + COM - + OPEN DELTA VT CONNECTION
OPTIONAL C2 C1 C5 C4 C3 C6
GROUND
BUS
SEE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING

IN INSTRUCTION MANUAL
COM
E9 D9 E10D10 E11 D11

RS485
898803.CDR
Terminal identification
When installing two lugs on one terminal, both lugs should be "right side up" as shown in
NOTE:
the picture below. This is to ensure the adjacent lower terminal block does not interfere
NOTE with the lug body.

Figure 2-16: Orient the Lugs correctly...
SCREW
1 2 3
WASHER
TERMINAL LOWER
BLOCK TERMINAL
DIVIDER
Figure 2-17: CORRECT INSTALLATION METHOD

Figure 2-18: INCORRECT INSTALLATION METHOD (lower lug reversed)

Figure 2-19: 350 Terminal Identification - standard(drawout)
F
1 IRIG-B +
POWER SUPPLY + 1 INPUT 1 2 IRIG-B -
1 POWER SUPPLY - 3 RS485 +
CHASSIS GND 2 INPUT 2 4 RS485 -
2 TRIP N/O 5 RS485 COM
TRIP COM 6 CHASSIS GND
3 INPUT 3 7 RESERVED
3 TRIP OPTV 8 RESERVED
CLOSE N/O 4 INPUT 4
4 CLOSE COM
CLOSE OPTV PHASE A CT ■ 5
5 INPUT 5
5 AUX 3 N/C PHASE A CT
AUX 3 COM 6 PHASE B CT ■ 6
6 AUX 3 N/O INPUT 6 PHASE B CT
AUX 4 N/C 7 PHASE C CT ■ 7
7 AUX 4 COM INPUT 7 PHASE C CT
AUX 4 N/O 8 INPUT 8 GND CT ■ 8
8 AUX 5 N/C GND CT
AUX 5 COM 9 INPUT 9 PHASE A VT ■ 9
9 AUX 5 N/O PHASE A VT
AUX 6 N/C 10 INPUT 10 PHASE B VT ■ 10
10 AUX 6 COM PHASE B VT
AUX 6 N/O 11 INPUT COM PHASE C VT ■ 11
11 CRIT FAIL N/C PHASE C VT
CRIT FAIL COM 12 CHASSIS GND AUX VT ■ 12
12 CRIT FAIL N/O AUX VT
A B C D E

Figure 2-20: 350 Terminal Identification - Non-drawout
1 INPUT 1
POWER SUPPLY + 2 INPUT 2
POWER SUPPLY - 3 INPUT 3
CHASSIS GND
4 INPUT 4
5 INPUT 5
6 INPUT 6
TRIP N/O 1 7 INPUT 7
2 TRIP COM 8 INPUT 8
TRIP OPTV 3 9 INPUT 9
4 CLOSE N/O 10 INPUT 10
CLOSE COM 5 11 INPUT COM
6 CLOSE OPTV 12 CHASSIS GND
AUX 3 N/C 7
8 AUX 3 COM
AUX 3 N/O 9
10 AUX 4 N/C
AUX 4 COM 11 PHASE A CT 5
12 AUX 4 N/O 5 PHASE A CT
AUX 5 N/C 13 PHASE B CT 6
14 AUX 5 COM PHASE B CT
AUX 5 N/O 15 6
16 AUX 6 N/C PHASE C CT 7
AUX 6 COM 17 7 PHASE C CT
18 AUX 6 N/O GND CT 8
CRIT FAIL N/C 19 GND CT
20 CRIT FAIL COM 8
CRIT FAIL N/O 21 PHASE A VT 9
9 PHASE A VT
PHASE B VT 10
10 PHASE B VT
1 IRIG-B + PHASE C VT 11
2 IRIG-B - 11 PHASE C VT
3 RS485 + AUX VT 12
4 RS485 - 12 AUX VT
5 RS485 COM
6 CHASSIS GND
7 RESERVED
8 RESERVED
Wire range Use the following guideline when selecting wires or lugs to connect to terminal blocks
A,B,C,D,E (Drawout case design), and terminal blocks D,E (Non-drawout case design):
• 12 AWG to 22 AWG (3.3 mm2 to 0.3 mm2): Single wire termination with/without
9.53 mm (0.375”) maximum diameter ring terminals.
• 14 AWG to 22 AWG (2.1 mm2 to 0.3 mm2): Multiple wire termination with matching
wire sizes and stranding. Two wires maximum per circuit.
• 14 AWG to 22 AWG (2.1 mm2 to 0.3 mm2): Multiple wire termination with 9.53 mm
(0.375”) maximum diameter ring terminals. Two ring terminals maximum per circuit.
• Suggested wiring screw tightening torque, tighten to 12 in-lb (1.35 N-m).
Phase sequence and transformer polarity

For correct operation of the relay features, the user must follow the instrument
transformer polarities, shown in the Typical Wiring Diagram. Note the solid square
markings shown with all instrument transformer connections. When the connections
adhere to this drawing, the arrow shows the direction of power flow for positive watts and
the positive direction of lagging vars. The phase sequence is user programmable for either
ABC or ACB rotation.
Current inputs
The 350 relay has four (4) channels for AC current inputs, each with an isolating
transformer. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current
transformers with 1 to 6000 A primaries may be used.
Verify that the relay’s nominal input current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating
CAUTION:
of the connected CTs. Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate
protection.
IMPORTANT: The phase and ground current inputs will correctly measure up to 20
CAUTION:
times the current input’s nominal rating. Time overcurrent curves become horizontal
lines for currents above the 20 × CT rating. This becomes apparent if the pickup level is
set above the nominal CT rating.

Before working on CTs, they MUST be short circuited.

CAUTION:
Ground and sensitive ground CT inputs

One dedicated ground input is referred to throughout this manual as the Ground Current
or Sensitive Ground Current input. Before making ground connections, consider that the
relay automatically calculates the neutral (residual) current from the sum of the three
phase current phasors. The following figures show three possible ground connections (or
three possible sensitive ground connections).
The ground input (Terminals D8 and E8) is used in conjunction with a Zero Sequence CT as
source, or in the neutral of wye-connected source CTs. The ground current input can be
used to polarize the neutral directional element. When using the residual connection set
the GROUND CT PRIMARY setpoint to a value equal to the PHASE CT PRIMARY setpoint.
In cases where the relay is equipped with sensitive ground CT (terminals D8 and E8) the
sensitive ground current input is intended for use either with a CT in a source neutral of a
high-impedance grounded system, or on ungrounded systems. On ungrounded systems it
is connected residually with the phase current inputs. In this case, the SENSTV GND CT
PRIMARY setpoint should be programmed to a value equal to the PHASE CT PRIMARY
setpoint. The sensitive ground current input can be connected to a Zero Sequence CT for
increased sensitivity and accuracy when physically possible in the system.
The Sensitive Ground input must only be used on systems where the maximum ground
NOTE:
current does not exceed 100 times the rated current for 1 second.
NOTE
Figure 2-21: Ground/Sensitive Ground wiring
SOURCE
A
E5 E6 E7 SR350
A B C PHASE CURRENT
D5 D6 D7 INPUTS
D8 E8 E8 D8 E8 D8
N IG IG N IG N
GROUND GROUND GROUND
GROUND CURRENT INPUT GROUND CURRENT INPUT GROUND CURRENT INPUT

USED FOR POLARIZING WITH ZERO SEQUENCE CT WITH RESIDUAL CONNECTION
898730.CDR
Zero sequence CT installation

The various CT connections and the exact placement of a Zero Sequence CT, for ground
fault current detection, are shown in the figure below. Twisted pair cabling on the Zero
Sequence CT is recommended.

Figure 2-22: Zero sequence core balance (CT) installation
UNSHIELDED CABLE SHIELDED CABLE

Ground connection to neutral
Stress cone
Source must be on the source side Source shields
A B C N G A B C
Ground
outside CT
To ground;
LOAD must be on
load side
LOAD 898733.CDR
Voltage inputs
The 350 relay has four channels for AC voltage inputs, each with an isolating transformer.
Voltage transformers up to a maximum 1500:1 ratio may be used. The nominal secondary
voltage must be in the 50 to 240 V range.The three phase inputs are designated as the “bus
voltage”. The Bus VT connections most commonly used, wye and delta (or open delta), are
shown in the typical wiring diagram.
If Delta VTs are used, the zero sequence voltage (V0) and neutral/sensitive ground
NOTE:
polarizing voltage (–V0) will be zero. Also, with the Delta VT connection, the phase-neutral
NOTE voltage cannot be measured and will not be displayed.
The 350 relay can be applied to both metering and protection feeders with up to 65 kV
NOTE:
phase-to-phase voltage. Please ensure that the selected VT ratio and VT secondary do not
NOTE result in a primary voltage exceeding 65 kV.
The single phase input is designated as the “Aux VT Input”. The Aux VT input channel can be
connected for either phase-neutral voltage Van, Vbn, Vcn, or for phase-phase voltage Vab,
Vbc, Vca as shown below.
Figure 2-23: Auxiliary VT connections
TO BUS VTs FEEDER
A
B
C
E12 D12 E12 D12 E12 D12 E12 D12 E12 D12 E12 D12
V1 V2 V1 V2 V1 V2 V1 V2 V1 V2 V1 V2
AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX

Van Vbn Vcn Vab Vbc Vca
898734.CDR

Control power
Control power supplied to the relay must match the installed power supply range. If the
CAUTION:
applied voltage does not match, damage to the unit may occur. All grounds MUST be
connected for safe, normal operation regardless of control power supply type.
The label found on the relay specifies its order code or model number. The installed power
supply’s operating range will be one of the following:
LO: 24 to 48 V DC (Range: 20 to 60 V DC)
HI: 125 to 250 V DC/120 to 240 V AC (Range: 84 to 250 V DC/66 to 265 V AC)
The relay should be connected directly to the ground bus, using the shortest practical
CAUTION:
path. A tinned copper, braided, shielding and bonding cable should be used. As a
minimum, 96 strands of number 34 AWG should be used. Belden catalog number 8660
is suitable.
Isolate power prior to servicing.

CAUTION:
An external switch, circuit breaker, or other protective device must be connected near to
NOTE:
the equipment.
NOTE
Figure 2-24: Control power connection

+
CONTROL
POWER
-
HEAVY COPPER CONDUCTOR

OR BRAIDED WIRE
SWITCHGEAR
GROUND BUS
B2 A1 B1
GROUND
CHASSIS
- +
CONTROL
POWER
RELAY
898735.CDR
Contact inputs
External contacts can be connected to the relay’s ten (10) digital inputs. These contacts are
wet only.
The inputs can be programmed to different thresholds depending on the DC voltage (17,
33, 84, 166).
Ensure correct polarity on contact input connections and do not connect any contact
CAUTION:
input circuits to ground or else relay hardware may be damaged.

A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power
supply. The other side of this contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. In
addition, the negative side of the external source must be connected to the relay’s DC
negative rail at Terminal C11. The maximum external source voltage for this arrangement
is 300 V DC.
Figure 2-25: Wet contact connections
Wet Contact Connection
350 RELAY
Contact Input 1 C1
V DC Power
Supply
Contact Input Common C11
LOGICIN.CDR
Trip and Close output relays

The 350 relay is equipped with seven electromechanical output relays: two special relays
designed for Breaker trip and close (Relay 1 “Trip”, Relay 2 “Close”), four general purpose
relays (Auxiliary Relays 3 to 6), and a Critical Failure relay. The special purpose relays have
fixed operating characteristics and the general purpose relays can be configured by the
user.
Operation of the Trip and Close output relays is designed to be controlled by the state of
the circuit breaker as monitored by a 52a or 52b contact.
• The Trip and Close relays reset after the breaker is detected in a state corresponding
to the command. When a relay feature sends a command to one of these special
relays, it will remain operational until the requested change of breaker state is
confirmed by a breaker auxiliary contact and the initiating condition has reset.
• If the initiating feature resets, but the breaker does not change state, the output relay
will be reset after a default interval of 2 seconds.
• If neither of the breaker auxiliary contacts, 52a nor 52b, is programmed to a contact
input, the Trip Relay is de-energized after either the delay programmed in the Breaker
Failure feature, or a default interval of 100 ms after the initiating input resets. The
Close Relay is de-energized after 200 ms.
• If a delay is programmed for the Trip or Close contact seal-in time, then this delay is
added to the reset time. Note that the default setting for the seal-in time is 40 ms.
52a Contact 52b Contact Relay Operation

Configured Configured
Yes Yes Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an
open breaker. Close Relay remains operational until 52a
indicates a closed breaker.
Yes No Trip Relay remains operational until 52a indicates an
No Yes Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an
open breaker. Close Relay remains operational until 52b
No No Trip Relay operates until either the Breaker Failure delay
expires (if the Breaker Failure element is enabled), or 100
ms after the feature causing the trip resets. Close Relay
operates for 200 ms.

Breaker monitoring (Trip and Close coil monitoring) is performed by a built-in voltage
monitor on Form A output relays: #1 Trip, and #2 Close. The voltage monitor is connected
across each of the two Form A contacts, and the relay effectively detects healthy current
through the circuit. In order to do this, an external jumper must be connected between
terminals A2 and A3 for Trip coil monitoring, or/and B4, and B5 for Close coil monitoring.
As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above the threshold of the trickle
currents (see Technical Specification for Form A output relays), the circuit integrity for the
Trip (Close) coil is effectively normal. If the Trip (Close) coil circuit gets disconnected, or if in
general a high resistance is detected in the circuitry, a Trip (Close) alarm will be set and the
“ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs will be on.
Example 1: The figures below show the two different connections of the breaker trip (close)
coil to the relay’s trip output #1 terminals (output #2 Close coil monitoring) for both no
voltage monitoring and voltage monitoring of the trip (close) circuit integrity.
To monitor the trip coil circuit integrity, use the relay terminals A2 and B3 to connect the
NOTE:
Trip coil, and provide a jumper between terminals A2 (optional voltage) and A3.
NOTE
To monitor the close coil circuit integrity, use the relay terminals B4 and A4 to connect the
NOTE:
Close coil, and provide a jumper between terminals B4 (optional voltage) and B5.
NOTE
Figure 2-26: Trip and Close circuits with no voltage monitoring

DC + DC +
Output Relay 1 (TRIP) Output Relay 2 (CLOSE)
A2 B4
B3 A4
V V
A3 B5
52a 52b
contact contact
Trip Close
Coil Coil
898785.cdr
DC - DC -
All AUX contacts are shown when the breaker is open.

NOTE:
NOTE

Figure 2-27: Trip and close circuits with voltage monitoring

DC + DC +
Output Relay 1 (TRIP) Output Relay 2 (CLOSE)

External External
A2 jumper B4 jumper
B3 A4
V V
A3 B5
52a 52b
contact contact
Trip Close
Coil Coil
898786.cdr
DC - DC -
Serial communications
Figure 2-28: RS485 wiring diagram
TWISTED PAIR
350 IED
Z T (*) SHIELD
F3 RS485 +
OPTOCOUPLER OPTOCOUPLER
F4 RS485 -
DATA
DATA COM
SCADA, PLC, OR F5 COMMON

PERSONAL COMPUTER
GROUND THE SHIELD AT THE

SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER ONLY
OR THE 350 ONLY IED
RS485 +
(*) TERMINATING IMPEDANCE AT EACH END RS485 -
(typically 120 ohms and 1 nF)
COMMON
UP TO 32 350
OR OTHER IEDs, IED
MAXIMUM CABLE
LENGTH OF
1200 m (4000 ft.) Z T (*)
RS485 +
RS485 -
LAST
COMMON DEVICE
898738A1.CDR
One two-wire RS485 port is provided. Up to 32 350 IEDs can be daisy-chained together on
a communication channel without exceeding the driver capability. For larger systems,
additional serial channels must be added. Commercially available repeaters can also be
used to add more than 32 relays on a single channel. Suitable cable should have a
characteristic impedance of 120 ohms (for example, Belden #9841) and total wire length
should not exceed 1200 meters (4000 ft.). Commercially available repeaters will allow for
transmission distances greater than 1200 meters.

Voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link are not uncommon.
For this reason, surge protection devices are internally installed across all RS485 terminals.
Internally, an isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface is used to prevent
noise coupling.
To ensure that all devices in a daisy-chain are at the same potential, it is imperative
CAUTION:
that the common terminals of each RS485 port are tied together and grounded only
once, at the master or at the 350 . Failure to do so may result in intermittent or failed
communications.
The source computer/PLC/SCADA system should have similar transient protection devices
installed, either internally or externally. Ground the shield at one point only, as shown in the
figure above, to avoid ground loops.
Correct polarity is also essential. The 350 IEDs must be wired with all the positive (+)
terminals connected together and all the negative (–) terminals connected together. Each
relay must be daisy-chained to the next one. Avoid star or stub connected configurations.
The last device at each end of the daisy-chain should be terminated with a 120 ohm ¼
watt resistor in series with a 1 nF capacitor across the positive and negative terminals.
Observing these guidelines will ensure a reliable communication system immune to
system transients.
IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows time stamping of events to be
synchronized among connected devices within 1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats
are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shift or amplitude
modulated (AM) form. The type of form is auto-detected by the 350 relay. Third party
equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS
satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic
locations can also be synchronized.

Figure 2-29: IRIG-B connection
GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM

GPS CONNECTION
OPTIONAL
IRIG-B GE MULTILIN
TIME CODE RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE 350 RELAY
GENERATOR
+ F1 IRIG-B(+)
(DC SHIFT OR RECEIVER

AMPLITUDE MODULATED
SIGNAL CAN BE USED)
– F2 IRIG-B(-)
898741A1.CDR
TO OTHER DEVICES


GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 3: Interfaces
Interfaces
There are two methods of interfacing with the 350 Feeder Protection System.
• Interfacing via the relay keypad and display.
• Interfacing via the EnerVista SR3 Setup software.
This section provides an overview of the interfacing methods available with the 350 using
the relay control panels and EnerVista SR3 Setup software. For additional details on
interface parameters (for example, settings, actual values, etc.), refer to the individual
chapters.

FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
Front control panel interface

Figure 3-1: 350 Feeder Protection System Front Panel - Non-programmable LEDs
GE Multilin
350 Feeder
Protection System
IN SERVICE TRIP BREAKER OPEN
TROUBLE ALARM BREAKER CLOSED
SETPOINT
PICKUP MAINTENANCE
GROUP 1
SETPOINT
GROUP 2
△ ▲ MENU
◁ ▷ ENTER
▼
ESCAPE
▽ RESET
USB
898351A1.cdr

CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 3-2: 350 Feeder Protection System Front Panel - Programmable LEDs
GE Multilin
350 Feeder
Protection System
IN SERVICE
TROUBLE
TRIP
ALARM
△ ▲ MENU
◁ ▷ ENTER
ESCAPE
▽ ▼
RESET
USB
898841.cdr
Description
The relay front panel provides an interface with a liquid crystal display, LED status
indicators, control keys, and a USB program port. The display and status indicators show
the relay information automatically. The control keys are used to select the appropriate
message for entering setpoints or displaying measured values. The USB program port is
also provided for connection with a computer running the EnerVista SR3 Setup software.

Display
The 80-character liquid crystal display (LCD) allows visibility under varied lighting
conditions. When the keypad and display are not being used, system information is
displayed after a user-defined period of inactivity. Pressing the Menu key during the
display of default message returns the display to the last message shown before the
default message appeared. Any trip, alarm, or pickup is displayed immediately,
automatically overriding the default message.
Working with the The 350 display messages are organized into a Main Menu, pages, and sub-pages. There
Keypad are four main menus labeled Actual Values, Quick Setup, Setpoints, and Maintenance.
Pressing the MENU key followed by the MESSAGE key scrolls through the four Main Menu
headers, which appear in sequence as follows:
Figure 3-3: The four Main Menu headers
█ ACTUAL VALUES
QUICK SETUP
SETPOINTS
MAINTENANCE
Pressing the MESSAGE ► key or the ENTER key from these Main Menu pages will display
the corresponding menu Page. Use the MESSAGE ▲ and MESSAGE ▼ keys to scroll through
the Page headers.
Figure 3-4: Typical paging operation from Main Menu selection
ACTUAL VALUES
△ A1 STATUS
▶
█ A1 STATUS
A2 METERING
Back
▶ 1 click
█ CLOCK
CONTACT INPUTS
A3 RECORDS OUTPUT RELAYS
▽ Back
▼
◁ ▷
▼
2 clicks
A1 STATUS
CLOCK
CONTACT INPUTS
█ OUTPUT RELAYS
Back
▼
◁ ▷
▼
Click to end
A1 STATUS
..
.
█ LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY

When the display shows SETPOINTS, pressing the MESSAGE ► key or the ENTER key will
display the page headers of programmable parameters (referred to as setpoints in the
manual). When the display shows ACTUAL VALUES, pressing the MESSAGE ► key or the
ENTER key displays the page headers of measured parameters (referred to as actual
values in the manual).
Each page is broken down further into logical sub-pages of messages. The MESSAGE ▲
and MESSAGE ▼ keys are used to navigate through the sub-pages. A summary of the
setpoints and actual values pages can be found in the Chapters : Setpoints and Actual
Values, respectively.
The ENTER key is dual purpose. It is used to enter the sub-pages and to store altered
setpoint values into memory to complete the change. The MESSAGE ► key can also be
used to enter sub-pages but not to store altered setpoints.
The ESCAPE key is also dual purpose. It is used to exit the sub-pages and to cancel a
setpoint change. The MESSAGE ◄ key can also be used to exit sub-pages and to cancel
setpoint changes.
The VALUE keys are used to scroll through the possible choices of an enumerated setpoint.
They also decrement and increment numerical setpoints.
The RESET key resets any latched conditions that are not currently active. This includes
resetting latched output relays, latched Trip LEDs, breaker operation failure, and trip / close
coil failures. The Autoreclose Scheme is also reset with the shot counter being returned to
zero and the lockout condition being cleared.
The MESSAGE ▲ and MESSAGE ▼ keys scroll through any active conditions in the relay.
Diagnostic messages are displayed indicating the state of protection and monitoring
elements that are picked up, operating, or latched.
LED status indicators - Front panel with non-programmable LEDs

• IN SERVICE: Green
This LED will be continuously “ON”, when the relay is set to “Ready” under S1 RELAY
SETUP/INSTALLATION/RELAY STATUS, and no major self-test errors have been
detected.
• TROUBLE: Orange
This LED will turn “ON”, when the relay is not programmed (Not Ready) state under S1
RELAY SETUP/INSTALLATION/RELAY STATUS, or upon detection of a major self-test
error. The relay will turn back to “IN-SERVICE” if no major self-test error is present.
• SETPOINT GROUP 1, 2: Green
These LEDs indicate the group of active protection elements. If setpoint group 1 is lit
green, only the protection elements under group 1 will be active. The protection
elements from group 2 will be inactive. The settings for each protection element can
be edited and displayed regardless of the active group.
• TRIP: Red
This indicator turns on when the relay detects a fault and sends a trip command to the
trip output relay. The LED will reset by initiating a reset command from either the
RESET pushbutton Breaker Control, or communications; in all cases after the fault
condition has cleared.
• ALARM: Orange
This LED will flash upon detection of an alarm condition, with element functions
selected as “alarm”. The LED will automatically turn off if the alarm condition clears.
The LED will remain steady “ON”, if the function of the operated protection was
selected as "latched alarm".
• PICKUP: Orange

This indicator will light ON upon pickup condition generated by any of the relay
features. The indicator will turn off if no pickup condition is detected.
• BREAKER OPEN: Red/Green – programmable in color
When the breaker is open, this indicator will be on continuously.
• BREAKER CLOSED: Red/Green – programmable in color
When the breaker is closed, this indicator will be on continuously.
Breaker status indication is based on the breaker’s 52a and 52b contacts. With both
contacts wired to the relay, closed breaker status is determined by closed 52a contact
and opened 52b contact. Visa-versa the open breaker status is determined by opened
52a contact and closed 52b contact. If both 52a and 52b contacts are open, due to a
breaker being racked out from the switchgear, both the Breaker Open and Breaker
Closed LED Indicators will be off.
It is strongly recommended to detect the breaker status by using both 52a and 52b
NOTE:
contacts.
NOTE
The 350 provides also detecting the breaker status by using only one contact: either
52a or 52b. However, one should be aware that in such cases, it would be impossible
to distinguish between a breaker open state and breaker racked out state, unless
another contact from the breaker is wired to the relay.
To clarify this ambiguity, the BKR CONNECTED function under SETPOINTS/S2 SYSTEM
SETUP/S2 BREAKER should be programmed to an additional contact input. When this
additional input is closed, a single 52a or 52b contact will show both breaker states.
When the breaker is racked out, this additional breaker connected input should be
open. In this case, both breaker status indicators will be off.
• MAINTENANCE: Orange
This LED may indicate both breaker or relay maintenance depending on the
programmed maintenance elements. The LED will turn on upon operation of a
maintenance element.
LED status indicators - Front panel with programmable LEDs

• IN SERVICE: Green
This LED will be continuously “ON”, when the relay is set to “Ready” under S1 RELAY
SETUP/INSTALLATION/RELAY STATUS, and no major self-test errors have been
detected.
• TROUBLE: Orange
This LED will turn “ON”, when the relay is not programmed (Not Ready) state under S1
RELAY SETUP/INSTALLATION/RELAY STATUS, or upon detection of a major self-test
error. The relay will turn back to “IN-SERVICE” if no major self-test error is present.
• TRIP: Red
This indicator turns on when the relay detects a fault and sends a trip command to the
trip output relay. The LED will reset by initiating a reset command from either the
RESET pushbutton Breaker Control, or communications; in all cases after the fault
condition has cleared.
• ALARM: Orange
This LED will flash upon detection of an alarm condition, with element functions
selected as “alarm”. The LED will automatically turn off if the alarm condition clears.
The LED will remain steady “ON”, if the function of the operated protection was
selected as "latched alarm".
• LED 1: Red - programmable in the source signal
• LED 2: Orange - programmable in the source signal


• LED 5: Red/Orange/Green - programmable in the source signal and in color
Relay messages
Target messages Target messages are automatically displayed for any active condition on the relay such as
pickups, trips, or alarms.
The relay displays the most recent event first, and after 5 seconds will start rolling up the
other target messages until the conditions clear and/or the RESET command is initiated.
The Target Messages can be reviewed by pressing either the MESSAGE UP or MESSAGE
DOWN key. If a RESET command is not performed but any of the other faceplate
pushbuttons is pressed, the display will not show the target messages unless the user
navigates to ACTUAL VALUES > A4 TARGET MESSAGES, where they can be reviewed. If the
target messages have not been cleared before the user presses a pushbutton different
from “RESET”, they will reappear on the screen after the time specified under the
SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > S1 FRONT PANEL > MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting, that will start
timing out from the last pressed pushbutton. The following shows the format of a typical
Target Message:
Figure 3-5: Typical target message
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Cause <function>
State: Operate
▼ Phase:
Example of a Phase IOC1 operation - phase A:
Phase IOC1 function: Trip
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Trip
State: Operate
▼ Phase:A
Cause <Function>
The first line contains information of the cause of operation (the name of the operated
element), and the element function.
State: Operate
This line from the display shows the state of the element: Pickup, Operated, Alarm.
Phase: A
The last line from the display shows the phase that picked up or operated.

Self-test errors The relay performs self diagnostics at initialization (after power up), and continuously as a
background task to ensure that the hardware and software are functioning correctly.
There are two types of self-test warnings indicating either a minor or major problem. Minor
problems indicate a problem with the relay that does not compromise protection of the
power system. Major errors indicate a problem with the relay which takes it out of service.
Self-Test Warnings may indicate a serious problem with the relay hardware!
CAUTION:
Upon detection of a minor problem, the relay will:

• Turn on the "TROUBLE" LED at the same time as the "IN SERVICE" LED is on.
• Display the error on the relay display.
• Record the minor self-test error in the Event Recorder.
Upon detection of a major problem, the relay will:
• De-energize critical failure relay (Output Relay 7).
• Inhibit operation of all other output relays (1 to 6).
• Turn off the "IN SERVICE" LED; turn on the "TROUBLE" LED.
• Flash the "ALARM" LED.
• Display the cause of major self-test failure.
• Record the major self-test failure in the Event Recorder.
Figure 3-6: Typical Self-test warning
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
UNIT FAILURE:
Contact Factory:
Error code:1
Table 3-1: Minor Self-test Errors

Self-test Error Latched Description of How Often the Test What to do
Message Target Problem is Performed
Message?
MAINTENANCE No A bad IRIG-B input Every 5 seconds* Ensure IRIG-B cable is
ALERT: IRIG-B signal has been connected, check cable
Failure detected. functionality (i.e. physical
damage or perform
continuity test), ensure
IRIG-B receiver is
functioning, and check
input signal level (it may
be less than specification).
If none of these apply,
contact the factory.
MAINTENANCE No Clock time is the Every 5 seconds* Set the date and time in
ALERT: Clock same as the default PRODUCT SETUP.
Not Set time.
MAINTENANCE No Communication Every 5 seconds* If alert doesn’t self-reset,
ALERT: Comm error between CPU then contact factory.
Alert 1, 2, or 3 and Comms board. Otherwise monitor
reccurences as errors are
detected and self-reset.
MAINTENANCE No Communication Detected Check Ethernet cable and
ALERT : error between Instantaneously Ethernet connection.
Ethernet Link 350 and Network. Check health of the
Fail network. Check status of
external routers and
switches.

CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP
Table 3-2: Major Self-test Errors

Self-test Error Latched Description of How Often the Test What to do
Message Target Problem is Performed
Message?
UNIT FAILURE: Yes This warning is Every 5 seconds1 Contact the factory and
Contact caused by a unit provide the failure code.
Factory hardware failure.
(XXXX) Failure code (XXXX) is
shown.
RELAY NOT No PRODUCT SETUP On power up and Program all required
READY: Check INSTALLATION whenever the settings then set the
Settings setting indicates that PRODUCT SETUP PRODUCT SETUP
relay is not in a INSTALLATION INSTALLATION setting to
programmed state. setting is altered. "Programmed".
1.Failure is logged after the detection of 5 consecutive failures - that is, after 25 seconds.
Flash messages Flash messages are warning, error, or general information messages displayed in response
to pressing certain keys. The factory default flash message time is 4 seconds.
Figure 3-7: Typical Flash message
SETPOINT STORED
This flash message is displayed in response to the ENTER key while on any setpoint
message (see example above). The edited value was stored as entered.
COMMAND EXECUTED
This flash message is displayed in response to executing a command: ON, OFF, YES, NO,
etc.
INVALID PASSWORD
This flash message appears upon an attempt to enter an incorrect password, as part of
password security.
AR IN PROGRESS
This flash message appears when the Autoreclosure is in progress performing the
configured sequence.
Software setup

SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
Quick setup - Software interface
• The Quick Setup window allows you to configure important settings from different
screens in the relay by adding them to a common window.
• Quick Setup window options are available for a single device or a file.
• The Quick Setup Window option is accessed from the "Tree" which launches on
clicking.
EnerVista SR3 Setup Software

Although settings can be entered manually using the control panel keys, a PC can be used
to download setpoints through the communications port. The EnerVista SR3
Setup software is available from GE Multilin to make this as convenient as possible. With
EnerVista SR3 Setup running, it is possible to:
• Program and modify settings
• Load and save setting files to and from a disk
• Read actual values
• Monitor status
• Read pre-trip data and event records
• Get help on any topic
• Upgrade the 350 firmware
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software allows immediate access to all 350 features with easy to
use pull down menus in the familiar Windows environment. This section provides the
necessary information to install EnerVista SR3 Setup , upgrade the relay firmware, and
write and edit setting files.

The EnerVista SR3 Setup software can run without a 350 connected to the computer. In
this case, settings may be saved to a file for future use. If a 350 is connected to a PC and
communications are enabled, the 350 can be programmed from the setting screens. In
addition, measured values, status and trip messages can be displayed with the actual
value screens.
Hardware and The following requirements must be met for the EnerVista SR3 Setup software.
software • Pentium 4 (Core Duo recommended)
requirements • Windows XP with Service Pack 2 (Service Pack 3 recommended) , Windows 7 (32-bit or
64-bit) , Windows 8.1 (32-bit or 64-bit)
• 1 GB of RAM (2 GB recommended)
• 500 MB free hard drive space (1 GB recommended)
• 1024 x 768 display (1280 x 800 recommended)
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software can be installed from either the GE EnerVista CD or the
GE Multilin website at http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin
Installing the After ensuring the minimum requirements indicated earlier, use the following procedure to
EnerVista SR3 Setup install the EnerVista SR3 Setup software from the enclosed GE EnerVista CD.
software 1. Insert the GE EnerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2. Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the no-
charge EnerVista software on the local PC.
3. When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.
4. Click the IED Setup section of the LaunchPad toolbar.
5. In the EnerVista Launchpad window, click the Add Product button and select the
350 Feeder Protection System as shown below. Select the Web option to ensure the
most recent software release, or select CD if you do not have a web connection, then
click the Add Now button to list software items for the 350 .

6. EnerVista Launchpad will obtain the latest installation software from the Web or CD
and automatically start the installation process. A status window with a progress bar
will be shown during the downloading process.
7. Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista SR3
Setup software will be installed.
8. Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory
indicated, the USB driver will be loaded into the computer, and the installation
program will automatically create icons and add EnerVista SR3 Setup software to the
Windows start menu.
9. The 350 device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista Launchpad
window, as shown below.

If you are going to communicate from your computer to the 350 Relay using the USB
port:
10. Plug the USB cable into the USB port on the 350 Relay then into the USB port on your
computer.
11. Launch EnerVista SR3 Setup from LaunchPad.
12. In EnerVista > Device Setup:
13. Select USB as the Interface type.

14. Select 350 Relay as the USB device.

Upgrading the The latest EnerVista software and firmware can be downloaded from:
software https://www.gegridsolutions.com/app/ViewFiles.aspx?prod=350&type=7
After upgrading, check the version number under Help > About. If the new version does
not display, try uninstalling the software and reinstalling the new versions.
Connecting EnerVista SR3 Setup to the relay
Configuring serial Before starting, verify that the cable is properly connected to either the USB port on the
communications front panel of the device (for USB communications) or to the RS485 terminals on the back
of the device (for RS485 communications). This example demonstrates an USB connection.
For RS485 communications, the GE Multilin F485 converter will be required. Refer to the
F485 manual for additional details. To configure the relay for Ethernet communications,
see Configuring Ethernet Communications below.
1. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista SR3 Setup software (available from
the GE Multilin web site). See the previous section for the installation procedure.
2. Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add
Site button to define a new site.
3. Enter the desired site name in the "Site Name" field. If desired, a short description of
the site can also be entered. In this example, we will use “Substation 1” as the site
name.
4. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista SR3 Setup window.
5. Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
6. Enter the desired name in the "Device Name" field and a description (optional) of the
device.
7. Select “Serial” from the Interface drop-down list.

8. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 350 device and upload the order
code.
9. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added
to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main
EnerVista SR3 Setup window.
The 350 Site Device has now been configured for USB communications. Proceed to
Connecting to the Relay below, to begin communications.
Using the Quick The Quick Connect button can be used to establish a fast connection through the front
Connect feature panel USB port of a 350 relay, or through the Ethernet port. The following window will
appear when the QuickConnect button is pressed:
As indicated by the window, the "Quick Connect" feature can quickly connect the EnerVista
SR3 Setup software to a 350 front port if the USB is selected in the interface drop-down list.
Select "350 Relay" and press the Connect button. Ethernet can also be used as the
interface for Quick Connect as shown above.
When connected, a new Site called “Quick Connect” will appear in the Site List window.

The 350 Site Device has now been configured via the Quick Connect feature for either USB
or Ethernet communications. Proceed to Connecting to the Relay below, to begin
communications.
Configuring Ethernet Before starting, verify that the Ethernet cable is properly connected to the RJ-45 Ethernet
communications port.
350 supports a maximum of 3 TCP/IP sessions.

NOTE:
NOTE 1. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista SR3 Setup Setup software (available
from the GE EnerVista CD). See the previous section for the installation procedure.
2. Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add
Site button to define a new site.
3. Enter the desired site name in the "Site Name" field. If desired, a short description of
the site can also be entered. In this example, we will use “Substation 1” as the site
name.
4. The new site will appear in the upper-left list.
5. Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
6. Enter the desired name in the "Device Name" field, and a description (optional).
7. Select “Ethernet” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of
interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet functionality.

8. Enter the IP address, slave address, and Modbus port values assigned to the 350 relay
(from the S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > ETHERNET menu).
9. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 350 and upload the order code. If
a communications error occurs, ensure that the Ethernet communication values
correspond to the relay setting values.
10. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added
to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main
EnerVista SR3 Setup window.
The 350 Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to
the following section to begin communications.
Connecting to the Now that the communications parameters have been properly configured, the user can
relay easily communicate with the relay.
1. Expand the Site list by double clicking on the site name or clicking on the «+» box to
list the available devices for the given site.
2. Desired device trees can be expanded by clicking the «+» box. The following list of
headers is shown for each device:
Device Definition
Actual Values
Quick Setup
Setpoints
Maintenance.
3. Expand the SETTINGS > RELAY SETUP list item and double click on Front Panel to open
the Front Panel settings window as shown:

4. The Front Panel settings window opens with a corresponding status indicator on the
lower left of the EnerVista SR3 Setup window.
5. If the status indicator is red, verify that the serial, USB, or Ethernet cable is properly
connected to the relay, and that the relay has been properly configured for
communications (steps described earlier).
The Front Panel settings can now be edited, printed, or changed. Other setpoint and
command windows can be displayed and edited in a similar manner. "Actual Values"
windows are also available for display. These windows can be arranged, and resized at will.
Working with setpoints and setpoint files
Engaging a device The EnerVista SR3 Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to
directly communicate with a relay. Communicating relays are organized and grouped by
communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any number of relays selected
from the product series.
Entering setpoints The System Setup page will be used as an example to illustrate the entering of setpoints. In
this example, we will be changing the voltage sensing setpoints.
1. Establish communications with the relay.
2. Select the Setpoint > System Setup > Voltage Sensing menu item.

3. Select the Bus VT Secondary setpoint by clicking anywhere in the parameter box. This
will display three arrows: two to increment/decrement the value and another to
launch the numerical keypad.
4. Clicking the arrow at the end of the box displays a numerical keypad interface that
allows the user to enter a value within the setpoint range displayed near the top of the
keypad: Click = to exit from the keypad and keep the new value. Click on X to exit from
the keypad and retain the old value.
5. For setpoints requiring non-numerical pre-set values (e.g. 3-Phase voltage

connection below), clicking anywhere within the setpoint value box displays a drop-
down selection menu arrow. Select the desired value from this list.
6. For setpoints requiring an alphanumeric text string (e.g. "relay name"), the value may
be entered directly within the setpoint value box.

7. In the Setpoint > System Setup > Voltage Sensing dialog box, click on Save to save
the values into the 350 . Click YES to accept any changes and exit the window. Click
Restore to retain previous values. Click Default to restore Default values.
Setting Front panels with programmable LEDs have eight LEDs that are off by default, and must be
programmable LEDs set to a source signal. Four of these LEDs can also be set to different colors.
1. Establish communications with the relay.
2. Select the Setpoint > S1 Relay Setup > Front Panel menu item.
3. Select an LED Source setpoint by clicking anywhere in the parameter box beside an
LED Source label. This displays an arrow indicating the LED source can be changed.
4. Clicking the arrow at the end of the box displays a drop-down list of available source
signals. Select a source, and then repeat this process for all programmable LED source
and color parameters.
5. In the Setpoint > S1 Relay Setup > Front Panel dialog box, click Save to save the
values into the 350 . Click YES to accept any changes. Click Restore to retain previous
values. Click Default to restore Default values (all LEDs Off and colors Orange).
6. Click View Layout and Print to create a printable label for the front panel showing the
programmable LED settings. Edit LED names manually by clicking the LED label and
entering up to 20 characters. (Manual edits can be printed, but are not saved.)

7. Click Print to print a copy of the customized front panel label.
File support Opening any EnerVista SR3 Setup file will automatically launch the application or provide
focus to the already opened application. If the file is a settings file (has a ‘SR3’ extension)
which had been removed from the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the
Settings List tree.
New files will be automatically added to the tree.
Using setpoints files The EnerVista SR3 Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to
relay settings:
• In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later
download to communicating relays.
• Directly modifying relay settings while connected to a communicating relay, then
saving the settings when complete.
• Creating/editing settings files while connected to a communicating relay, then saving
them to the relay when complete.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file
contains data pertaining to the following types of relay settings:
• Device Definition
• Relay Setup
• System Setup
• Protection
• Control
• Inputs/Outputs
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
The EnerVista SR3 Setup displays relay setpoints with the same hierarchy as the front
panel display.
Downloading and Back up a copy of the in-service settings for each commissioned 350 unit, so as to revert
saving setpoint files to the commissioned settings after inadvertent, unauthorized, or temporary setting
changes are made, after the settings default due to firmware upgrade, or when the unit
has to be replaced. This section describes how to backup settings to a file and how to use
that file to restore settings to the original relay or to a replacement relay

Setpoints must be saved to a file on the local PC before performing any firmware
upgrades. Saving setpoints is also highly recommended before making any setpoint
changes or creating new setpoint files.
The setpoint files in the EnerVista SR3 Setup window are accessed in the Files Window. Use
the following procedure to download and save setpoint files to a local PC.
1. Ensure that the site and corresponding device(s) have been properly defined and
configured as shown in Connecting EnerVista SR3 Setup to the Relay, above.
2. Select the desired device from the site list.
3. Select the Online > Read Device Settings from Device menu item, or right-click on the
device and select Read Device Settings to obtain settings information from the
device.
4. After a few seconds of data retrieval, the software will request the name and
destination path of the setpoint file. The corresponding file extension will be
automatically assigned. Press Receive to complete the process. A new entry will be
added to the tree, in the File pane, showing path and file name for the setpoint file.
Adding setpoints files The EnerVista SR3 Setup software provides the capability to review and manage a large
to the environment group of setpoint files. Use the following procedure to add an existing file to the list.
1. In the files pane, right-click on Files and select the Add Existing Setting File item as
shown:
2. The Open dialog box will appear, prompting the user to select a previously saved
setpoint file. As for any other MS Windows® application, browse for the file to be
added then click Open. The new file and complete path will be added to the file list.
Creating a new The EnerVista SR3 Setup software allows the user to create new setpoint files independent
setpoint file of a connected device. These can be uploaded to a relay at a later date. The following
procedure illustrates how to create new setpoint files.

1. In the File pane, right click on File and select the New Settings File item. The following
box will appear, allowing for the configuration of the setpoint file for the correct
firmware version. It is important to define the correct firmware version to ensure that
setpoints not available in a particular version are not downloaded into the relay.
2. Select the Firmware Version, and Order Code options for the new setpoint file.
3. For future reference, enter some useful information in the Description box to facilitate
the identification of the device and the purpose of the file.
4. To select a file name and path for the new file, click the button beside the File Name
box.
5. Select the file name and path to store the file, or select any displayed file name to
replace an existing file. All 350 setpoint files should have the extension ‘SR3’ (for
example, ‘feeder1.SR3’).
6. Click OK to complete the process. Once this step is completed, the new file, with a
complete path, will be added to the EnerVista SR3 Setup software environment.
Upgrading setpoint It is often necessary to upgrade the revision for a previously saved setpoint file after the
files to a new revision 350 firmware has been upgraded. This is illustrated in the following procedure:
1. Establish communications with the 350 relay.
2. Select the Maintenance > M1 Relay Info menu item and record the Firmware
Revision.
3. Load the setpoint file to be upgraded into the EnerVista SR3 Setup environment as
described in the section, Adding Setpoints Files to the Environment.
4. In the File pane, select the saved setpoint file.
5. From the main window menu bar, select the Offline > Edit Settings File Properties
menu item and note the File Version of the setpoint file. If this version is different from
the Firmware Revision noted in step 2, select a New File Version that matches the
Firmware Revision from the pull-down menu.

6. For example, if the firmware revision is L0L01MA140.000 (Firmware Revision 1.40) and
the current setpoint file revision is 1.20, change the setpoint file revision to “1.4x”.
7. Enter any special comments about the setpoint file in the "Description" field.
8. Select the desired firmware version from the "New File Version" field.
9. When complete, click OK to convert the setpoint file to the desired revision. See
Loading Setpoints from a File below, for instructions on loading this setpoint file into
the 350 .
Printing setpoints and The EnerVista SR3 Setup software allows the user to print partial or complete lists of
actual values setpoints and actual values. Use the following procedure to print a list of setpoints:
1. Select a previously saved setpoints file in the File pane or establish communications
with a 350 device.
2. From the main window, select the Offline > Export Settings File menu item.

3. The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. Select Settings in the upper section
and select either Include All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only Enabled
Features (for a list of only those features which are currently used) in the filtering
section and click OK.
4. The process for Offline > Print Preview Settings File is identical to the steps above.
5. Setpoint lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired file (in
the file list) or device (in the device list) and selecting the Print Device Information or
Print Settings File options.
Printing actual values A complete list of actual values can also be printed from a connected device with the
from a connected following procedure:
device 1. Establish communications with the desired 350 device.
2. From the main window, select the Online > Print Device Information menu item
3. The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. Select Actual Values in the upper
section and select either Include All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only
Enabled Features (for a list of only those features which are currently used) in the
filtering section and click OK.
Actual values lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired
device (in the device list) and selecting the Print Device Information option

Loading setpoints
from a file
An error message will occur when attempting to download a setpoint file with a
CAUTION:
revision number that does not match the relay firmware. If the firmware has been
upgraded since saving the setpoint file, see for instructions on changing the revision
number of a setpoint file.
The following procedure illustrates how to load setpoints from a file. Before loading a
setpoints file, it must first be added to the EnerVista SR3 Setup environment as described
in the section, Adding Setpoints Files to the Environment.
1. Select the previously saved setpoints file from the File pane of the EnerVista SR3 Setup
software main window.
2. Select the Offline > Edit Settings File Properties menu item and verify that the
corresponding file is fully compatible with the hardware and firmware version of the
target relay. If the versions are not identical, see Upgrading Setpoint Files to a New
Revision for details on changing the setpoints file version.
3. Right-click on the selected file and select the Write Settings File to Device item.
4. Select the target relay from the list of devices shown and click Send. If there is an
incompatibility, an error of following type will occur:
If there are no incompatibilities between the target device and the settings file, the data
will be transferred to the relay. An indication of the percentage completed will be shown in
the bottom of the main window.
Uninstalling files and The unit can be decommissioned by turning off the power to the unit and disconnecting
clearing data the wires to it. Files can be cleared after uninstalling the EnerVista software or 350 device,
for example to comply with data security regulations. On the computer, settings files can
be identified by the .sr3 extension.
To clear the current settings file do the following:
1. Create a default settings file.
2. Write the default settings file to the relay.
3. Delete all other files with the .sr3 extension.
4. Delete any other data files , which can be in standard formats, such as COMTRADE or
.csv.
You cannot directly erase the flash memory, but all records and settings in that memory
can be deleted. Do this using these commands:
ACTUAL VALUES > RECORDS
• EVENTS RECORDS > CLEAR
• TRANSIENT RECORDS > CLEAR

Upgrading relay firmware

To upgrade the 350 firmware, follow the procedures listed in this section. Upon successful
completion of this procedure, the 350 will have new firmware installed with the factory
default setpoints.The latest firmware files are available from the GE Multilin website at
http:// www.GEmultilin.com.
EnerVista SR3 Setup software prevents incompatible firmware from being loaded into a
NOTE:
350 relay.
NOTE
Before upgrading firmware, it is very important to save the current 350 settings to a file on
NOTE:
your PC. After the firmware has been upgraded, it will be necessary to load this file back
NOTE into the 350 . Refer to Downloading and Saving Setpoints Files for details on saving relay
setpoints to a file.
Loading new relay Loading new firmware into the 350 flash memory is accomplished as follows:
firmware 1. Connect the relay to the local PC and save the setpoints to a file as shown in
Downloading and Saving Setpoints Files.
2. Select the Maintenance > Update Firmware menu item.
3. The EnerVista SR3 Setup software will request the new firmware file. Locate the folder
that contains the firmware files to load into the 350 . The firmware filename has the
following format:
SR350_200.SFD
Firmware Rev #
4. EnerVista SR3 Setup software now prepares the 350 to receive the new firmware file.
The 350 front panel will momentarily display "SR BOOT PROGRAM Waiting for
Message,” indicating that it is in upload mode.
5. While the file is being loaded into the 350 , a status box appears showing how much of
the new firmware file has been transferred and the upgrade status. The entire transfer
process takes approximately 10 minutes.

6. The EnerVista SR3 Setup software will notify the user when the 350 has finished
loading the file. Carefully read any displayed messages and click OK to return the
main screen. Cycling power to the relay is recommended after a firmware upgrade.
After successfully updating the 350 firmware, the relay will not be in service and will
require setpoint programming. To communicate with the relay, the communication
settings may have to be manually reprogrammed.
When communications is established, the saved setpoints must be reloaded back into the
relay. See Loading Setpoints from a File for details.
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding
data items (i.e. default values, min/max values, data type, and item size) may change
slightly from version to version of firmware.
The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are
enhanced or modified.
Advanced EnerVista SR3 Setup features
Flexcurve editor The FlexCurve Editor is designed to allow the user to graphically view and edit the
FlexCurve. The Flexcurve Editor screen is shown below:

• The Operate Curves are displayed, which can be edited by dragging the tips of the
curves
• A Base curve can be plotted for reference, to customize the operating curve. The Blue
colored curve in the picture (in both curves) is a reference curve. It can be Extremely
Inverse, Definite Time, etc.
• The Trip Times in the tables and curves work interactively i.e., changing the table value
will affect the curve shape and vice versa.
• The user can save Configured Trip Times.
• The user can export Configured Trip Times to a CSV file
• The user can load Trip Times from a CSV File
• The screen above shows the model followed by 350 for viewing Flexcurves. Select
Initialize to copy the trip times from the selected curve to the FlexCurve.

Transient recorder The EnerVista SR3 Setup software can be used to capture waveforms (or view trace
(Waveform capture) memory) from the relay at the instance of a pickup, trip, alarm, or other condition.
• With EnerVista SR3 Setup software running and communications established, select
the Actual Values > A3 Records > Transient Records menu item to open the
Transient Recorder Viewer window.
• Click on Trigger Waveform to trigger a waveform capture. Waveform file numbering

starts with the number zero in the 350 , so that the maximum trigger number will
always be one less than the total number of triggers available.
• Click on the Save to File button to save the selected waveform to the local PC. A new
window will appear, requesting the file name and path. One file is saved as a
COMTRADE file, with the extension "CFG." The other file is a "DAT" file, required by the
COMTRADE file for proper display of waveforms.
• To view a previously saved COMTRADE file, click the Open button and select the
corresponding COMTRADE file.
• To view the captured waveforms, click on the Launch Viewer button. A detailed
Waveform Capture window will appear as shown below.

TRIGGER TIME & DATE VECTOR DISPLAY SELECT CURSOR LINE POSITION DELTA
Displays the time and date Click here to open a new graph Indicates the cursor line position Indicates time difference
of the Trigger. to display vectors. in time with respect to the between the two cursor
beginning of the buffer. lines.
FILE NAME CURSOR LINES TRIGGER LINE

Display graph values Indicates the To move lines, locate the mouse Indicates the point
at the corresponding file name and pointer over the cursor line, then in time for the
cursor line. Cursor complete path click and drag the cursor to the trigger.
lines are identified (if saved). new position.
by their colors.
• The red vertical line indicates the trigger point.
• The date and time of the trigger are displayed at the top left corner of the window. To
match the captured waveform with the event that triggered it, make note of the time
and date shown in the graph, then find the event that matches the same time in the
event recorder. The event record will provide additional information on the cause and
system conditions at the time of the event.
• From the window main menu bar, press the Preference button to open the COMTRADE
Setup page, in order to change the graph attributes.

Preference Button
The following window will appear:
Change the color of each graph as desired, and select other options as required, by
checking the appropriate boxes. Click OK to store these graph attributes, and to close the
window. The Waveform Capture window will reappear based on the selected graph
attributes.
To view a vector graph of the quantities contained in the waveform capture, press the
Vector Display button to display the following window:

Protection summary Protection Summary is a single screen which holds the summarized information of
different settings from Grouped Elements, Control Elements and Maintenance screens.
Protection Summary Screen allows the user to:
• view the output relay assignments for the elements
• modify the output relay assignments for the elements
• view the enable/disable status of Control Elements
• navigate to the respected Protection Element screen on a button click.
The Protection Summary screen is as follows:

Password security Password security is an optional feature of the 350 which can be setup using the SR3
EnerVista Setup software. The password system has been designed to facilitate a
hierarchy for centralized management. This is accomplished through a Master level
access password which can be used for resetting lower level access passwords and higher
level privileged operations. In cases where operational security is required as well as a
central administrative authority then the use of the password system is highly encouraged.

The feature robustness of this system requires it to be managed exclusively through the
EnerVista setup software. This section describes how to perform the initial setup. For more
details on the password security feature, refer to Chapter 6 - Password Security.
1. 350 devices shipped from the factory are initially set with security disabled. If the
password security feature is to be used, the user must first change the Master Reset
Password from the initial Null setting, this can only be done over communications, not
from the front panel keypad. The new Master Reset Password must be 8 to 10
characters in length, and must have minimum 2 letters and 2 numbers. The letters are
case sensitive. After entering a valid Master Reset Password, enter the new Master
Reset Password again to confirm, then select Change Password.
2. Now that the Master Reset Password has been programmed, enter it again to log in to
the Master Access level. The Master Level permits setup of the Remote and Local
Passwords. If the Master Reset Password has been lost, record the Encrypted Key and
contact the factory to have it decrypted.
3. With Master Level access, the user may disable password security altogether, or
change the Master Reset Password.
4. The Master Access level allows programming of the Remote Setpoint and Remote
Control passwords. These passwords are initially set to a Null value, and can only be
set or changed from a remote user over RS485 or Ethernet communications. Remote
Passwords must be 3 to 10 characters in length.

5. Initial setup of the Local Setpoint and Local Control passwords requires the Master
Access level. If Overwrite Local Passwords is set to YES, Local passwords can be
changed remotely only (over RS485 or Ethernet). If Overwrite Local Passwords is set to
NO, Local passwords can be changed locally only (over USB or keypad). If changing
Local Passwords is permitted locally, the keypad user can only change the Local
Passwords if they have been changed from the initial NULL value to a valid one. Local
Passwords must be 3 to 10 characters in length.
6. If any Remote password has never been set, that level will not be attainable except
when logged in as the Master Level. The same logic applies to the Local passwords.
7. When passwords have been set, the user will be prompted to enter the appropriate
password depending on the interface being used (remote or local), and the nature of
the change being made (setpoint or control). If the correct password is entered, the
user is now logged into that access level over that interface only. The access level
turns off after a period of 5 minutes of inactivity, if control power is cycled, or if the
user enters an incorrect password.

GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 4: Actual values
Actual values
Actual values overview

All measured values, the status of digital inputs and outputs, and fault analysis information
are accessed in Actual Values mode. Actual value messages are organized into logical
groups for easy reference as shown below.

ACTUAL VALUES OVERVIEW CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Figure 4-1: Main Actual Values menu
ACTUAL VALUES
A1 STATUS A1 STATUS
A2 METERING CLOCK
A3 RECORDS CONTACT INPUTS
A4 TARGET MESSAGES OUTPUT RELAYS
▼
LOGIC ELEMENTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
C. INPUTS SUMMARY
OUT RELAYS SUMMARY
LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY
A2 METERING
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
POWER
▼
ENERGY
THERMAL CAP
CLEAR ENERGY
A3 RECORDS
EVENT RECORDS A3 EVENT REC T39
TRANSIENT RECORDS A3 TRANSIENT RECORDS E39, Date
CLEAR EVENT REC FORCE TRIGGER? Event Record
▼ ▼ Time
CLEAR TRANST REC TOTAL RECORDS
CLEAR THERM CAP AVAILABLE RECORDS
LAST CLEARED
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
SETPOINT GROUP 1 A3 CLEAR EVENT REC
CLEAR
BKR STATUS FAIL
AR DISABLED
A3 CLEAR TRANST REC
CLEAR
898760A1.cdr
A3 CLEAR THERM CAP
CLEAR

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A1 STATUS
A1 Status
Figure 4-2: Status menu
A1 STATUS
CLOCK A1 CLOCK
CONTACT INPUTS CURRENT DATE
OUTPUT RELAYS ▼
▼ CURRENT TIME
LOGIC ELEMENTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS A1 CONTACT INPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS CONTACT INPUT 1
REMOTE OUTPUTS ▼
C. INPUTS SUMMARY CONTACT INPUT 2
OUT RELAYS SUMMARY ...
LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY CONTACT INPUT 10
GOOSE STATUS
GOOSE HDR. STATUS
A1 OUTPUT RELAYS
61850 STATUS
TRIP
RTC SYNC
OFF
REDUNDANCY
▼
PTP
CLOSE
OUTPUT RELAY 3
...
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 7
A1 LOGIC ELEMENTS
LOGIC ELEMENT 1
▼
LOGIC ELEMENT 2
...
LOGIC ELEMENT 16
A1 VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
▼
VIRTUAL INPUT 2
898763A2.cdr ...
VIRTUAL INPUT 32
Clock
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > CLOCK
CURRENT DATE
Feb 12 2009
Range: Date in format shown
Indicates today’s date.
CURRENT TIME
09:17:12
Range: Time in format shown
Indicates the current time of day.

A1 STATUS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Contact inputs
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > CONTACT INPUTS
CI #1 (52a) (Contact Input 1)
OFF
Range: Off, On
The status of this contact shows the breaker close/open state, when wired to a 52a
breaker auxiliary contact.
CI #2 (52b) (Contact Input 2)
OFF
Range: Off, On
The status of this contact shows the breaker close/open state, when wired to a 52b
breaker auxiliary contact.
CONTACT INPUT 3 to 10
OFF
Range: Off, On
Message displays the state of the contact input. The message “ON” indicates that the
contact input is energized, and message “OFF” indicates a de-energized contact.
Output relays
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > OUTPUT RELAYS
TRIP (Output Relay #1)
OFF
Range: Off, On
The “ON” state of Output Relay #1 (TRIP) shows that a TRIP command has been sent to
the breaker.
CLOSE (Output Relay #2)
OFF
Range: Off, On
The “ON” state of Output Relay #2 (CLOSE) shows that a close command has been sent
to the breaker.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 (Auxiliary Output Relays)
OFF
Range: Off, On
OUTPUT RELAY 7 (Critical Failure Relay)
Range: Off, On
The "ON" state indicates that the relay is in-service.
Logic elements
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > LOGIC ELEMENTS
LOGIC ELEMENT 1 to 16
OFF
Range: Off, On
The state “ON” or “OFF” for each logic element depends on its programmed logic:
triggering inputs, blocking inputs, plus any pickup, and/or reset time delay.

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A1 STATUS
Virtual inputs
The state of all active virtual inputs is displayed here.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS 1 to 32
OFF
Range: Off, On
Remote inputs
The state of all active remote inputs is displayed here.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS 1 to 32
OFF
Range: Off, On
Remote outputs
The state of all active remote outputs is displayed here.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > REMOTE OUTPUTS
REMOTE OUTPUTS 1 to 32
OFF
Range: Off, On
Contact inputs summary

C. INPUTS SUMMARY
52a OFF CI#6 OFF

52b OFF CI#7 OFF
CI#3 OFF CI#8 OFF
CI#4 OFF CI#9 OFF
CI#5 OFF CI#10 OFF
The display shows a summary of the states of all contact inputs.
Output relays summary

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > OUT RELAYS SUMMARY
OUTPUT RELAYS SUMMARY
TRIP OFF RLY#5 OFF

CLOSE OFF RLY#6 OFF
RLY#3 OFF RLY#7 ON
RLY#4 OFF
This display shows a summary of the states of all output relays.

A1 STATUS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Output relay #7 is the Critical Failure relay, used to indicate the correct functioning of the
NOTE:
350 relay. This output relay shows the status "ON" when the 350 relay is powered up and
NOTE set to "Ready" and no self-test alarms are active, under SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > S1
INSTALLATION > RELAY STATUS.
Logic elements summary

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY
LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY
LE#1 OFF LE#9 OFF

LE#2 OFF LE#10 OFF
LE#3 OFF LE#11 OFF
LE#4 OFF LE#12 OFF
LE#5 OFF LE#13 OFF
LE#6 OFF LE#14 OFF
LE#7 OFF LE#15 OFF
LE#8 OFF LE#16 OFF
This display shows a summary of the states of all logic elements.
GOOSE status
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > GOOSE STATUS
GOOSE 1 TO 8 STATUS
Range: OFF, ON
Default: OFF
GOOSE HDR status

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > GOOSE HDR STATUS
GOOSE 1 TO 8 H.STATUS
Range: OFF, ON
Default: OFF
RTC Sync Source

Path: Actual Values > Status
The RTC Sync Source actual value is the time synchronizing source the relay is using at
present. Possible sources are: PTP Clock, IRIG-B, SNTP and Internal.
Redundancy
The present values of he redundancy protocol are displayed here.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > REDUNDANCY>VERSIONS
• PRP_HSR Version -This is the current version of the PRP_HSR bitstream running in the
redundancy FPGA.
• Independent Version -This is the current version of the Independent bitstream
running in the redundancy FPGA.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > REDUNDANCY>PRP_HSR COUNTS

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A2 METERING
• PRP_HSR A TX - This is the number of correct messages transmitted over port A.

• PRP_HSR B TX - This is the number of correct messages transmitted over port B.
• PRP_HSR A ERR - This is the number of bad messages received over port A.
• PRP_HSR B ERR - This is the number of bad messages received over port B.
IEEE 1588 PTP (Precision Time Protocol)

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > PTP
Grandmaster ID:
GRAND MAS HI + GRAND MAS ID LO is the grandmaster identity code being received from
the present PTP grandmaster, if any. When the relay is not using any PTP grandmaster, this
actual value is zero. The grandmaster identity code is specified by PTP to be globally
unique, so one can always know which clock is the grandmaster in a system with multiple
grandmaster-capable clocks.
A2 Metering
The relay measures all RMS currents and voltages, frequency, and all auxiliary analog
inputs. Other values like neutral current, symmetrical components, power factor, power
(real, reactive, apparent), are derived. All quantities are recalculated every power system
cycle and perform protection and monitoring functions. Displayed metered quantities are
updated approximately three (3) times a second for readability. All phasors and
symmetrical components are referenced to the A-N voltage phasor for wye-connected
VTs; to the A-B voltage phasor for delta connected VTs; or to the phase A current phasor
when no voltage signals are present.
By scrolling the Up/Down keys the relay shows one-by-one, all metered values as follows:
Current
PH A CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 0.0 to 30000 A, 0 to 359o lag
PH B CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 0.0 to 30000 A, 0 to 359o lag
PH C CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 0.0 to 30000 A, 0 to 359o lag
NTRL CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 0.0 to 30000 A, 0 to 359o lag
GND CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 0.0 to 30000 A, 0 to 359o lag
GND CURRENT is shown when the GROUND CT TYPE is set to "1A Secondary" or "5A
Secondary".

A2 METERING CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
SENS GND CURRENT

0.00 A 0o lag
Range: 0.00 to 15.00 A, 0 to 359o lag
SENS GND CURRENT is shown when the GROUND CT TYPE is set to "50:0.025".
POS SEQ CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 0.0 to 30000 A, 0 to 359o lag
NEG SEQ CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 0.0 to 30000 A, 0 to 359o lag
ZERO SEQ CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 0.0 to 30000 A, 0 to 359o lag
Voltage
AN VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
BN VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
CN VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
AB VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
BC VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
CA VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
NTRL VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
POS SEQ VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
NEG SEQ VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
ZERO SEQ VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A2 METERING
AUX VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
FREQUENCY
0.00 Hz
Range: 40 to 70 Hz
BUS FREQ
0.00 Hz
Range: 40 to 70 Hz
LINE FREQ
0.00 Hz
Range: 40 to 70 Hz
Power
3 ph REAL POWER
0.0 kV
Range: -100000.0 to 100000.0 kW
3 ph REACTIVE POWER
0.0 kVAR
Range: -100000.0 to 100000.0 kVAR
3 ph APPARENT POWER
0.0 kVA
Range: 0 to 100000.0 kVA
POWER FACTOR
0.00
Range: -0.99 to 1.00
Energy
POSITIVE WATTHOUR
0.000 MWh
Range: 0.000 to 50000.000 MWh
NEGATIVE WATTHOUR
0.000 MWh
Range: 0.000 to 50000.000 MWh
POSITIVE VARHOUR
0.000 MVarh
Range: 0.000 to 50000.000 MVarh
NEGATIVE VARHOUR
0.000 MVarh
Range: 0.000 to 50000.000 MVarh
Thermal capacity
THERMAL CAP PH A
0%

A3 RECORDS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
THERMAL CAP PH B
0%
THERMAL CAP PH C
0%
Clear energy
CLEAR ENERGY
NO
Range: No, Yes
When set to "YES," pressing the ENTER key will clear all energy data.
A3 Records
The 350 has an event recorder which runs continuously. All event records are stored in
memory such that information is maintained for up to 3 days even after losing relay
control power. The events are displayed from newest to oldest event. Each event has a
header message containing a summary of the event that occurred, and is assigned an
event number equal to the number of events that have occured since the recorder was
cleared. The event number is incremented for each new event.
Event records
The Event Recorder runs continuously, capturing and storing the last 256 events. All events
are stored in non-volatile memory where the information is maintained, even in the case
where relay control power is lost.
Shown below is an example of an event record caused by a Breaker Open operation, and
the recorded information at the time of this record.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > EVENT RECORDS
Table 4-1: Example of Event Record
A3 EVENT REC T:778 E778 Jan 30,2009 ▶ E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open PHASE A
BKR Stat Open 16:30:23.324 CURRENT: 0.0 A 0° Lag
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open PHASE B
CURRENT: 0.0 A 0° Lag
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open PHASE C
CURRENT: 0.0 A 0° Lag
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open
GROUND CURRENT: 0.0 A 0° Lag
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open NTRL
GND CURRENT: 0.0 A
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open PHASE
A-B VOLTAGE 0 V 0°
▼

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 RECORDS

B-C VOLTAGE 0 V 0°
▼
C-A VOLTAGE 0 V 0°
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open
FREQUENCY 0.00 Hz
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open 3ph
REAL POWER 0.0 kW
▼
REACTIVE POWER 0.0 kvar
▼
APPARENT POWER 0.0 kVA
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open POWER
FACTOR 0.00
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open THERM
CAP PH A 0.0%
▼
CAP PH B 0.0%
▼
CAP PH C 0.0%
Each event is saved with event number, date and time, and contains information such as
per phase current, ground current, either phase-phase voltages (VTs connected in Delta),
or phase-neutral voltages (VTs connected in Wye), and system frequency. The Event
Recorder can be cleared from ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR EVENT REC setpoint.
The following tables provide lists of the event types and event causes:
Table 4-2: Event type
Event Type Display Description
General Events None Events that occur when specific
operation takes place
Pickup Events PICKUP: These are events that occur when a
protection element picks up
Trip Events TRIP: These are events that occur when a
breaker trip is initiated
Alarm and Latched Alarm Events ALARM: These are events that occur when an
alarm is initiated
Control Events CONTROL: These are events that occur when a
control element is activated
Dropout Events DROPOUT: These are events that occur when a
protection element drops out after a
corresponding pickup event
Contact Input Events C. INPUT: These are events that occur when a
contact input changes its state
Virtual Input Events V. INPUT These are events that occur when a
virtual input changes its state

Event Type Display Description

Remote Input Events R. INPUT These are events that occur when a
remote input changes its state
Logic Element Events L. ELEMENT These are events that occur when a logic
element changes its state
Self-Test Warning Events SELF-TEST WARNING These are events that occur when a self-
test warning is detected.
The following table, from the 350 Communications Guide, shows the list of Event Causes.
Code Type Definition

FC134 unsigned 16 bits Cause of Event
0 No Evnt/Trp ToDate
1 Ctrl. Pwr Lost
2 Ctrl. Pwr Applied
3 Date or Time Set
4 Reset
6 Factory Reload
7 Clock Not Set
8 IRIG-B Failure
9 Reset Trip Counter
10 BKR Status Unknown
11 Clear Event Rec
12 Clear Transt Rec
13 Clear Therm Cap
14 Comm. Alert 1
15 Comm. Alert 2
16 Comm. Alert 3
17 Ethernet Link Fail
18 High ENET Traffic
19 Ambient Temp. >80C
23 Trace Mem. Trigger
24 Rx Goose 1 ON
25 Rx Goose 1 OFF
26 Rx Goose 2 ON
27 Rx Goose 2 OFF
28 Rx Goose 3 ON
29 Rx Goose 3 OFF
30 Rx Goose 4 ON
31 Rx Goose 4 OFF
32 Rx Goose 5 ON
33 Rx Goose 5 OFF
34 Rx Goose 6 ON
35 Rx Goose 6 OFF
36 Rx Goose 7 ON
37 Rx Goose 7 OFF
38 Rx Goose 8 ON
39 Rx Goose 8 OFF
0x0040 Contact IN 1 On


0x0060 Contact IN 1 Off
0x0080 Virtual IN 1 On
0x008A Virtual IN 11 On
0x008B Virtual IN 12 On
0x008C Virtual IN 13 On
0x008D Virtual IN 14 On
0x008E Virtual IN 15 On
0x008F Virtual IN 16 On


0x00A0 Virtual IN 1 Off
0x00AA Virtual IN 11 Off
0x00AB Virtual IN 12 Off
0x00AC Virtual IN 13 Off
0x00AD Virtual IN 14 Off
0x00AE Virtual IN 15 Off
0x00AF Virtual IN 16 Off
0x00B0 Virtual IN 17 Off
0x00BA Virtual IN 27 Off
0x00BB Virtual IN 28 Off
0x00BC Virtual IN 29 Off
0x00BD Virtual IN 30 Off
0x00BE Virtual IN 31 Off
0x00BF Virtual IN 32 Off
0x01C0 Remote IN 1 On
0x01CA Remote IN 11 On


0x01CB Remote IN 12 On
0x01CC Remote IN 13 On
0x01CD Remote IN 14 On
0x01CE Remote IN 15 On
0x01CF Remote IN 16 On
0x01D0 Remote IN 17 On
0x01DA Remote IN 27 On
0x01DB Remote IN 28 On
0x01DC Remote IN 29 On
0x01DD Remote IN 30 On
0x01DE Remote IN 31 On
0x01DF Remote IN 32 On
0x01E0 Remote IN 1 Off
0x01EA Remote IN 11 Off
0x01EB Remote IN 12 Off
0x01EC Remote IN 13 Off
0x01ED Remote IN 14 Off
0x01EE Remote IN 15 Off
0x01EF Remote IN 16 Off
0x01F0 Remote IN 17 Off


0x01FA Remote IN 27 Off
0x01FB Remote IN 28 Off
0x01FC Remote IN 29 Off
0x01FD Remote IN 30 Off
0x01FE Remote IN 31 Off
0x01FF Remote IN 32 Off
0x8041 Therm O/L Trip PKP
0x8042 Therm O/L Trip OP
0x8044 Therm O/L Trip DPO
0x8049 Therm PhA Trip PKP
0x804A Therm PhA Trip OP
0x804C Therm PhA Trip DPO
0x8051 Therm PhB Trip PKP
0x8052 Therm PhB Trip OP
0x8054 Therm PhB Trip DPO
0x8061 Therm PhC Trip PKP
0x8062 Therm PhC Trip OP
0x8064 Therm PhC Trip DPO
0x84C1 LE 1 Trip PKP
0x84C2 LE 1 Trip OP
0x84C4 LE 1 Trip DPO
0x8501 LE 2 Trip PKP
0x8502 LE 2 Trip OP
0x8504 LE 2 Trip DPO
0x8542 LE 3 Trip OP
0x8582 LE 4 Trip OP
0x85C2 LE 5 Trip OP
0x8602 LE 6 Trip OP
0x8642 LE 7 Trip OP
0x8682 LE 8 Trip OP
0x8F81 Fuse Fail Trip PKP
0x8F82 Fuse Fail Trip OP
0x8F84 Fuse Fail Trip DPO
0x9001 Ph IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9002 Ph IOC1 Trip OP


0x9004 Ph IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9009 Ph A IOC1 Trip PKP
0x900A Ph A IOC1 Trip OP
0x900C Ph A IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9011 Ph B IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9012 Ph B IOC1 Trip OP
0x9014 Ph B IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9021 Ph C IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9022 Ph C IOC1 Trip OP
0x9024 Ph C IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9041 Ntrl IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9042 Ntrl IOC1 Trip OP
0x9044 Ntrl IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9081 Gnd IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9082 Gnd IOC1 Trip OP
0x9084 Gnd IOC1 Trip DPO
0x90C1 Ph TOC1 Trip PKP
0x90C2 Ph TOC1 Trip OP
0x90C4 Ph TOC1 Trip DPO
0x90C9 Ph A TOC1 Trip PKP
0x90CA Ph A TOC1 Trip OP
0x90CC Ph A TOC1 Trip DPO
0x90D1 Ph B TOC1 Trip PKP
0x90D2 Ph B TOC1 Trip OP
0x90D4 Ph B TOC1 Trip DPO
0x90E1 Ph C TOC1 Trip PKP
0x90E2 Ph C TOC1 Trip OP
0x90E4 Ph C TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9101 Ntrl TOC1 Trip PKP
0x9102 Ntrl TOC1 Trip OP
0x9104 Ntrl TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9141 Gnd TOC1 Trip PKP
0x9142 Gnd TOC1 Trip OP
0x9144 Gnd TOC1 Trip DPO
0x91A1 Ph C IOC2 Trip PKP
0x91A2 Ph C IOC2 Trip OP
0x91A4 Ph C IOC2 Trip DPO
0x91C1 Ntrl IOC2 Trip PKP


0x91C2 Ntrl IOC2 Trip OP
0x91C4 Ntrl IOC2 Trip DPO
0x9301 SGnd TOC1 Trip PKP
0x9302 SGnd TOC1 Trip OP
0x9304 SGnd TOC1 Trip DPO
0x93C1 NegSeq OV Trp PKP
0x93C2 NegSeq OV Trp OP
0x93C4 NegSeq OV Trp DPO
0x9401 Ntrl OV Trip PKP
0x9402 Ntrl OV Trp OP
0x9404 Ntrl OV Trip DPO
0x9441 Ph OV1 Trip PKP
0x9442 Ph OV1 Trip OP
0x9444 Ph OV1 Trip DPO
0x9449 Ph A OV1 Trip PKP
0x944A Ph A OV1 Trip OP
0x944C Ph A OV1 Trip DPO
0x9451 Ph B OV1 Trip PKP
0x9452 Ph B OV1 Trip OP
0x9454 Ph B OV1 Trip DPO
0x9461 Ph C OV1 Trip PKP
0x9462 Ph C OV1 Trip OP
0x9464 Ph C OV1 Trip DPO
0x9481 Ph UV1 Trip PKP
0x9482 Ph UV1 Trip OP
0x9484 Ph UV1 Trip DPO
0x9489 Ph A UV1 Trip PKP
0x948A Ph A UV1 Trip OP
0x948C Ph A UV1 Trip DPO
0x9491 Ph B UV1 Trip PKP
0x9492 Ph B UV1 Trip OP
0x9494 Ph B UV1 Trip DPO
0x94A1 Ph C UV1 Trip PKP
0x94A2 Ph C UV1 Trip OP
0x94A4 Ph C UV1 Trip DPO
0x94C1 Aux OV Trip PKP
0x94C2 Aux OV Trip OP
0x94C4 Aux OV Trip DPO
0x9501 Aux UV Trip PKP
0x9502 Aux UV Trip Op
0x9504 Aux UV Trip DPO
0x9541 UndrFreq1 Trip PKP
0x9542 UndrFreq1 Trip OP
0x9544 UndrFreq1 Trip DPO


0x95C1 OverFreq1 Trip PKP
0x95C2 OverFreq1 Trip OP
0x95C4 OverFreq1 Trip DPO
0x9601 OverFreq2 Trip PKP
0x9602 OverFreq2 Trip OP
0x9604 OverFreq2 Trip DPO
0x9641 SGnd IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9642 SGnd IOC1 Trip OP
0x9644 SGnd IOC1 Trip DPO
0x96C1 NegSeq IOC Trp PKP
0x96C2 NegSeq IOC Trp OP
0x96C4 NegSeq IOC Trp DPO
0x9C02 LE 9 Trip OP
0x9C42 LE 10 Trip OP
0x9CC1 LE 12 Trip PKP
0x9CC2 LE 12 Trip OP
0x9CC4 LE 12 Trip DPO
0x9D01 LE 13 Trip PKP
0x9D02 LE 13 Trip OP
0x9D04 LE 13 Trip DPO
0x9DC1 LE 16 Trip PKP
0x9DC2 LE 16 Trip OP
0x9DC4 LE 16 Trip DPO
0xA049 Therm PhA Alrm PKP
0xA04A Therm PhA Alrm OP
0xA04C Therm PhA Alrm DPO
0xA051 Therm PhB Alrm PKP
0xA052 Therm PhB Alrm OP


0xA054 Therm PhB Alrm DPO
0xA061 Therm PhC Alrm PKP
0xA062 Therm PhC Alrm OP
0xA064 Therm PhC Alrm DPO
0xA482 Relay Not Ready
0xA4C1 LE 1 Alarm PKP
0xA4C2 LE 1 Alarm OP
0xA4C4 LE 1 Alarm DPO
0xA501 LE 2 Alarm PKP
0xA502 LE 2 Alarm OP
0xA504 LE 2 Alarm DPO
0xABC1 HI Amb Temp PKP
0xABC2 HI Amb Temp OP
0xABC4 HI Amb Temp DPO
0xAC01 LO Amb Temp PKP
0xAC02 LO Amb Temp OP
0xAC04 LO Amb Temp DPO
0xAC42 Self Test Alarm OP
0xACC2 BKRTrpCntrAlrm OP
0xAD01 R1 CoilMonAlrm PKP
0xAD02 R1 CoilMonAlrm OP
0xAD04 R1 CoilMonAlrm DPO
0xAD41 R2 CoilMonAlrm PKP
0xAD44 R2 CoilMonAlrm DPO
0xAD81 BKR1 Fail Alrm PKP
0xAD82 BKR1 Fail Alrm OP
0xAD84 BKR1 Fail Alrm DPO
0xADC2 BKR Stat Fail OP


0xAE41 CLP Alarm PKP
0xAE42 CLP Alarm OP
0xAE44 CLP Alarm DPO
0xAF81 Fuse Fail Alrm PKP
0xAF82 Fuse Fail Alrm OP
0xAF84 Fuse Fail Alrm DPO
0xB001 Ph IOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB002 Ph IOC1 Alarm OP
0xB004 Ph IOC1 Alarm DPO
0xB009 Ph A IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB00A Ph A IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB00C Ph A IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB011 Ph B IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB012 Ph B IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB014 Ph B IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB021 Ph C IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB022 Ph C IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB024 Ph C IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB041 Ntrl IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB042 Ntrl IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB044 Ntrl IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB081 Gnd IOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB082 Gnd IOC1 Alarm OP
0xB084 Gnd IOC1 Alarm DPO
0xB0C1 Ph TOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB0C2 Ph TOC1 Alarm OP
0xB0C4 Ph TOC1 Alarm DPO
0xB0C9 Ph A TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB0CA Ph A TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB0CC Ph A TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB0D1 Ph B TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB0D2 Ph B TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB0D4 Ph B TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB0E1 Ph C TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB0E2 Ph C TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB0E4 Ph C TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB101 Ntrl TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB102 Ntrl TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB104 Ntrl TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB141 Gnd TOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB142 Gnd TOC1 Alarm OP
0xB144 Gnd TOC1 Alarm DPO


0xB1A1 Ph C IOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB1A2 Ph C IOC2 Alrm OP
0xB1A4 Ph C IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB1C1 Ntrl IOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB1C2 Ntrl IOC2 Alrm OP
0xB1C4 Ntrl IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB301 SGnd TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB302 SGnd TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB304 SGnd TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB342 NtrlDir RevAlm OP
0xB344 NtrlDir RevAlmDPO
0xB382 GndDir RevAlm OP
0xB384 GndDir RevAlm DPO
0xB3C1 NegSeq OV Alrm PKP
0xB3C2 NegSeq OV Alrm OP
0xB3C4 NegSeq OV Alrm DPO
0xB401 Ntrl OV Alrm PKP
0xB402 Ntrl OV Alrm OP
0xB404 Ntrl OV Alrm DPO
0xB441 Ph OV1 Alarm PKP
0xB442 Ph OV1 Alarm OP
0xB444 Ph OV1 Alarm DPO
0xB449 Ph A OV1 Alarm PKP
0xB44A Ph A OV1 Alarm OP
0xB44C Ph A OV1 Alarm DPO
0xB451 Ph B OV1 Alarm PKP
0xB452 Ph B OV1 Alarm OP
0xB454 Ph B OV1 Alarm DPO
0xB461 Ph C OV1 Alarm PKP
0xB462 Ph C OV1 Alarm OP
0xB464 Ph C OV1 Alarm DPO
0xB481 Ph UV1 Alarm PKP
0xB482 Ph UV1 Alarm OP
0xB484 Ph UV1 Alarm DPO
0xB489 Ph A UV1 Alarm PKP
0xB48A Ph A UV1 Alarm OP
0xB48C Ph A UV1 Alarm DPO
0xB491 Ph B UV1 Alarm PKP
0xB492 Ph B UV1 Alarm OP
0xB494 Ph B UV1 Alarm DPO


0xB4A1 Ph C UV1 Alarm PKP
0xB4A2 Ph C UV1 Alarm OP
0xB4A4 Ph C UV1 Alarm DPO
0xB4C1 Aux OV Alarm PKP
0xB4C2 Aux OV Alarm OP
0xB4C4 Aux OV Alarm DPO
0xB501 Aux UV Alarm PKP
0xB502 Aux UV Alarm OP
0xB504 Aux UV Alarm DPO
0xB541 UndrFreq1 Alrm PKP
0xB542 UndrFreq1 Alrm OP
0xB544 UndrFreq1 Alrm DPO
0xB5C1 OverFreq1 Alrm PKP
0xB5C2 OverFreq1 Alrm OP
0xB5C4 OverFreq1 Alrm DPO
0xB601 OverFreq2 Alrm PKP
0xB602 OverFreq2 Alrm OP
0xB604 OverFreq2 Alrm DPO
0xB641 SGnd IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB642 SGnd IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB644 SGnd IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB6C1 NSeq IOC Alrm PKP
0xB6C2 NSeq IOC Alrm OP
0xB6C4 NSeq IOC Alrm DPO
0xBC01 LE 9 Alarm PKP
0xBC02 LE 9 Alarm OP
0xBC04 LE 9 Alarm DPO
0xBCC1 LE 12 Alarm PKP
0xBCC2 LE 12 Alarm OP
0xBCC4 LE 12 Alarm DPO
0xBD01 LE 13 Alarm PKP
0xBD02 LE 13 Alarm OP
0xBD04 LE 13 Alarm DPO


0xBDC1 LE 16 Alarm PKP
0xBDC2 LE 16 Alarm OP
0xBDC4 LE 16 Alarm DPO
0xBE01 PhDir RevAlm PKP
0xBE02 PhDir RevAlm OP
0xBE04 PhDir RevAlm DPO
0xBE09 PhADir RevAlm PKP
0xBE0A PhADir RevAlm OP
0xBE0C PhADir RevAlm DPO
0xBE11 PhBDir RevAlm PKP
0xBE12 PhBDir RevAlm OP
0xBE14 PhBDir RevAlm DPO
0xBE21 PhCDir RevAlm PKP
0xBE22 PhCDir RevAlm OP
0xBE24 PhCDir RevAlm DPO
0xBE41 PhDir UndAlm PKP
0xBE42 PhDir UndAlm OP
0xBE44 PhDir UndAlm DPO
0xBE49 PhADir UndAlm PKP
0xBE4A PhADir UndAlm OP
0xBE4C PhADir UndAlm DPO
0xBE51 PhBDir UndAlm PKP
0xBE52 PhBDir UndAlm OP
0xBE54 PhBDir UndAlm DPO
0xBE61 PhCDir UndAlm PKP
0xBE62 PhCDir UndAlm OP
0xBE64 PhCDir UndAlm DPO
0xBE81 GndDir UndAlm PKP
0xBE82 GndDir UndAlm OP
0xBE84 GndDir UndAlm DPO
0xBEC1 NtrlDir UndAlm PKP
0xBEC2 NtrlDir UndAlm OP
0xBEC4 NtrlDir UndAlm DPO
0xC042 Output Relay 3 On
0xC0C2 Output Relay 5 On
0xC142 Self-Test Rly 7 On
0xC184 Output Relay 1 Off
0xC1C4 Output Relay 2 Off


0xC202 BKR Connected
0xC302 Synchrocheck OP
0xC382 Synchrocheck Condition
0xC4C1 LE 1 PKP
0xC4C2 LE 1 OP
0xC4C4 LE 1 DPO
0xC501 LE 2 PKP
0xC502 LE 2 OP
0xC504 LE 2 DPO
0xC541 LE 3 PKP
0xC542 LE 3 OP
0xC544 LE 3 DPO
0xC581 LE 4 PKP
0xC582 LE 4 OP
0xC584 LE 4 DPO
0xC5C1 LE 5 PKP
0xC5C2 LE 5 OP
0xC5C4 LE 5 DPO
0xC601 LE 6 PKP
0xC602 LE 6 OP
0xC604 LE 6 DPO
0xC641 LE 7 PKP
0xC642 LE 7 OP
0xC644 LE 7 DPO
0xC681 LE 8 PKP
0xC682 LE 8 OP
0xC684 LE 8 DPO
0xC882 Setpoint Group2 On
0xC902 Open Breaker
0xC942 Close Breaker
0xC982 Maint. Req. OP
0xCA02 52a Contact OP
0xCA42 52b Contact OP
0xCA44 52b Contact DPO
0xCA82 Reset OK
0xCB01 AR Close PKP
0xCB02 AR Close
0xCB04 AR Close DPO
0xCB42 AR N/Ready
0xCB44 AR N/Ready DPO
0xCB82 AR In Progress
0xCBC2 AR Disabled
0xCC02 AR Ext. Init
0xCC42 AR Ready
0xCCC2 BKR Stat Open
0xCD02 BKR Stat Clsd
0xCD42 Setpoint Group1 On


0xCE41 CLP PKP
0xCE42 CLP Op
0xCE44 CLP DPO
0xCF81 Fuse Fail InhibPKP
0xCF82 Fuse Fail Inhib OP
0xD041 Ntrl IOC1 PKP
0xD042 Ntrl IOC1 OP
0xD044 Ntrl IOC1 DPO
0xD081 Gnd IOC1 PKP
0xD082 Gnd IOC1 OP
0xD084 Gnd IOC1 DPO
0xD0C1 Ph TOC1 PKP
0xD0C2 Ph TOC1 OP
0xD0C4 Ph TOC1 DPO
0xD101 Ntrl TOC1 PKP
0xD102 Ntrl TOC1 OP
0xD104 Ntrl TOC1 DPO
0xD141 Gnd TOC1 PKP
0xD142 Gnd TOC1 OP
0xD144 Gnd TOC1 DPO
0xD181 Ph IOC2 PKP
0xD184 Ph IOC2 DPO
0xD1C1 Ntrl IOC2 PKP
0xD1C2 Ntrl IOC2 OP
0xD1C4 Ntrl IOC2 DPO
0xD201 Gnd IOC2 PKP
0xD202 Gnd IOC2 OP
0xD204 Gnd IOC2 DPO
0xD342 Ntrl Dir Rev OP
0xD344 Ntrl Dir Rev DPO
0xD382 Gnd Dir Rev OP
0xD384 Gnd Dir Rev DPO
0xD3C1 NegSeq OV PKP
0xD3C2 NegSeq OV OP
0xD3C4 NegSeq OV DPO
0xD401 Ntrl OV PKP
0xD402 Ntrl OV OP
0xD404 Ntrl OV DPO
0xD441 Ph OV1 PKP
0xD442 Ph OV1 OP
0xD444 Ph OV1 DPO
0xD481 Ph UV1 PKP
0xD482 Ph UV1 OP
0xD484 Ph UV1 DPO
0xD801 NSeq TOC1 PKP
0xD802 NSeq TOC1 OP
0xD804 NSeq TOC1 DPO


0xDC01 LE 9 PKP
0xDC02 LE 9 OP
0xDC04 LE 9 DPO
0xDC41 LE 10 PKP
0xDC42 LE 10 OP
0xDC44 LE 10 DPO
0xDC81 LE 11 PKP
0xDC82 LE 11 OP
0xDC84 LE 11 DPO
0xDCC1 LE 12 PKP
0xDCC2 LE 12 OP
0xDCC4 LE 12 DPO
0xDD01 LE 13 PKP
0xDD02 LE 13 OP
0xDD04 LE 13 DPO
0xDD41 LE 14 PKP
0xDD42 LE 14 OP
0xDD44 LE 14 DPO
0xDD81 LE 15 PKP
0xDD82 LE 15 OP
0xDD84 LE 15 DPO
0xDDC1 LE 16 PKP
0xDDC2 LE 16 OP
0xDDC4 LE 16 DPO
0xDE01 PhDir Rev PKP
0xDE02 PhDir Rev OP
0xDE04 PhDir Rev DPO
0xDE09 PhADir Rev PKP
0xDE0A PhADir Rev OP
0xDE0C PhADir Rev DPO
0xDE11 PhBDir Rev PKP
0xDE12 PhBDir Rev OP
0xDE14 PhBDir Rev DPO
0xDE21 PhCDir Rev PKP
0xDE22 PhCDir Rev OP
0xDE24 PhCDir Rev DPO
0xDE41 PhDir Und PKP
0xDE42 PhDir Und OP
0xDE44 PhDir Und DPO
0xDE49 PhADir Und PKP
0xDE4A PhADir Und OP
0xDE4C PhADir Und DPO
0xDE51 PhBDir Und PKP
0xDE52 PhBDir Und OP
0xDE54 PhBDir Und DPO
0xDE61 PhCDir Und PKP
0xDE62 PhCDir Und OP


0xDE64 PhCDir Und DPO
0xDE81 GndDir Und PKP
0xDE82 GndDir Und OP
0xDE84 GndDir Und DPO
0xDEC1 NtrlDir Und PKP
0xDEC2 NtrlDir Und OP
0xDEC4 NtrlDir Und DPO
0xE042 Therm O/L Blck OP
0xE044 Therm O/L Blck Off
0xE182 Output Relay 1 BLK
0xE184 Relay 1 BLK Off
0xE1C2 Output Relay 2 BLK
0xE1C4 Relay 2 BLK Off
0xE882 Group Change Blk
0xE884 Grp Change Blk DPO
0xEB02 AR Block
0xEB04 AR Block DPO
0xEE82 CLP Ph IOC1 BLK
0xEE84 CLP Ph IOC1 BLKDPO
0xEEC2 CLP Ph IOC2 BLK
0xEEC4 CLP Ph IOC2 BLKDPO
0xEF02 CLPNtrlIOC1 BLK
0xEF04 CLPNtrlIOC1 BLKDPO
0xEF44 CLPNtrlIOC2 BLKDPO
0xEF82 CLP GndIOC1 BLK
0xEF84 CLP GndIOC1 BLKDPO
0xEFC2 CLP GndIOC2 BLK
0xEFC4 CLP GndIOC2 BLKDPO
0xF002 Ph IOC1 Block
0xF004 Ph IOC1 Block DPO
0xF042 Ntrl IOC1 Block
0xF044 Ntrl IOC1 Blk DPO
0xF082 Gnd IOC1 Block
0xF084 Gnd IOC1 Block DPO
0xF0C2 Ph TOC1 Block
0xF0C4 Ph TOC1 Block DPO
0xF102 Ntrl TOC1 Block
0xF104 Ntrl TOC1 BlockDPO
0xF142 Gnd TOC1 Block
0xF144 Gnd TOC1 Block DPO
0xF184 Ph IOC2 Block DPO
0xF1C2 Ntrl IOC2 Block
0xF1C4 Ntrl IOC2 Blk DPO
0xF204 Gnd IOC2 Block DPO


0xF302 SGnd TOC1 Block
0xF304 SGnd TOC1 BlockDPO
0xF342 NTRL DIR Rev Block
0xF344 NTRL DIR Block DPO
0xF382 Gnd Dir Block
0xF384 Gnd Dir Block DPO
0xF3C2 NegSeq OV Block
0xF3C4 NSeq OV Blk DPO
0xF402 Ntrl OV Block
0xF404 Ntrl OV Block DPO
0xF442 Ph OV1 Block
0xF444 Ph OV1 Block DPO
0xF482 Ph UV1 Block
0xF484 Ph UV1 Block DPO
0xF4C2 Aux OV Block
0xF4C4 Aux OV Block DPO
0xF502 Aux UV Block
0xF504 Aux UV Block DPO
0xF542 UndrFreq1 Block
0xF544 UndrFreq1 BlockDPO
0xF584 UndrFreq2 BlockDPO
0xF5C2 OverFreq1 Block
0xF5C4 OverFreq1 Blk DPO
0xF602 OverFreq2 Block
0xF604 OverFreq2 BlockDPO
0xF642 SGnd IOC1 Block
0xF644 SGnd IOC1 Blk DPO
0xF684 SGnd IOC2 Blk DPO
0xF6C2 NSeq IOC Block
0xF6C4 NSeq IOC Block DPO
0xFE01 PhDir Block PKP
0xFE02 PhDir Block OP
0xFE04 PhDir Block DPO
0xFE41 PhDir Und Blk PKP
0xFE42 PhDir Und Blk OP
0xFE44 PhDir Und Blk DPO
0xFE81 GndDir Und Blk PKP
0xFE82 GndDir Und Blk OP
0xFE84 GndDir Und Blk DPO
0xFEC1 NtrlDir Und Blk PKP
0xFEC2 NtrlDir Und Blk OP
0xFEC4 NtrlDir Und Blk DPO

A4 TARGET MESSAGES CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Transient records
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > TRANSIENT RECORDS
FORCE TRIGGER?
No
Range: No, Yes
TOTAL RECORDS
1
Range: N/A
AVAILABLE RECORDS
1
Range: N/A
LAST CLEARED
Feb 08 2009
Range: N/A
Clear event record

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR EVENT REC
CLEAR
No
Range: No, Yes
When set to "Yes," pressing the ENTER key will clear all event records.
Clear transient record

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR TRANST REC
CLEAR
No
Range: No, Yes
When set to "Yes," pressing the ENTER key will clear all transient records.
Clear thermal capacity record

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR THERM CAP
CLEAR
No
Range: No, Yes
When set to "Yes," pressing the ENTER key will clear all thermal capacity records.
A4 Target messages
Target messages are automatically displayed for any active condition on the relay such as
pickups, trips, alarms, or asserted input. The target messages shown in the table below are
displayed as necessary.

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A4 TARGET MESSAGES
The relay displays the most recent event first, and after 5 seconds starts rolling up the
other target messages, until the Reset command is initiated. If the Reset command is not
performed, but any of the other faceplate pushbuttons is pressed, the display will not show
the target messages, unless the user navigates to ACTUAL VALUES > A4 TARGET MESSAGES,
where they can be reviewed.
The target messages can be reviewed by pressing Up and Down message pushbuttons
from the relay keypad.
The following table, from the 350 Communications Guide, shows the list of Active Targets.

FC134A unsigned 16 bits Active Targets
0 No Active Targets
7 Clock Not Set
8 IRIG-B Failure
14 Comm. Alert 1
15 Comm. Alert 2
16 Comm. Alert 3
17 Ethernet Link Fail
18 High ENET Traffic
19 Ambient Temp. >80C
0x8040 Therm O/L Trip
0x8480 Relay Not Config
0x84C0 LE 1 Trip
0x8500 LE 2 Trip
0x8540 LE 3 Trip
0x8580 LE 4 Trip
0x85C0 LE 5 Trip
0x8600 LE 6 Trip
0x8640 LE 7 Trip
0x8680 LE 8 Trip
0x8F80 Fuse Fail Trip
0x9000 Ph IOC1 Trip
0x9040 Ntrl IOC1 Trip
0x9080 Gnd IOC1 Trip
0x90C0 Ph TOC1 Trip
0x9100 Ntrl TOC1 Trip
0x9140 Gnd TOC1 Trip
0x9180 Ph IOC2 Trip
0x91C0 Ntrl IOC2 Trip
0x9200 Gnd IOC2 Trip
0x9240 Ph TOC2 Trip
0x9280 Ntrl TOC2 Trip
0x92C0 Gnd TOC2 Trip
0x9300 SGnd TOC1 Trip
0x93C0 NegSeq OV Trip
0x9400 Ntrl OV Trip
0x9440 Ph OV1 Trip
0x9480 Ph UV1 Trip


0x94C0 Aux OV Trip
0x9500 Aux UV Trip
0x9540 UndrFreq1 Trip
0x9580 UndrFreq2 Trip
0x95C0 OverFreq1 Trip
0x9600 OverFreq2 Trip
0x9640 SGnd IOC1 Trip
0x9680 SGnd IOC2 Trip
0x96C0 NegSeq IOC Trip
0x9800 NSeq TOC1 Trip
0x9840 NSeq TOC2 Trip
0x99C0 SGnd TOC2 Trip
0x9C00 LE 9 Trip
0x9C40 LE 10 Trip
0x9C80 LE 11 Trip
0x9CC0 LE 12 Trip
0x9D00 LE 13 Trip
0x9D40 LE 14 Trip
0x9D80 LE 15 Trip
0x9DC0 LE 16 Trip
0xA040 Therm Lvl Alrm
0xA480 Not Configured
0xA4C0 LE 1 Alarm
0xA500 LE 2 Alarm
0xA540 LE 3 Alarm
0xA580 LE 4 Alarm
0xA5C0 LE 5 Alarm
0xA600 LE 6 Alarm
0xA640 LE 7 Alarm
0xA680 LE 8 Alarm
0xABC0 HI Ambient Temp
0xAC00 LO Ambient Temp
0xAC40 Self Test Alarm
0xACC0 BKRTrpCntrAlrm
0xAD00 Rly1 Coil Mn Alrm
0xAD40 Rly2 Coil Mn Alrm
0xAD80 BKR Fail Alrm
0xADC0 BKRStatus Fail
0xAE40 CLP Alarm
0xAF80 Fuse Fail Alrm
0xB000 Ph IOC1 Alarm
0xB040 Ntrl IOC1 Alarm
0xB080 Gnd IOC1 Alarm
0xB0C0 Ph TOC1 Alarm
0xB100 Ntrl TOC1 Alrm
0xB140 Gnd TOC1 Alarm
0xB180 Ph IOC2 Alarm


0xB1C0 Ntrl IOC2 Alarm
0xB200 Gnd IOC2 Alarm
0xB240 Ph TOC2 Alarm
0xB280 Ntrl TOC2 Alrm
0xB2C0 Gnd TOC2 Alarm
0xB300 SGnd TOC1 Alarm
0xB340 NtrlDir RevAlm
0xB3C0 NegSeq OV Alarm
0xB400 Ntrl OV Alarm
0xB440 Ph OV1 Alarm
0xB480 Ph UV1 Alarm
0xB4C0 Aux OV Alarm
0xB500 Aux UV Alarm
0xB540 UndrFreq1 Alarm
0xB580 UndrFreq2 Alarm
0xB5C0 OverFreq1 Alrm
0xB600 OverFreq2 Alrm
0xB640 SGnd IOC1 Alarm
0xB680 SGnd IOC2 Alarm
0xB6C0 NegSeq IOC Alrm
0xB800 NSeq TOC1 Alarm
0xB840 NSeq TOC2 Alarm
0xB9C0 SGnd TOC2 Alarm
0xBC00 LE 9 Alarm
0xBC40 LE 10 Alarm
0xBC80 LE 11 Alarm
0xBCC0 LE 12 Alarm
0xBD00 LE 13 Alarm
0xBD40 LE 14 Alarm
0xBD80 LE 15 Alarm
0xBDC0 LE 16 Alarm
0xBE00 PhDir RevAlm
0xBE40 PhDir UndAlm
0xBE80 GndDir UndAlm
0xBEC0 NtrlDir UndAlm
0xC342 Synchrocheck Close OP
0xC4C0 LE 1
0xC500 LE 2
0xC540 LE 3
0xC580 LE 4
0xC5C0 LE 5
0xC600 LE 6
0xC640 LE 7
0xC680 LE 8
0xC880 Setpoint Group2


0xC900 Open Breaker
0xC980 Maint Required
0xCA00 52a Contact
0xCA40 52b Contact
0xCA80 Reset OK
0xCB00 AR Close
0xCB40 AR N/Ready
0xCBC0 AR Disabled
0xCC00 AR Ext. Init
0xCC40 AR Ready
0xCD40 Setpoint Group1
0xCE40 CLP Op
0xCF80 Fuse Fail Inhib
0xD340 Ntrl Dir Rev
0xD380 Gnd Dir
0xD440 Ph OV1
0xD480 Ph UV1
0xDC00 LE 9
0xDC40 LE 10
0xDC80 LE 11
0xDCC0 LE 12
0xDD00 LE 13
0xDD40 LE 14
0xDD80 LE 15
0xDDC0 LE 16
0xDE00 PhDir Rev
0xDE40 PhDir Und
0xDE80 GndDir Und
0xDEC0 NtrlDir Und
0xE040 Therm O/L Blck
0xEB00 AR Block


0xF240 Ph TOC2 Block
0xF2C0 Gnd TOC2 Block
0xF440 Ph OV1 Block
0xF480 Ph UV1 Block
0xF4C0 Aux OV Block
0xF500 Aux UV Block
0xF6C0 NegSeq IOC Block
0xF800 NSeq TOC1 Block
0xF840 NSeq TOC2 Block
0xF9C0 SGnd TOC2 Block
0xFE00 PhDir Block
0xFE40 PhDir Und Block
0xFE80 GndDir Und Block
0xFEC0 NtrlDir Und Block
• The PKP messages will appear on the relay display as long as their respective flags are
active. The messages will disappear from the display, when either the protection
element drops out before operation, such as when the condition clears before
reaching operation, or when the protection element operates.
• The OP and BKR Status messages will appear on the relay display, when the respective
element operates, with the element function set to “TRIP”, or “LATCHED ALARM”. The
message will stay on the display after the condition clears, and will disappear upon
Reset command. If the element function is selected to “ALARM”, or “CONTROL”, the
message will disappear from the display, when the condition causing operation clears.
• The Breaker Open and Breaker Close messages will appear on the display and stay for
5 seconds only, unless the reset command is initiated, or the element changes its
state. For example, if the breaker is detected “Open”, the message “Breaker Open OK”
will appear on the display and will stay for 5 seconds, unless the breaker status
changes to “Close”. If the breaker status changes to "Close" within 5 seconds after the
breaker has been detected open, the message “Breaker Open OK” will disappear, and
the message “Breaker Close OK” will appear and stay for 5 seconds.

• The Contact Input ON/OFF, Virtual Input ON/OFF, and Remote Input ON/OFF messages
will not appear as target messages upon change of state. The state change, however,
will be logged in the Event recorder.
Autoreclose target messages
AR Ready Appears on the display when the The message appears on the
AR is Ready, i.e. breaker closed, display for 5 seconds, when the AR
AR function enabled, and no AR is detected Ready.
initiation.
AR IN-PROGRESS Appears on the display when the Self-Reset message
AR is in progress
AR LOCKOUT Appears on the display when the Latched message. The message
AR is in lockout mode disappears upon Reset command
Examples of how the messages appear on the display:

Example 1:
Phase IOC1 Settings:
• PH IOC1 FUNCTION = Trip
• PH IOC1 PICKUP = 1.00 x CT
• PH IOC1 DELAY = 0.20 s
When current greater than the IOC1 pickup level is applied, the 3350 50 display shows the
following target message:
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Trip
STATE: PKP
After the 200 ms time delay expires, the display shows the following message only:
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Trip
STATE: OP
Example 2:
• PH IOC1 FUNCTION = Latched Alarm
When current greater than the IOC1 pickup level is applied, the 350 display shows the
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Alarm
STATE: PKP
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Alarm
STATE: OP
Example 3:
• PH IOC1 FUNCTION = Alarm
When current greater than the IOC1 pickup level is applied, the 350 display shows the

A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Alarm
STATE: PKP
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Alarm
STATE: OP
Once the condition clears, the target message will disappear.
NOTE:
NOTE


GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 5: Quick setup - Front control

panel
Quick setup - Front control panel
The “Quick Setup” utility is part of the 350 relay main menu, and can be used for quick and
easy programming. Power system parameters, and settings for some simple over-current
elements can be easily set. Use the “Quick Setup” utility to program the following:
Power System Data:
• Phase CT Primary
• Ground CT Primary
• VT Connection
• VT Secondary voltage
• VT Ratio
• Aux VT Secondary Voltage
• Aux VT Ratio
Overcurrent Protection:
• Phase TOC
• Ground TOC
• Neutral TOC
• Phase IOC
• Ground IOC
• Neutral IOC
Ensure the relay is in "Relay Ready" state before using Quick Setup.
NOTE:
NOTE

QUICK SETUP SETTINGS CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP - FRONT CONTROL PANEL
Figure 5-1: Quick Setup menu
ACTUAL VALUES
QUICK SETUP QUICK SETUP
SETPOINTS RELAY STATUS
MAINTENANCE ▼
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
PH CT PRIMARY
[SENS] GND CT PRIMARY
VT CONNECTION
VT SEC. VOLTAGE
VT RATIO
AUX VT SECONDARY
AUX VT RATIO
PH TOC FUNCTION PHASE TOC
GND TOC FUNCTION PH TOC PICKUP
NTRL TOC FUNCTION ▼

PH TOC CURVE
PH IOC1 FUNCTION
PH TOC TDM
GND IOC1 FUNCTION
NTRL IOC1 FUNCTION GROUND TOC

GROUND TOC PICKUP
▼
GROUND TOC CURVE
GROUND TOC TDM
NEUTRAL TOC
NTRL TOC PICKUP
▼
NTRL TOC CURVE
NTRL TOC TDM
PHASE IOC1
PH IOC1 PICKUP
GROUND IOC1
898788A4.cdr GND IOC1 PICKUP
NEUTRAL IOC1
NTRL IOC1 PICKUP
Quick Setup settings

The setpoints below can be programmed under the "Quick Setup" menu.
Note that monitoring of Breaker Status via 52a, 52b, or both of these contacts,, should be
programmed under SETPOINTS > SYSTEM SETUP > BREAKER.
PATH: QUICK SETUP >

CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP - FRONT CONTROL PANEL QUICK SETUP SETTINGS
PH CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1
Default: 500 A
GND CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1
Default: 50 A
VT CONNECTION
Range: Wye, Delta
Default: Wye
VT SEC VOLTAGE
Range: 50 V to 240 V in steps of 1
Default: 120 V
VT RATIO
Range: 1.0:1 to 1500.0:1 in steps of 0.1
Default: 1:1
AUX VT SECONDARY
Range: 50 V to 240 V in steps of 1
Default: 110 V
AUX VT RATIO
Range: 1.0:1 to 1500.0:1 in steps of 0.1
Default: 1:1
PH TOC FUNCTION
Range: Trip, Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm
Default: Trip
↘
PH TOC PICKUP
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
PH TOC CURVE
Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse, Definite
Time, IEC Curve A/B/C and Short, IAC Extreme/Very/Inverse/Short, User
Curve, FlexCurve™ A/B (programmable curves)
Default: Extremely Inverse
PH TOC TDM
Range: 0.05 to 50.00
Default: 1.00
GND TOC FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Alarm, Alarm
Default: Disabled
↘
GND TOC PICKUP
Default: 1.00 x CT

GND TOC CURVE

Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse; Definite
Time; IEC Curve A/B/C /Short Inverse; IAC Extreme/Very/Inverse/Short
Inverse; User Curve, FlexCurve™ A/B (programmable curves)
GND TOC TDM
Range: 0.05 to 50.00
Default: 1.00
SENS GND TOC FUNCTION [WHEN SPECIFICALLY ORDERED]
Default: Disabled
↘
SENS GND TOC PICKUP
Range: 0.005 to 3.000 x CT
Default: 1.000 x CT
SENS GND TOC CURVE
Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse; Definite
Time; IEC Curve A/B/C /Short Inverse; IAC Extreme/Very/Inverse/Short
Inverse; User Curve, FlexCurve™ A/B (programmable curves)
SENS GND TOC TDM
Range: 0.05 to 50.00
Default: 1.0
NTRL TOC FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
↘
NTRL TOC PICKUP
Default: 1.00 x CT
NTRL TOC CURVE
Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse, Definite
Time, IEC Curve A/B/C and Short, IAC Extreme/Very/Inverse/Short, User
Curve, FlexCurve™ A/B (programmable curves)
NTRL TOC TDM
Range: 0.05 to 50.00
Default: 1.00
PH IOC1 FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
↘
PH IOC1 PICKUP
Default: 1.00 x CT

CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP - FRONT CONTROL PANEL QUICK SETUP SETTINGS
GND IOC1 FUNCTION

Default: Disabled
↘
GND IOC1 PICKUP
Default: 1.00 x CT
SENS GND IOC1 FUNCTION [WHEN SPECIFICALLY ORDERED]
Default: Disabled
↘
SENS GND IOC1 PICKUP
Range: 0.005 to 3.000 x CT
Default: 1.000 x CT
NTRL IOC1 FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
↘
NTRL IOC1 PICKUP
Default: 1.00 x CT
The settings changed using the Quick Setup menu, are available for review and
NOTE:
modification by navigating through S2 SYSTEM SETUP and S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT

NOTE GROUP 1 in the SETPOINTS main menu.
menu are available for rew


GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 6: Setpoints
Setpoints
Setpoints Main Menu

The 350 has a considerable number of programmable setpoints, all of which make the
relay extremely flexible. These setpoints have been grouped into a variety of pages and
subpages as shown below. Each setpoints menu has a section that describes in detail the
setpoints found on that menu.

SETPOINTS MAIN MENU CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-1: Main Setpoints menu
SETPOINTS S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1

S1 RELAY SETUP S1 RELAY SETUP PHASE TOC
S2 SYSTEM SETUP CLOCK PHASE IOC1
S3 PROTECTION PASSWORD SECURITY PHASE IOC2
▼ COMMUNICATIONS PHASE DIR
S4 CONTROLS ▼ ▼
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS EVENT RECORDER [SENS] GROUND TOC
TRANSIENT RECDR [SENS] GROUND IOC1
FRONT PANEL [SENS] GROUND IOC2
INSTALLATION [SENS] GND DIR
NEUTRAL TOC
NEUTRAL IOC1
S2 SYSTEM SETUP NEUTRAL IOC2
CURRENT SENSING NTRL DIR
VOLTAGE SENSING NEG SEQ IOC
POWER SYSTEM NEG SEQ TOC
▼ PHASE UV
BREAKER PHASE OV
USER CURVE NEUTRAL OV
FLEXCURVE A NEGATIVE SEQ OV
FLEXCURVE B AUXILIARY UV
AUXILIARY OV
UNDER-FREQUENCY1
S3 PROTECTION UNDER-FREQUENCY2
SETPOINT GROUP 1 OVER-FREQUENCY1
VT FUSE FAILURE THERMAL MODEL
S4 CONTROLS S3 SETPOINT GROUP 2

CHANGE SEPNT GROUP PHASE TOC
VIRTUAL INPUTS PHASE IOC1
LOGIC ELEMENTS PHASE IOC2
▼ PHASE DIR
BREAKER CONTROL ▼
COLD LOAD PICKUP [SENS] GROUND TOC
BREAKER FAIL [SENS] GROUND IOC1
AUTORECLOSE [SENS] GROUND IOC2
SYNCHROCHECK [SENS] GND DIR
NEUTRAL TOC
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS NEUTRAL IOC1
CONTACT INPUTS NEUTRAL IOC2
OUTPUT RELAYS NTRL DIR
VIRTUAL INPUTS NEG SEQ IOC
NEG SEQ TOC
PHASE UV
PHASE OV
NEUTRAL OV
NEGATIVE SEQ OV
898757A4.cdr AUXILIARY UV
AUXILIARY OV
UNDER-FREQUENCY1
UNDER-FREQUENCY2
OVER-FREQUENCY1
OVER-FREQUENCY2
THERMAL MODEL

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS SETPOINTS MAIN MENU
Setpoint entry methods

Before placing the relay into “IN SERVICE” mode, setpoints defining system characteristics,
inputs, relay outputs, and protection settings must be entered using one of the following
methods:
• Front panel, using the keypad and the display.
• Front USB port, or rear RS485, Ethernet 100 FX, Ethernet 10/100 BaseT (optional) port,
and a computer running the EnerVista SR3 Setup software supplied with the relay.
• Rear serial RS485, and a SCADA system running user-written software.
Any of these methods can be used to enter the same information. A computer, however,
makes entry much easier. Files can be stored and downloaded for fast, error free entry
when a computer is used. To facilitate this process, the GE EnerVista CD with the EnerVista
SR3 Setup software is supplied with the relay.
The relay leaves the factory with setpoints programmed to default values, and these
values are shown throughout the setpoint message illustrations. Some of these factory
default values can be left unchanged whenever they satisfy the application.
At a minimum, the S2 SYSTEM SETUP setpoints must be entered for the system to function
correctly. To safeguard against the installation of a relay into which setpoints have not
been entered, the Relay Not Ready self-test warning is displayed. In addition, the critical
failure relay will be de-energized. Once the relay has been programmed for the intended
application, the S1 RELAY SETUP/ INSTALLATION/ RELAY STATUS setpoint should be changed
from “Not Ready” (the default) to “Ready”.
Common setpoints
To make the application of this device as simple as possible, similar methods of operation
and similar types of setpoints are incorporated in various features. Rather than repeat
operation descriptions for this class of setpoint throughout the manual, a general
description is presented in this overview. Details that are specific to a particular feature are
included in the discussion of the feature. The form and nature of these setpoints is
described below.
• FUNCTION setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION setpoint determines the
operational characteristic of each feature. The range for these setpoints is two or
more of: “Disabled”, “Enabled”, “Trip”, “Alarm”, “Latched Alarm”, and “Control”.
If <ELEMENT_NAME > FUNCTION: “Disabled”, the feature is not operational.
If <ELEMENT_NAME > FUNCTION: “Enabled”, the feature is operational.
If <ELEMENT_NAME > FUNCTION: “Trip”, then the feature is operational. When an
output is generated, the feature declares a Trip condition, and operates the Trip relay
(output relay 1), any other selected aux. output relays, and displays the appropriate
trip message.
If <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION: “Alarm” or “Latched Alarm”, then the feature is
operational. When an output is generated, the feature declares an “Alarm” condition
which operates any selected aux.output relays and displays the appropriate alarm
message.
If <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION: “Control” the feature is operational. When an output
is generated, the feature operates any selected output relays. The “Trip”, “Alarm”, and
“Control” function setpoint values are also used to select those operations that will be
stored in the Event Recorder.
• RELAYS (3–6) setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> RELAYS (3-6) setpoint selects the relays
required to operate when the feature generates an output. The range is any
combination of the Auxiliary relays (Auxiliary Relays 3 to 6).
• PICKUP setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> PICKUP setpoint selects the threshold above
which the measured parameter causes an output from the measuring element.

SETPOINTS MAIN MENU CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
• DELAY setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> DELAY setpoint selects a fixed time interval to
delay an input signal from appearing at the output. The time from a contact input
change of state or an AC parameter input level change to a contact closure of the 1
Trip relay, is the time selected as time delay in this setpoint plus approximately up to 2
power frequency periods.
• DIRECTION setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> DIRECTION setpoint is available for
overcurrent features which are subject to control from a directional element. The
range is “Disabled”, “Forward”, and “Reverse”. If set to “Disabled”, the element is
allowed to operate for current flow in any direction. There is no supervision from the
directional element. If set to “Forward”, the element is allowed to operate for current
flow in the forward direction only, as determined by the directional element. If set to
“Reverse”, the element is allowed to operate for current flow in the reverse direction
only, as determined by the directional element.
Logic diagrams
The logic diagrams provide a complete comprehensive understanding of the operation of
each feature. These sequential logic diagrams illustrate how each setpoint, input
parameter, and internal logic is used in the feature to obtain an output. In addition to these
logic diagrams, written descriptions are provided in the setpoints chapter which includes
each feature.
• Setpoints: Shown as a block with a heading labeled ‘SETPOINT’. The exact wording of
the displayed setpoint message identifies the setpoint. Major functional setpoint
selections are listed below the name and are incorporated in the logic.
• Compensator Blocks: Shown as a block with an inset box labeled ‘RUN’ with the
associated pickup/dropout setpoint shown directly above. Element operation of the
detector is controlled by the signal entering the ‘RUN’ inset. The measurement/
comparison can only be performed if a logic ‘1’ is provided at the ‘RUN’ input. The
relationship between setpoint and input parameter is indicated by the following
symbols: “<” (less than) " >” (greater than), etc.
• Time Delays: Shown as a block with either pickup, drop-out, or both; times in
milliseconds or seconds. If the delay is adjustable, associated delay setpoint is shown
with block SETPOINT on the top of the delay block.
• LED Indicators: Shown as the following schematic symbol, □. The exact wording of
the front panel label identifies the indicator.
• Logic: Described with basic logic gates (AND, OR, XOR, NAND, NOR). The inverter
(logical NOT), is shown as a circle: ○.
Setting text abbreviations

The following abbreviations are used in the setpoints pages.
• A: amperes
• kA: kiloamperes
• V: volts
• kV: kilovolts
• kW: kilowatts
• kVar: kilovars
• kVA: kilo-volt-amperes
• AUX: auxiliary
• COM, Comms: communications
• CT: current transformer

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS SETPOINTS MAIN MENU
• GND: ground
• Hz: Hertz
• MAX: maximum
• MIN: minimum
• SEC, s: seconds
• UV: undervoltage
• OV: overvoltage
• VT: voltage transformer
• Ctrl: control
• Hr & hr: hour
• O/L: overload

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 Relay setup
Figure 6-2: Relay Setup menu
S1 RELAY SETUP
CLOCK S1 CLOCK
PASSWORD SECURITY DATE (MM/DD/YYYY)
COMMUNICATIONS ▼
▼ TIME (HH:MM:SS)
EVENT RECORDER DLS ENABLE
TRANSIENT RECDR DLS START MONTH S1 EVENT RECORDER
FRONT PANEL DLS START WEEK PICKUP EVENTS
INSTALLATION DLS START WEEKDAY ▼
DLS END MONTH DROPOUT EVENTS
DLS END WEEK TRIP EVENTS
DLS END WEEKDAY ALARM EVENTS
IRIG-B CONTROL EVENTS
SNTP MODE CONTACT INPUTS
SNTP PORT LOGIC ELEMENTS
SNTP SERVER IP ADR VIRTUAL INPUTS
UTC OFFSET REMOTE INPUTS
PTP FUNCTION SETTING DATE/TIME
PTP STRICT POWER S1 TRANSIENT RECDR

PTP DOMAIN BUFFER SETUP
PTP VLAN PRIORITY ▼
PTP VLAN ID... TRIGGER MODE
TRIGGER POSITION
TRIGGER ON PKP
S1 ACCESS PASSWORDS
TRIGGER ON DPO
LOC SETPOINTS PSWD
TRIGGER ON TRIP
LOC CONTROLS PSWD
TRIGGER ON ALARM
TRIGGER ON INPUT 1
TRIGGER ON INPUT 2
S1 COMMUNICATIONS
TRIGGER ON INPUT 3
RS485
ETHERNET
MODBUS PROTOCOL S1 FRONT PANEL S1 FRONT PANEL*
▼ FLASH MESSAGE TIME FLASH MESSAGE TIME
IEC60870-5-103 ▼ ▼
IEC60870-5-104 MESSAGE TIMEOUT MESSAGE TIMEOUT
DNP PROTOCOL SCREEN SAVER SCREEN SAVER
61850 PROTOCOL LED BKR OPEN COLOR LED1 SOURCE
LED BKR CLSD COLOR LED2 SOURCE
LED3 SOURCE
S1 INSTALLATION LED4 SOURCE
RELAY NAME LED5 COLOR
898764A3.cdr
▼ LED5 SOURCE
RELAY STATUS LED6 COLOR
LED6 SOURCE
LED7 COLOR
LED7 SOURCE
LED8 COLOR
LED8 SOURCE
*For front panel with
programmable LEDs

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP
Clock
The 350 relay has an internal real time clock that performs time stamping for various
features such as the event and transient recorders. Time stamping on the relay is also
available with the IRIG-B signal connected to the relay terminals and set to “Enabled”.
When an IRIG-B device is connected to the relay terminals, the relay detects the DC shift or
the Amplitude Modulated signal automatically. Time stamping on multiple relays can be
synchronized to ± 1.0 ms with the use of IRIG-B input.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK
DATE: (MM/DD/YYYY)
Range: Month: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec Day: 1 to 31 Year:
2009 to 2099
Default: Jan 15 2009
This setting sets the date in the specified format.
TIME: (HH:MM:SS)
Range: 0 to 23: 0 to 59: 0 to59
Default: 03:15:50
This setting sets the time in the specified format.
DLS ENABLE
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK > DLS ENABLE [ENABLED]
DLS START MONTH:
Range: Not Set, January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September,
October, November, December
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the month for the DLS start time.
DLS START WEEK:
Range: Not Set, 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, Last
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the week of the month for the DLS start time.
DLS START WEEKDAY:
Range: Not Set, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the weekday for the DLS start time.
DLS END MONTH:
Range: Not Set, January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September,
October, November, December
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the month for the end of the DLS time.
DLS END WEEK:
Range: Not Set, 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, Last
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the week of the month for the end of the DLS time.

DLS END WEEKDAY:

Range: Not Set, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the weekday for the end of the DLS time.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK
IRIG-B:
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the IRIG-B signal for time stamp synchronization.
1. Set the IRIG-B to “Enabled” if the IRIG-B device is connected to the relay IRIG-B
terminals. The relay will display the message “IRIG-B failure” in the case of either no
IRIG-B signal from the connected IRIG-B device, or when the signal cannot be
decoded.
2. Set the date and time per the specified date and time format.
3. Set the start time of the Daylight Saving (DLS) time, by selecting the Month, the Week
of the month, and the Weekday defining the beginning of the Daylight Saving time.
4. Set the end of the Daylight Saving time, by selecting the Month, the Week of the
month, and the Weekday defining the end of the Daylight Saving time.
The clock has a super-capacitor back-up, so that time, date, and events will be kept for up
to 3 days in cases of loss of relay control power.
SNTP MODE:
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
When “Disabled” is selected for this setting, SNTP time synchronization is disabled.
SNTP PORT:
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: 0
This setting configures the port that 350 .is using.
SNTP SERVER IP ADR:
Range: Standard IP Address format
Default: 000.000.000.000
This setting must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address.
UTC OFFSET:
Range: 0.00 to 23.00
Default: 0.00
If this setting is different to zero, this value will be used to convert from UTC to local time
for SNTP synchronization.
Refer to the 350 Communications Guide for details on SNTP MODE, SNTP PORT, and SNTP
NOTE:
SERVER IP ADR.
NOTE
Real Time Clock PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK
PTP FUNCTION
Default: Enabled
When “Disabled” is selected for this setting, PTP is disabled on the port . The relay does
not generate, or listen to, PTP messages on the port.

PTP STRICT POWER PROFILE

Default: Enabled
Power profile (IEEE Std C37.238™ 2011) requires that the relay selects as a grandmaster:
• only power profile compliant clocks
• that the delivered time has a worst-case error of ±1 μs
• and, that the peer delay mechanism be implemented.
With the Strict Power Profile setting set to “Enabled”, the relay selects as the master only
clocks displaying the IEEE_C37_238 identification codes. It uses a port only when the
peer delay mechanism is operational. With the Strict Power Profile setting set to
“Disabled”, the relay uses clocks without the power profile identification when no power
profile clocks are present, and uses ports even if the peer delay mechanism is non-
operational. This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP-capable ports.
PTP DOMAIN NUMBER
Range: 0 to 255
Default: 0
The setting is set to the domain number of the grandmaster-capable clock(s) to which
they can be synchronized. A network can support multiple time distribution domains,
each distinguished with a unique domain number. More commonly, there is a single
domain using the default domain number zero. The setting applies to all of the relay’s
PTP-capable ports.
PTP VLAN PRIORITY
Range: 0 to 7
Default: 4
The setting selects the value of the priority field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request
messages issued by the relay’s peer delay mechanism. In compliance with PP (Power
Profile) the default VLAN priority is 4, but it is recommended that in accordance with PTP
it be set to 7.
Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the relay is directly linked, VLAN
Priority may have no effect.
The setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP-capable ports.
PTP VLAN ID
Range: 0 to 4095
Default: 0
The setting selects the value of the ID field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages
issued by the relay’s peer delay mechanism. It is provided in compliance with PP (Power
Profile).
As these messages have a destination address that indicates they are not to be bridged,
their VLAN ID serves no function, and so may be left at its default value. Depending on
the characteristics of the device to which the relay is directly linked, VLAN ID may have
no effect.
The setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP-capable ports
PTP EPOCH
Range: UTC since 1995, UTC since 1900, UTC since 1970, TAI since 1970
Default: UTC since 1995
The setting selects the origin of the time scale.

Password security
Password security features are designed into the relay to provide protection against
unauthorized setpoint changes and control. The relay has programmable passwords for
both Local and Remote access, which can be used to allow setpoint changes and
command execution from both the front panel and the communications ports. These
passwords consist of 3 to 10 alphanumeric characters. The Local and the Remote
passwords are initially set after entering in a Master Reset Password (MRP). The Master
Reset Password (MRP) is set to “NULL” when the relay is shipped from the factory. When the
MRP is programmed to “NULL” all password security is disabled. The remote user may
choose to allow the local user to change the local passwords.
Each interface (RS485, Ethernet, USB, and front panel keypad) is independent of one
another, meaning that enabling setpoint access on one interface does not enable access
for any of the other interfaces (i.e., the password must be explicitly entered via the
interface from which access is desired).
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software incorporates a facility for programming the relay’s
passwords as well as enabling/disabling setpoint access. For example, when an attempt is
made to modify a setpoint but access is restricted, the program will prompt the user to
enter the password and send it to the relay before the setpoint can actually be written to
the relay. If a SCADA system is used for relay programming, it is up to the programmer to
incorporate appropriate security for the application.
Aside from being logged out of security, which allows the user to read setpoints and actual
values only, three levels of security access are provided: Setpoint Level, Control Level, and
Master Level. The Setpoint and Control Levels can be attained either locally using the Local
passwords (USB port and keypad), or remotely using the Remote passwords (RS485 and
Ethernet ports). The user can have either Setpoint or Control Level active, but not both
simultaneously from the same interface. The Master Level is used for setting and resetting
of passwords, and includes all Setpoint and Control Level access rights. The Master Level
cannot be attained from the keypad. The Master Reset Password must be 8 to 10
characters in length, and must contain at least 2 letters and 2 numbers. The Master Level
can define whether the local user is permitted to change Local Passwords without having
to enter the Master Level. The Master Reset Password is encrypted, and is not viewable
from the keypad. If the Master Reset Password is lost, the user should contact the factory
to decrypt the Master Reset Password.
After password entry, the access level is maintained until a period of 5 minutes of inactivity
has elapsed, after which the password must be re-entered. A power-loss or entering in the
wrong password will log the user out of security.
Further definition of the access levels is described as follows:
SETPOINT LEVEL
• Changing settings under QUICK SETUP menu
• Changing settings under the SETPOINTS menu except the features requiring control
access listed below
• Changing any setting under MAINTENANCE such as trip and close coil monitoring and
breaker maintenance settings, except the features requiring control access listed
below
• Changing the Local or Remote Setpoint Password, depending on the interface being
accessed
CONTROL LEVEL
• Reset command
• Open and Close Breaker commands
• Virtual Input commands
• Clearing of event records, transient records, and other data
• Uploading new firmware

• Changing the Local or Remote Control Password, depending on the interface being
accessed
MASTER LEVEL
• Setting and changing of all passwords including the Master Reset Password
• Disabling password security
• All Setpoint and Control Level access rights
For details on Password Security setup and handling using the EnerVista Setup software,
refer to Chapter 3.
Access passwords This section allows the user to change the Local Setpoint and Local Control Passwords. The
local user may change a local password from the keypad if all of the following are true:
• Security is enabled
• A valid local setpoint (or local control) password has initially been set
• The remote user has the Overwrite Local Passwords setpoint set to NO
• The local user knows the current local password.
For more details on the Password Security feature, refer to Chapter 3.
Figure 6-3: Menu for handling password security using keypad
S1 PASSWORD SECURITY
LOC SETPOINTS PSWD S1 LOC SETPOINTS PSWD
LOC CONTROLS PSWD ENTER OLD PASSWORD
▼
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
CONFIRM NEW PASSWORD
S1 LOC CONTROLS PSWD

ENTER OLD PASSWORD
▼
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
898772A1.cdr CONFIRM NEW PASSWORD
The following steps describe how to change the Local Setpoints Password from the
keypad. Similar steps are followed to change the Local Control Password.
ENTER OLD PASSWORD
The user is prompted to enter the current Local Setpoints Password. User the value up/
down keys to select characters, and use the message left/right keys to move the cursor.
Press the Enter key when done. An INVALID PASSWORD message will appear if a wrong
password is entered, security is disabled, the password has not been originally set, or the
local user does not have the rights to change the password. In addition, the user will be
automatically logged out of security from the keypad. If the correct password was entered,
the user is now logged in to the Setpoints Level from the keypad, and will be prompted to
enter a new password.
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
The user is prompted to enter a new Local Setpoints Password. A valid password is
alphanumeric, and is 3 to 10 characters in length. An INVALID PASSWORD message will
appear if the new password does not meet the password requirements. If a valid password
was entered, the user will be prompted to re-enter the new password.
CONFIRM PASSWORD

The user is prompted to re-enter the new Local Setpoints Password. If the passwords do
not match, an ENTRY MISMATCH message will appear, the password will remain
unchanged, and the user will be returned to the Enter New Password page. If the
passwords match, a PASSWORD CHANGED message will appear indicating the Local
Setpoints Password has successfully been updated.
Communications
Figure 6-4: Main communications menu
S1 COMMUNICATIONS
RS485 S1 RS485
ETHERNET RS485 BAUD RATE
MODBUS PROTOCOL ▼
▼ RS485 COMM PARITY
IEC 60870-5-103 REAR 485 PROTOCOL
IEC 60870-5-104*
DNP PROTOCOL
S1 ETHERNET
61850 PROTOCOL**
IP ADDRESS
OPC-UA***
▼
SUBNET IP MASK
* Available with comms Order Code 1 GATEWAY IP ADDRESS
** Available with comms Order Code 2
*** Available with comms Order Code 4 CONNECTION TYPE
S1 MODBUS PROTOCOL
MODBUS SLAVE ADR
▼
MODBUS TCP PORT
S1 60870-5-103
GENERAL
BINARY INPUTS
MEASURANDS
▼
COMMANDS
S1 60870-5-104
GENERAL
CLIENT ADDRESS
POINT LIST
S1 DNP
DNP GENERAL
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
DEFAULT VARIATION
▼
DNP CLIENT ADDRESS
DNP POINTS LIST
S1 61850 GOOSE
ENABLE GOOSE
898766A2.cdr ▼
ENABLE GOOSE Tx

RS485 interface The 350 is equipped with one serial RS485 communication port. The RS485 port has
settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that these parameters agree with the
settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. This
port may be connected to a computer running the EnerVista SR3 Setup software. This
software can download and upload setting files, view measured parameters, and upgrade
the device firmware. A maximum of 32 350 -series devices can be daisy-chained and
connected to a DCS, PLC, or PC using the RS485 port.
Select the Settings > Communications > Serial Ports menu item in the EnerVista SR3
Setup program, or the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > RS485 path on
the display, to configure the serial port.
Figure 6-5: Serial port configuration settings
The following settings are available to configure the RS485 port.

BAUD RATE
Range: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
Default: 115200
This setting specifies the baud rate (bits per second) for the RS485 port.
PARITY
Range: None, Odd, Even
Default: None
This setting specifies the parity for the RS485 port.
Ethernet Select the Setpoints > S1 Relay Setup > Communications > Ethernet menu item in the
EnerVista SR3 Setup program, or the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS >
ETHERNET path on the display, to configure the Ethernet port.
The following settings are available to configure the Ethernet port.
IP Address
Default: 000.000.000.000
This setting specifies the IP Address for the Ethernet port.
Subnet IP Mask
Default: 255.255.252.0
This setting specifies the Subnet IP Mask setting for the Ethernet port.
Gateway IP Address
Default: 000.000.000.000
This setting specifies the Gateway IP Address for the Ethernet port.
Connection Type
Range: Copper, fiber
Default: Copper
This setting specifies the connection type (Copper or Fiber) used for Ethernet
communication.

When changing Ethernet settings, power to the relay must be cycled in order for the new
NOTE:
settings to become active.

NOTE
Redundancy
The setting determines if ports A and B operate in redundant or independant mode.
In non-redundant mode (REDUNDANCY set to NONE), port A operates independently with
their own MAC, IP address, mask and gateway and no communication on Port B.
If REDUNDANCY is set to PRP or HSR, the operation of port A and B will be as follows:
• Port A and B will use port A MAC address, mask and gateway.
• Port A MCST ADDRESS field will be visible.
For this setting change to take effect, a reboot is required.
Path: Setpoints > S1 Relay Setup > Communications > Ethernet > Redundancy
REDUNDANCY MODE
Range: Independent, PRP, HSR, Daisy Chain
Default: Independent
The setting selects the mode in which the Ethernet ports will work.
Modbus The Modicon Modbus protocol is supported by the 350 . Modbus is available via the RS485
serial link (Modbus RTU). The 350 always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never
initiates communications; it only listens and responds to requests issued by a master
device. A subset of the Modbus protocol format is supported that allows extensive
monitoring, programming, and control functions using read and write register
commands.Refer to the 350 Feeder Protection System Communications Guide for
additional details on the Modbus protocol and the Modbus memory map.
The Modbus server can simultaneously support two clients over serial RS485. The server is
capable of reporting any indication or measurement and operating any output present in
the device. A user-configurable input and output map is also implemented.
The 350 operates as a Modbus slave device only
Select the Settings > Communications > Modbus > Protocol menu item in EnerVista SR3
Setup software, or the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > MODBUS
PROTOCOL path to set up the modbus protocol as shown below.
Figure 6-6: Modbus protocol configuration settings
The following Modbus settings are available:

MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS
Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1
Default: 254
This setting specifies the Modbus slave address . Each device must have a unique
address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address to which all Modbus slave
devices listen. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the
same address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to
the link should use the next higher address starting at 1.
Please refer to the 350 Communications Guide for details on how to set up the Modbus
communications protocol.

IEC 60870-5-103 serial Figure 6-7: IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication menu
communication
S1 60870-5-103
GENERAL S1 103 GENERAL
BINARY INPUTS SLAVE ADDRESS
MEASURANDS ▼
▼ SYNCH TIMEOUT
COMMANDS
S1 103 FIRST ASDU
S1 103 B INPUTS ID TYPE
POINT 0 ▼
▼ FUNCTION TYPE
POINT 0 FUNC TYPE INFORMATION NO
POINT 0 INFO NO SCAN TIMEOUT
... FIRST ANLG ENTRY
POINT 63 FIRST ANLG FACTOR
POINT 63FUNC TYPE FIRST ANLG OFFSET
POINT 63 INFO NO ...
NINTH ANLG ENTRY
NINTH ANLG FACTOR
S1 103 MEASURANDS NINTH ANLG OFFSET
FIRST ASDU .
SECOND ASDU .
THIRD ASDU .
.
▼
FOURTH ASDU S1 103 FOURTH ASDU
ID TYPE
▼
S1 103 B COMMANDS FUNCTION TYPE
CMD 0 FUNC TYPE INFORMATION NO
▼ SCAN TIMEOUT
CMD 0 INFO NO FIRST ANLG ENTRY
CMD 0 ON OPER FIRST ANLG FACTOR
CMD 0 OFF OPER FIRST ANLG OFFSET
... ...
CMD 15 FUNC TYPE NINTH ANLG ENTRY
CMD 15 INFO NO NINTH ANLG FACTOR
CMD 15 ON OPER NINTH ANLG OFFSET
898770A1.cdr CMD 15 OFF OPER
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > IEC61870-5-103

The following table, from the 350 Communications Guide, shows the list of Binary Inputs.

FC134B unsigned 16 bits DNP Binary Inputs
0 Off






0x8002 Any Trip
0x84C2 LE 1 Trip OP
0x8502 LE 2 Trip OP
0x8542 LE 3 Trip OP
0x8582 LE 4 Trip OP
0x85C2 LE 5 Trip OP
0x8602 LE 6 Trip OP
0x8642 LE 7 Trip OP
0x8682 LE 8 Trip OP




0x9502 Aux UV Trip OP


0x98D2 Ph B UV2 Trip OP
0x9C02 LE 9 Trip OP
0xA002 Any Alarm


0xA042 Therm Lvl Alrm OP
0xA044 Therm Lvl Alrm DPO


0xAE42 CLP Alarm OP






0xC4C1 LE 1 PKP


0xC4C2 LE 1 OP
0xC4C4 LE 1 DPO
0xC501 LE 2 PKP
0xC502 LE 2 OP
0xC504 LE 2 DPO
0xC541 LE 3 PKP
0xC542 LE 3 OP
0xC544 LE 3 DPO
0xC581 LE 4 PKP
0xC582 LE 4 OP
0xC584 LE 4 DPO
0xC5C1 LE 5 PKP
0xC5C2 LE 5 OP
0xC5C4 LE 5 DPO
0xC601 LE 6 PKP
0xC602 LE 6 OP
0xC604 LE 6 DPO
0xC641 LE 7 PKP
0xC642 LE 7 OP
0xC644 LE 7 DPO
0xC681 LE 8 PKP
0xC682 LE 8 OP
0xC684 LE 8 DPO
0xC902 Open Breaker
0xCA82 Reset OK
0xCB01 AR Close PKP
0xCB02 AR Close
0xCB04 AR Close DPO
0xCB42 AR N/Ready
0xCB81 AR In Progress PKP
0xCB84 AR In Progress DPO
0xCBC1 AR Disabled PKP
0xCBC2 AR Disabled
0xCBC4 AR Disabled DPO
0xCC02 AR Ext. Init
0xCC41 AR Ready PKP
0xCC42 AR Ready
0xCC44 AR Ready DPO


0xCE41 CLP PKP
0xCE42 CLP Op
0xCE44 CLP DPO
0xD802 NSeq TOC1 OP
0xDC01 LE 9 PKP
0xDC02 LE 9 OP
0xDC04 LE 9 DPO
0xDC41 LE 10 PKP
0xDC42 LE 10 OP
0xDC44 LE 10 DPO
0xDC81 LE 11 PKP
0xDC82 LE 11 OP
0xDC84 LE 11 DPO
0xDCC1 LE 12 PKP
0xDCC2 LE 12 OP
0xDCC4 LE 12 DPO
0xDD01 LE 13 PKP
0xDD02 LE 13 OP
0xDD04 LE 13 DPO
0xDD41 LE 14 PKP
0xDD42 LE 14 OP
0xDD44 LE 14 DPO
0xDD81 LE 15 PKP
0xDD82 LE 15 OP
0xDD84 LE 15 DPO
0xDDC1 LE 16 PKP
0xDDC2 LE 16 OP
0xDDC4 LE 16 DPO
0xDE02 PhDir Rev OP


0xDE42 PhDir Und OP
0xE002 Any Block
0xEB02 AR Block
0xF442 Ph OV1 Block


0xF482 Ph UV1 Block
0xF4C2 Aux OV Block
0xF502 Aux UV Block

IEC60870-5-104 Figure 6-8: IEC 60870-5-104 protocol menu

protocol
S1 60870-5-104
GENERAL S1 104 GENERAL
CLIENT ADDRESS FUNCTION
POINT LIST ▼
TCP PORT
SLAVE ADDRESS
CYCLIC DATA PERIOD 104 BINARY INPUTS
TCP CONN. TIMEOUT POINT 0
OBJ INFO ADDR BIN ▼
OBJ INFO ADDR ALOG POINT 1
OBJ INFO ADDR CNTR ...
OBJ INFO ADDR CMD POINT 63
S1 104 CLIENT ADDRESS 104 ANALOG INPUTS

CLIENT ADDRESS 1 POINT 0 ENTRY
▼ ▼
CLIENT ADDRESS 2 POINT 0 SCALE FCTR
... POINT 0 DEADBAND
.
CLIENT ADDRESS 5 ... .
.
POINT 31 ENTRY
.
POINT 31 SCALE FCTR
S1 104 POINT LIST POINT 31 DEADBAND
BINARY INPUTS
ANALOG INPUTS
BINARY OUTPUTS 104 BINARY OUTPUTS
POINT 0 ON
▼
POINT 0 OFF
... .
898794A1.cdr .
POINT 15 ON
.
POINT 15 OFF
.

DNP communication Figure 6-9: DNP communication menu
S1 DNP
DNP GENERAL S1 DNP GENERAL
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE* DNP ADDRESS
DEFAULT VARIATION ▼
▼ DNP TCP/UDP PORT
DNP CLIENT ADDRESS* CHANNEL 1 PORT
DNP POINTS LIST CHANNEL 2 PORT
TME SYNC IIN PER.
* Ethernet only
DNP MSG FRAG SIZE
DNP TCP CONN. T/O
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE*

FUNCTION POINT 0
▼ ▼
TIMEOUT POINT 1
MAX RETRIES POINT 2
DEST ADDRESS ...
POINT 63
DEFAULT VARIATION
DNP OBJECT 1 POINT 0 ON
▼ ▼
DNP OBJECT 2 POINT 0 OFF
DNP OBJECT 22 ...
DNP OBJECT 32
POINT 0 ENTRY
▼
DNP CLIENT ADDRESS*
POINT 1 ENTRY
CLIENT ADDRESS 1
POINT 2 ENTRY
▼
...
CLIENT ADDRESS 2
POINT 31 ENTRY
CLIENT ADDRESS 3
CLIENT ADDRESS 4
CLIENT ADDRESS 5
S1 DNP POINTS LIST

BINARY INPUTS
BINARY OUTPUTS
898769A1.cdr
ANALOG INPUTS
PATH: SETPOINTS > RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > DNP PROTOCOL > DNP GENERAL
The following table, from the 350 Communications Guide, shows the list of DNP Binary
Inputs.


FC134B unsigned 16 bits DNP Binary Inputs
0 Off




0x8002 Any Trip
0x84C2 LE 1 Trip OP
0x8502 LE 2 Trip OP
0x8542 LE 3 Trip OP
0x8582 LE 4 Trip OP


0x85C2 LE 5 Trip OP
0x8602 LE 6 Trip OP
0x8642 LE 7 Trip OP
0x8682 LE 8 Trip OP




0x9502 Aux UV Trip OP
0x98D2 Ph B UV2 Trip OP
0x9C02 LE 9 Trip OP


0xA002 Any Alarm
0xA042 Therm Lvl Alrm OP
0xA044 Therm Lvl Alrm DPO


0xAE42 CLP Alarm OP








0xC4C1 LE 1 PKP
0xC4C2 LE 1 OP
0xC4C4 LE 1 DPO
0xC501 LE 2 PKP
0xC502 LE 2 OP
0xC504 LE 2 DPO
0xC541 LE 3 PKP
0xC542 LE 3 OP
0xC544 LE 3 DPO
0xC581 LE 4 PKP
0xC582 LE 4 OP
0xC584 LE 4 DPO
0xC5C1 LE 5 PKP
0xC5C2 LE 5 OP
0xC5C4 LE 5 DPO
0xC601 LE 6 PKP
0xC602 LE 6 OP
0xC604 LE 6 DPO
0xC641 LE 7 PKP
0xC642 LE 7 OP
0xC644 LE 7 DPO
0xC681 LE 8 PKP
0xC682 LE 8 OP
0xC684 LE 8 DPO
0xC902 Open Breaker
0xCA82 Reset OK
0xCB01 AR Close PKP
0xCB02 AR Close
0xCB04 AR Close DPO
0xCB42 AR N/Ready


0xCB81 AR In Progress PKP
0xCB84 AR In Progress DPO
0xCBC1 AR Disabled PKP
0xCBC2 AR Disabled
0xCBC4 AR Disabled DPO
0xCC02 AR Ext. Init
0xCC41 AR Ready PKP
0xCC42 AR Ready
0xCC44 AR Ready DPO
0xCE41 CLP PKP
0xCE42 CLP Op
0xCE44 CLP DPO
0xD802 NSeq TOC1 OP
0xDC01 LE 9 PKP
0xDC02 LE 9 OP
0xDC04 LE 9 DPO
0xDC41 LE 10 PKP
0xDC42 LE 10 OP
0xDC44 LE 10 DPO
0xDC81 LE 11 PKP
0xDC82 LE 11 OP
0xDC84 LE 11 DPO
0xDCC1 LE 12 PKP
0xDCC2 LE 12 OP
0xDCC4 LE 12 DPO
0xDD01 LE 13 PKP
0xDD02 LE 13 OP
0xDD04 LE 13 DPO
0xDD41 LE 14 PKP
0xDD42 LE 14 OP
0xDD44 LE 14 DPO
0xDD81 LE 15 PKP
0xDD82 LE 15 OP
0xDD84 LE 15 DPO
0xDDC1 LE 16 PKP


0xDDC2 LE 16 OP
0xDDC4 LE 16 DPO
0xDE02 PhDir Rev OP
0xDE42 PhDir Und OP
0xE002 Any Block
0xEB02 AR Block


0xF442 Ph OV1 Block
0xF482 Ph UV1 Block
0xF4C2 Aux OV Block
0xF502 Aux UV Block
SR3 IEC 61850 GOOSE The 350 firmware supports IEC61850 GOOSE communications on the optional
details communications daughter board.
Portions of the IEC61850 standard not pertaining to GOOSE, are not implemented in the
350 relay.
The 350 relay does not support
• Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) standard ISO/IEC 9506
• the mapping of analogue values to data points in data sets in either the transmit or
receive direction
• a file system to maintain SCL, ICD or CID files, for IEC61850 GOOSE. As such the
implementation stores GOOSE configuration using MODBUS set points.
Configuration of transmission and reception settings for the GOOSE feature are performed
using EnerVista SR3 Setup software.

The 350 firmware accepts GOOSE messages from UR, F650 and UR Plus. The
interoperability with other manufacturers will be guaranteed in almost all cases, by
implementing the reception side with nested structures (one level of nesting) and all the
standard data types.
GOOSE settings changes will take effect only after the 350 relay is re-booted. One setting is
available to Enable/Disable both Transmission and Reception. It is possible to change this
setting from the Front Panel of the relay.
Figure 6-10: EnerVista SR3 GOOSE General Settings
OPC–UA Settings OPCUA Enable

Default: Disabled
The OPCUA Enable setting is only for a relay with a communications Order Code 4.
In this case only, the OPC-UA and the IEC61850 protocol do not run simultaneously. If
IEC61850 is running by default but it is desired to use OPC-UA instead, the user must put
the OPCUA Enable setting to Enabled. Then, the relay must be rebooted. This will run the
OPC-UA instead of the IEC61850.
In SR350 with communications Order Code 5, this setting is not visible and both protocols
run simultaneously.
Event recorder
The Event Recorder runs continuously, capturing and storing the last 256 events. All events
are stored in a non-volatile memory where the information is maintained for up to 3 days
in case of lost relay control power.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > EVENT RECORDER

PICKUP EVENTS
Default: Enabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the events that occur when a
protection element picks up.
DROPOUT EVENTS
Default: Disabled
When set to “Enabled” the event recorder records the dropout state of a protection
element.
TRIP EVENTS
Default: Enabled
The trip events include all programmed relay elements set to trip the breaker. The text
“TRIP” followed by the name of the operated element is recorded.
ALARM EVENTS
Default: Enabled
These events include the elements programmed as an “ALARM” or “LATCHED ALARM”
function, which detect power system conditions considered as an alarm.
CONTROL EVENTS
Default: Enabled
If set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records events caused by the performance of the
programmed control elements.
CONTACT INPUTS
Default: Enabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder will record the event, when a contact input
changes its state.
LOGIC ELEMENT
Default: Enabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the events, which occur upon state
change of any programmed remote input.
VIRTUAL INPUTS
Default: Enabled
changes of any logic element.
REMOTE INPUTS
Default: Enabled
change of any programmed remote input.

Transient recorder
The Transient Recorder contains waveforms captured at the same sampling rate as the
other relay data at the point of trigger. By default, data is captured for the analog current
and voltage inputs - Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Va, Vb, Vc, and Vx when relay is ordered with CTs and VTs,
or only analog current inputs Ia, Ib, Ic, and Ig when relay is ordered without VTs. Triggering
of the transient recorder occurs, when an event is detected, causing a pickup, trip, dropout,
or alarm, any one of which has been "Enabled" to activate the trigger. The transient
recorder trigger may also be activated when any of the selected trigger inputs 1 to 3 is
detected as having “On” status.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > TRANSIENT RECDR
BUFFER SETUP
Range: 1 x 192, 3 x 64, 6 x 32
Default: 1 x 192
Each selection from the range is expressed by two numbers; the first identifies the
number of records, whereas the second stands for the number of cycles per record.
TRIGGER MODE
Range: Overwrite, Protected
Default: Overwrite
When the “Overwrite” setting is selected, the new records overwrite the old ones,
meaning the relay will always keep the newest records. In “Protected” mode, the relay
will keep the number of records corresponding to the selected number, only without
overwriting.
TRIGGER POSITION
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1%
Default: 16%
This setting indicates the location of the trigger with respect to the selected length of
record. For example at 20% selected trigger position, the length of each record will be
split on 20% pre-trigger data, and 80% post-trigger data.
TRIGGER ON PKP
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon Pickup condition
detected from any protection or control element.
TRIGGER ON DPO
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon a Dropout condition
TRIGGER ON TRIP
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon Trip condition

TRIGGER ON ALARM
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon Alarm condition
TRIGGER ON INPUT 1 to 3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Selection of input or logic element from the settings range enables triggering input for
the recorder. A record will be triggered if the status of the selected input changes to “On”.
Front panel with non-programmable LEDs

The user can send a message to the display, that will override any normal message by
sending text through Modbus. Refer to the 350 Feeder Protection System Communications
Guide for register details.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > FRONT PANEL
FLASH MESSAGE TIME
Range: 1 s to 65535 s
Default: 5 s
Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for
several seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These
messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the
display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.
MESSAGE TIMEOUT
Default: 30 s
If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default
message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on
the screen long enough during programming or reading of actual values.
SCREEN SAVER
Range: Off, 1 min to 10000 min
Default: Off
The life of the LCD backlight can be prolonged by enabling the Screen Saver mode.
If the keypad is inactive for the selected period of time, the relay automatically shuts off
the LCD screen. Any activity (keypress, alarm, trip, or target message) will restore screen
messages.
LED BKR OPEN COLOR
Range: Red, Green, Orange
Default: Green
Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator under Breaker Open conditions.
LED BKR CLSD COLOR
Range: Red, Green, Orange
Default: Green
Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator under Breaker Closed conditions.

Front panel with programmable LEDs

The front panel with programmable LEDs provides LEDs with programmable source (LED1
through LED4) and additional LEDs with programmable source and color (LED5 through
LED8). By default these eight programmable LEDs are Off. Programmable LEDs can be
configured using the keypad or the Enervista SR3 Setup software as described in Chapter 3
- Software Setup.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > FRONT PANEL
FLASH MESSAGE TIME
Default: 5 s
Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for
several seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These
messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the
display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.
MESSAGE TIMEOUT
Default: 30 s
If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default
message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on
the screen long enough during programming or reading of actual values.
SCREEN SAVER
Range: Off, 1 min to 10000 min
Default: Off
The life of the LCD backlight can be prolonged by enabling the Screen Saver mode.
If the keypad is inactive for the selected period of time, the relay automatically shuts off
the LCD screen. Any activity (keypress, alarm, trip, or target message) will restore screen
messages.
LED1 SOURCE
Range: DNP binary input
Default: Off
Allows the user to select the signal source of the LED1.
LED2 SOURCE
Default: Off
LED3 SOURCE
Default: Off
LED4 SOURCE
Default: Off

LED5 COLOR
Range: Red, Orange, Green
Default: Orange
Allows the user to select the color of the LED5.
LED5 SOURCE
Default: Off
LED6 COLOR
Default: Orange
LED6 SOURCE
Default: Off
LED7 COLOR
Default: Orange
LED7 SOURCE
Default: Off
LED8 COLOR
Default: Orange
LED8 SOURCE
Default: Off
Installation
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > INSTALLATION
RELAY NAME
Range: Feeder Name, Alpha-numeric (18 characters)
Default: Feeder Name
The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will
appear on generated reports. This name is also used to identify specific devices which
are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the communications channel.
RELAY STATUS
Range: Not Ready, Ready
Default: Not Ready
Allows the user to activate/deactivate the relay. The relay is not operational when set to
"Not Ready."

S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S2 System Setup
Figure 6-11: Main system setup menu
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
CURRENT SENSING S2 CURRENT SENSING
VOLTAGE SENSING PHASE CT PRIMARY
POWER SYSTEM ▼
▼ PHASE CT SECONDARY
BREAKER [SENS] GROUND CT TYPE
USER CURVE [SENS] GROUND CT PRIMARY
FLEXCURVE A
FLEXCURVE B
S2 VOLTAGE SENSING
VT CONNECTION
▼
VT SECONDARY
VT RATIO
AUX VT INPUT
AUX VT SECONDARY
AUX VT RATIO
S2 POWER SYSTEM
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
▼
SYSTEM ROTATION
S2 BREAKER SETUP
52a CONTACT
▼
52b CONTACT
BKR CONNECTED
Program using Program using Program using

898765A2.cdr
EnerVista Software EnerVista Software EnerVista Software
Current sensing
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > CURRENT SENSING
PHASE CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 6000 A
Default: 500 A
Enter the primary rating of the three-phase feeder CTs wired to the relay phase CT
terminals (see above). For correct operation, the relay CT tap must match the feeder CT
tap (5 A or 1 A).
As the phase CTs are connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three
phase currents (Ia + Ib + Ic = Neutral Current = 3I0) is used as the input for the neutral
overcurrent. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of
the circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be
used.

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP
PHASE CT SECONDARY
Range: 1 A or 5 A
Default: 5 A
Configurable 1 A or 5 A secondary, available with Phase Current option ‘P0’ installed.
Enter the rated phase CT secondary current of the three-phase current transformers.
GROUND [SENS GND] CT PRIMARY
Range: [1 A to 600 A] 1 A to 6000 A
Default: 50 A
For the above configuration, the ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detect
low level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input may be used. In this case, the
sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. The Sens GND CT primary range is
1 A to 600 A
The relay phase and ground CT types (5 A, 1 A) must match the feeder phase and ground
CT taps.
GROUND [SENS GND] CT TYPE
Range: 1 A or 5 A
Default: 5 A
Configurable 1 A or 5 A secondary, available with Ground Current option ‘G0’ installed.
Enter the rated ground CT secondary current of the ground current transformer.
Voltage sensing
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > VOLTAGE SENSING
VT CONNECTION
Range: Wye, Delta
Default: Wye
The 350 provides three-phase VT inputs, that can be wired to either bus VTs or feeder
VTs. Select the “Wye” connection, if phase-neutral voltages are wired to the relay VT
terminals. Select “Delta” connection, if phase-phase voltages from either Delta or Open
Delta VTs are connected to the three-phase VT terminals. See the VT connections per the
Typical Wiring Diagram in Chapter 2.
VT SECONDARY
Range: 50 V to 240 V
Default: 120 V
This setting defines the voltage across the VT secondary winding when nominal voltage
is applied to the primary. On a source of 13.8kV line-line voltage, with a VT ratio of
14400:120 V delta connection, the voltage to be entered is “115 V”. For a Wye
connection, the voltage to be entered is 115/ √3 = 66 V.
VT RATIO
Range: 1.0:1 to 1500.0:1
Default: 1.0:1
This setting defines the VT primary to secondary turns ratio. For a 14400: 120 VT, the
entry would be “120.0:1” (14400/120 = 120).

S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
AUX VT INPUT
Range: Vab VT, Vbc VT, Vca VT, Van VT, Vbn VT, Vcn VT
Default: Vab VT
The 350 relay provides a voltage input (AUX VT INPUT), where a single feeder/line VT can
be connected. The aux. VT voltage can be used for setting up auxiliary under- and over-
voltage feeder protection, as well as one of the voltage inputs for the synchrocheck
function. Select the phase-neutral, or the phase-phase voltage connected to the Aux VT
input terminals.
AUX VT SECONDARY
Range: 50 V to 240 V
Default: 110 V
This setting defines the voltage across the VT secondary winding when nominal voltage
is applied to the primary. On a source of 13.8kV line-line voltage, with a VT ratio of
14400:120 V delta connection, the voltage to be entered is “115 V”. For a Wye
connection, the voltage to be entered is 115/√3 = 66 V.
AUX VT RATIO
Range: 1.0:1 to 1500.0:1
Default: 1.0:1
This setting defines the VT primary to secondary turns ratio. For a 14400: 120 VT, the
entry would be “120.0:1” (14400/120 = 120).
The 350 relay can be applied to both metering and protection feeders with up to 65 kV
NOTE:
phase-to-phase voltage. Please ensure that the selected VT ratio and VT secondary do not
NOTE result in a primary voltage exceeding 65 kV.
Power system
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > POWER SYSTEM
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
Range: 60 Hz, 50 Hz
Default: 60 Hz
Enter the nominal power system frequency. This value is used as a default to set the
optimal digital sampling rate.
SYSTEM ROTATION
Range: ABC, ACB,
Default: ABC
Enter the phase sequence of the power system.
Breaker
The status of the feeder breaker is monitored by the 350 relay using the status of either
one or two contact inputs named 52a (CI#1) and 52b (CI#2) wired to the breaker auxiliary
contacts 52a and 52b respectively (see below).
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > BREAKER
52a CONTACT
Range: Disabled, 52a (CI#1)
Default: Disabled
Select contact input 52a (CI#1) if connected to breaker auxiliary contact 52a.

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP
52b CONTACT
Range: Disabled, 52b (CI#2)
Default: Disabled
Select contact input 52b (CI#2) if connected to breaker auxiliary contact 52b.
BKR CONNECTED
Range: Contact Input 3 to 10, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Select a contact input to show whether the breaker is connected (Racked-in, or
disconnect switches switched-on), or disconnected (racked-out, or disconnect switches
switched-off) to the system.
It is highly recommended to monitor the status of the feeder breaker using both breaker
NOTE:
auxiliary contacts 52a, and 52b, however using only one of them is also acceptable.
NOTE
The breaker status when disconnected from the main power circuit, such by drawout
breaker racking mechanism, or isolated by the associated disconnect switches on a fixed
circuit breaker, is provided by monitoring the contact input setting for “BKR
CONNECTED”.The logic for Breaker Open, and Breaker Close status is shown in the table
below:
Table 6-1: Breaker open / Breaker closed status logic
52a contact 52b contact Breaker status
configured configured
Open Close
Yes Yes 52a contact open 52a contact closed
52b contact closed 52b contact open
Yes No 52a contact open 52a contact closed
No Yes 52b contact closed 52b contact open
No No Status unknown
If the contact input selected under BKR CONNECTED setting is asserted, the breaker is
considered connected to the primary system. When the breaker is determined
disconnected, the breaker state is shown to be neither open, nor closed.
Table 6-2: Breaker status with both contacts configured
52a contact status 52b contact status Breaker status
Off On open
On Off closed
On On BKR status failure
Off Off BKR status failure
User curve
There is one user-programmable User Curve available with the 350 system. Refer to the S3
Protection/Current Elements/TOC Curves section for details on how to set the User Curve.
Due to the complexity of the configuration, the User Curve is available only through the
EnerVista SR3 Setup program.
FlexCurves
There are two user-programmable FlexCurves™ available with the 350 system, labeled A
and B.
For details on FlexCurves please refer to S3 Protection/Current Elements/TOC Curves in this
manual.

S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
The User Curve and Flexcurves A and B are available for programming under EnerVista
NOTE:
SR3 Setup software.

NOTE
The following Flexcurve A diagram: Example user-programmed curve shows a user-
programmed IEC Short Inverse curve. The curve in this example was obtained by choosing
the IEC Short Inverse option from the Select Curve setting in the FlexCurve A screen. The
resulting curve can be modified if desired by moving the graph plot points.
Figure 6-12: Example user-programmed curve
S3 Protection
The 350 protection elements are organized in two identical setpoint groups: Setpoint
Group 1 and Setpoint Group 2.
Each Setpoint Group has the same protection functions, depending on the relay order
code. These protection functions include:
• Phase Timed Overcurrent (Phase TOC)
• Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (Phase IOC1, Phase IOC2)
• Phase Directional (Phase Dir)

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION
• Ground Timed Overcurrent (Ground TOC)

• Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (Ground IOC1, Ground IOC2)
• Ground Directional(Ground Dir)
• Sensitive Ground Timed Overcurrent (Sens Ground TOC)
• Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (Sens Ground IOC1, Sens Ground IOC2)
• Sensitive Ground Directional (Sens Ground Dir)
• Neutral Timed Overcurrent (Neutral TOC)
• Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent (Neutral IOC1, Neutral IOC2)
• Neutral Directional (Neutral Dir)
• Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent (Neg Seq IOC)
• Negative Sequence Timed Overcurrent (Neg Seq TOC)
• Phase Undervoltage (Phase UV)
• Phase Overvoltage (Phase OV)
• Neutral Overvoltage (Neutral OV)
• Negative Sequence Overvoltage (Negative Seq OV)
• Auxiliary Undervoltage (Auxiliary UV)
• Auxiliary Overvoltage (Auxiliary OV)
• Underfrequency 1, Underfrequency 2
• Overfrequency 1, Overfrequency 2
• Thermal Model
• VT Fuse Fail

Figure 6-13: Main protection menu
SETPOINTS S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1

S1 RELAY SETUP S1 RELAY SETUP PHASE TOC
S2 SYSTEM SETUP CLOCK PHASE IOC1
S3 PROTECTION PASSWORD SECURITY PHASE IOC2
▼ COMMUNICATIONS PHASE DIR
S4 CONTROLS ▼ ▼
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS EVENT RECORDER [SENS] GROUND TOC
TRANSIENT RECDR [SENS] GROUND IOC1
FRONT PANEL [SENS] GROUND IOC2
INSTALLATION [SENS] GND DIR
NEUTRAL TOC
NEUTRAL IOC1
S2 SYSTEM SETUP NEUTRAL IOC2
CURRENT SENSING NTRL DIR
VOLTAGE SENSING NEG SEQ IOC
POWER SYSTEM NEG SEQ TOC
▼ PHASE UV
BREAKER PHASE OV
USER CURVE NEUTRAL OV
FLEXCURVE A NEGATIVE SEQ OV
FLEXCURVE B AUXILIARY UV
AUXILIARY OV
UNDER-FREQUENCY1
S3 PROTECTION UNDER-FREQUENCY2
VT FUSE FAILURE THERMAL MODEL
S4 CONTROLS S3 SETPOINT GROUP 2

CHANGE SEPNT GROUP PHASE TOC
VIRTUAL INPUTS PHASE IOC1
LOGIC ELEMENTS PHASE IOC2
▼ PHASE DIR
BREAKER CONTROL ▼
COLD LOAD PICKUP [SENS] GROUND TOC
BREAKER FAIL [SENS] GROUND IOC1
AUTORECLOSE [SENS] GROUND IOC2
SYNCHROCHECK [SENS] GND DIR
NEUTRAL TOC
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS NEUTRAL IOC1
CONTACT INPUTS NEUTRAL IOC2
OUTPUT RELAYS NTRL DIR
VIRTUAL INPUTS NEG SEQ IOC
NEG SEQ TOC
PHASE UV
PHASE OV
NEUTRAL OV
NEGATIVE SEQ OV
898757A4.cdr AUXILIARY UV
AUXILIARY OV
UNDER-FREQUENCY1
UNDER-FREQUENCY2
OVER-FREQUENCY1
OVER-FREQUENCY2
THERMAL MODEL

S3 PROTECTION
6–61
S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1
PHASE TOC S3 PHASE TOC
PHASE IOC1 PH TOC FUNCTION
S3 PHASE IOC1/2
PHASE IOC2 ▼
PH IOC1/2 FUNCTION
PHASE DIR PHASE DIR PH TOC PKP
▼
▼ PH DIR FUNCTION PH TOC CURVE
PH IOC1/2 PKP
GROUND TOC ▼ PH TOC TDM
PH IOC1/2 DELAY
GROUND IOC1 PH DIR MTA PH TOC RESET
PH IOC DIRECTION
GROUND IOC2 MIN POL VOLTAGE PH TOC DIRECTION
OUTPUT RELAY 3
GROUND DIR OC BLK OC DIR UN OUTPUT RELAY 3
...
NEUTRAL TOC OUTPUT RELAY 3 ...
S3 NEUTRAL TOC OUTPUT RELAY 6
NEUTRAL IOC1 ... OUTPUT RELAY 6
NTRL TOC FUNCTION BLOCK 1
NEUTRAL IOC2 OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1
▼ BLOCK 2
NEUTRAL DIR OC BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2
NEUTRAL TOC PKP BLOCK 3
NEGATIVE SEQ IOC BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3
NEGATIVE SEQ TOC NEUTRAL TOC CURVE BLOCK 3
PHASE UV NEUTRAL TOC TDM
S3 GROUND TOC
PHASE OV NEUTRAL TOC RESET
S3 GROUND IOC1/2 GND TOC FUNCTION
NEUTRAL OV NEUTRAL TOC DIRECTION
Figure 6-14: Current Elements menu
S3 GND DIRECTIONAL GND IOC1/2 FUNCTION ▼

AUXILIARY UV OUTPUT RELAY 3
GND DIR FUNCTION GND TOC PKP
AUXILIARY OV ... ▼
GND IOC1/2 PKP GND TOC CURVE
NEGATIVE SEQ OV OUTPUT RELAY 6 ▼
GND DIR MTA GND IOC1/2 DELAY GND TOC TDM
UNDER-FREQUENCY1 BLOCK 1
MIN POL VOLTAGE GND IOC DIRECTION GND TOC RESET
UNDER-FREQUENCY2 BLOCK 2
BLK OC DIR UN OUTPUT RELAY 3 GND TOC DIRECTION
OVER-FREQUENCY1 BLOCK 3
OUTPUT RELAY 3 ... OUTPUT RELAY 3
OVER-FREQUENCY2
...
350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

THERMAL MODEL ... OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 1
DESCRIPTION
Current elements
BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 BLOCK 2

BLOCK 3 BLOCK 3
S3 THERMAL MODEL S3 NEGATIVE SEQ TOC S3 NTRL DIRECTIONAL
THERMAL MDL FUNC NEG SEQ TOC FUNCTN NTRL DIR FUNCTION S3 NEUTRAL IOC1/2
▼ ▼ S3 NEGATIVE SEQ IOC ▼ NTRL IOC1/2 FUNCTION
THERMAL MDL PKP NEG SEQ TOC PKP NEGATIVE SEQ IOC FUNCTN NTRL DIR POLARIZING ▼
THERMAL MDL ALARM NEG SEQ TOC CURVE ▼ NTRL DIR MTA NEUTRAL IOC1/2 PKP
TOC curves
HEAT TIME CONSTANT NEG SEQ TOC TDM NEGATIVE SEQ IOC PKP MIN POL VOLTAGE NEUTRAL IOC1/2 DELAY
COOL TIME CONSTANT NEG SEQ TOC RESET NEGATIVE SEQ IOC DELAY BLK OC DIR UN NEUTRAL IOC DIRECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 3
... ... ... ... ...
OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 1 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 1
898758A3. cdr BLOCK 2 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 2
BLOCK 3 BLOCK 3 BLOCK 3 BLOCK 3 BLOCK 3
The relay has a total of two phase, two neutral, and two ground/sensitive ground time
overcurrent elements. The programming of the time-current characteristics of these
elements is identical in all cases and will only be covered in this section. The required curve
is established by programming a Pickup Current, Curve Shape, Curve Multiplier, and Reset
Time. The Curve Shape can be either a standard shape or a user-defined shape
programmed with the FlexCurve™ feature.
Accurate coordination may require changing the time overcurrent characteristics of
particular elements under different conditions. For picking up a cold load, a different time-
current characteristic can be produced by increasing the pickup current value. The
following setpoints are used to program the time-current characteristics.
• <Element_Name> PICKUP: The pickup current is the threshold current at which the
time overcurrent element starts timing. There is no intentional ‘dead band’ when the
current is above the pickup level. However, accuracy is only guaranteed above a 1.5
per unit pickup level. The dropout threshold is 98% of the pickup threshold. Enter the
pickup current corresponding to 1 per unit on the time overcurrent curves as a
multiple of the source CT. For example, if 100: 5 CTs are used and a pickup of 90 amps
is required for the time overcurrent element, enter “0.9 x CT”.
• <Element_Name> CURVE: Select the desired curve shape. If none of the standard
curve shapes is appropriate, a custom FlexCurve™ can be created by entering the trip
times at 80 different current values; see S2 SYSTEM SETUP > FLEXCURVE A. Curve
formulas are given for use with computer based coordination programs. Calculated
trip time values are only valid for I / Ipu > 1. Select the appropriate curve shape and
multiplier, thus matching the appropriate curve with the protection requirements. The
available curves are shown in the table below.
ANSI GE TYPE IAC IEC OTHER

Extremely Inverse Extremely Inverse Curve A (BS142) Definite Time
Very Inverse Very Inverse Curve B (BS142) Flexcurve ATM
Normally Inverse Inverse Curve C (BS142) Flexcurve BTM
Moderately Inverse Short Inverse IEC Short Inverse User Curve
• <Element_Name> MULTIPLIER: A multiplier setpoint allows shifting of the selected

base curve in the vertical time direction. Unlike the electromechanical time dial
equivalent, trip times are directly proportional to the value of the time multiplier
setpoint. For example, all trip times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1
or base curve values.
When Timed Over-Current is programmed with Definite time, the operating time is
obtained after multiplication of the selected Multiplier (TDM) by a 0.1 s base line. For
example, selection of TDM = 5 would lead to a 0.5 s operating time.
• <Element_Name> RESET: Time overcurrent tripping time calculations are made with
an internal ‘energy capacity’ memory variable. When this variable indicates that the
energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent trip is generated. If less than
100% is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold
of 97 to 99% of the pickup value, the variable must be reduced. Two methods of this
resetting operation are available, Instantaneous and Linear. The Instantaneous
selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static units,
which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset
threshold. The Linear selection can be used where the relay must coordinate with
electromechanical units. With this setpoint, the energy capacity variable is
decremented according to the following equation.

where: TRESET = reset time in seconds; E = energy capacity reached (per unit); M = curve
multiplier; CR = characteristic constant (5 for ANSI, IAC, Definite Time, and FlexCurves™; 8
for IEC)
TOC CURVE CHARACTERISTICS
ANSI Curves
The ANSI time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the ANSI
C37.90 curve classifications for extremely, very, normally, and moderately inverse. The
ANSI curves are derived from the following formula:
where:T = trip time (seconds); M = multiplier value; I = input current; Ipu = pickup current
setpoint; A, B, C, D, E = constants
Table 6-3: ANSI Curve Constants
ANSI Curve Shape A B C D E
ANSI Extremely Inverse 0.0399 0.2294 0.5000 3.0094 0.7222
ANSI Very Inverse 0.0615 0.7989 0.3400 –0.2840 4.0505
ANSI Normally Inverse 0.0274 2.2614 0.3000 –4.1899 9.1272
ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.1735 0.6791 0.8000 –0.0800 0.1271
Table 6-4: ANSI Curve Trip Times (in seconds)

Multiplier (TDM) Current (I/Ipickup)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
ANSI Extremely Inverse
0.5 2.000 0.872 0.330 0.184 0.124 0.093 0.075 0.063 0.055 0.049
1.0 4.001 1.744 0.659 0.368 0.247 0.185 0.149 0.126 0.110 0.098
2.0 8.002 3.489 1.319 0.736 0.495 0.371 0.298 0.251 0.219 0.196
4.0 16.004 6.977 2.638 1.472 0.990 0.742 0.596 0.503 0.439 0.393
6.0 24.005 10.466 3.956 2.208 1.484 1.113 0.894 0.754 0.658 0.589
8.0 32.007 13.955 5.275 2.944 1.979 1.483 1.192 1.006 0.878 0.786
10.0 40.009 17.443 6.594 3.680 2.474 1.854 1.491 1.257 1.097 0.982
ANSI Very Inverse
0.5 1.567 0.663 0.268 0.171 0.130 0.108 0.094 0.085 0.078 0.073
1.0 3.134 1.325 0.537 0.341 0.260 0.216 0.189 0.170 0.156 0.146
2.0 6.268 2.650 1.074 0.682 0.520 0.432 0.378 0.340 0.312 0.291
4.0 12.537 5.301 2.148 1.365 1.040 0.864 0.755 0.680 0.625 0.583
6.0 18.805 7.951 3.221 2.047 1.559 1.297 1.133 1.020 0.937 0.874
8.0 25.073 10.602 4.295 2.730 2.079 1.729 1.510 1.360 1.250 1.165
10.0 31.341 13.252 5.369 3.412 2.599 2.161 1.888 1.700 1.562 1.457
ANSI Normally Inverse
0.5 2.142 0.883 0.377 0.256 0.203 0.172 0.151 0.135 0.123 0.113
1.0 4.284 1.766 0.754 0.513 0.407 0.344 0.302 0.270 0.246 0.226
2.0 8.568 3.531 1.508 1.025 0.814 0.689 0.604 0.541 0.492 0.452
4.0 17.137 7.062 3.016 2.051 1.627 1.378 1.208 1.082 0.983 0.904
6.0 25.705 10.594 4.524 3.076 2.441 2.067 1.812 1.622 1.475 1.356
8.0 34.274 14.125 6.031 4.102 3.254 2.756 2.415 2.163 1.967 1.808
10.0 42.842 17.656 7.539 5.127 4.068 3.445 3.019 2.704 2.458 2.260
ANSI Moderately Inverse


1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.5 0.675 0.379 0.239 0.191 0.166 0.151 0.141 0.133 0.128 0.123
1.0 1.351 0.757 0.478 0.382 0.332 0.302 0.281 0.267 0.255 0.247
2.0 2.702 1.515 0.955 0.764 0.665 0.604 0.563 0.533 0.511 0.493
4.0 5.404 3.030 1.910 1.527 1.329 1.208 1.126 1.066 1.021 0.986
6.0 8.106 4.544 2.866 2.291 1.994 1.812 1.689 1.600 1.532 1.479
8.0 10.807 6.059 3.821 3.054 2.659 2.416 2.252 2.133 2.043 1.972
10.0 13.509 7.574 4.776 3.818 3.324 3.020 2.815 2.666 2.554 2.465
IEC Curves
For European applications, the relay offers the four standard curves defined in IEC 255-4
and British standard BS142. These are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, and
Short Inverse. The formulae for these curves are:
where: T = trip time (seconds), M = multiplier setpoint, I = input current, Ipu = pickup current
setpoint, K, E = constants.
Table 6-5: IEC (BS) Inverse Time Curve Constants
IEC (BS) Curve Shape K E
IEC Curve A (BS142) 0.140 0.020
IEC Curve B (BS142) 13.500 1.000
IEC Curve C (BS142) 80.000 2.000
IEC Short Inverse 0.050 0.040
Table 6-6: IEC Curve Trip Times (in seconds)

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEC Curve A
0.05 0.860 0.501 0.315 0.249 0.214 0.192 0.176 0.165 0.156 0.149
0.10 1.719 1.003 0.630 0.498 0.428 0.384 0.353 0.330 0.312 0.297
0.20 3.439 2.006 1.260 0.996 0.856 0.767 0.706 0.659 0.623 0.594
0.40 6.878 4.012 2.521 1.992 1.712 1.535 1.411 1.319 1.247 1.188
0.60 10.317 6.017 3.781 2.988 2.568 2.302 2.117 1.978 1.870 1.782
0.80 13.755 8.023 5.042 3.984 3.424 3.070 2.822 2.637 2.493 2.376
1.00 17.194 10.029 6.302 4.980 4.280 3.837 3.528 3.297 3.116 2.971
IEC Curve B
0.05 1.350 0.675 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.135 0.113 0.096 0.084 0.075
0.10 2.700 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.270 0.225 0.193 0.169 0.150
0.20 5.400 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.540 0.450 0.386 0.338 0.300
0.40 10.800 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 1.080 0.900 0.771 0.675 0.600
0.60 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.620 1.350 1.157 1.013 0.900
0.80 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 2.160 1.800 1.543 1.350 1.200
1.00 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.700 2.250 1.929 1.688 1.500
IEC Curve C
0.05 3.200 1.333 0.500 0.267 0.167 0.114 0.083 0.063 0.050 0.040
0.10 6.400 2.667 1.000 0.533 0.333 0.229 0.167 0.127 0.100 0.081


1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.20 12.800 5.333 2.000 1.067 0.667 0.457 0.333 0.254 0.200 0.162
0.40 25.600 10.667 4.000 2.133 1.333 0.914 0.667 0.508 0.400 0.323
0.60 38.400 16.000 6.000 3.200 2.000 1.371 1.000 0.762 0.600 0.485
0.80 51.200 21.333 8.000 4.267 2.667 1.829 1.333 1.016 0.800 0.646
1.00 64.000 26.667 10.000 5.333 3.333 2.286 1.667 1.270 1.000 0.808
IEC Short Time
0.05 0.153 0.089 0.056 0.044 0.038 0.034 0.031 0.029 0.027 0.026
0.10 0.306 0.178 0.111 0.088 0.075 0.067 0.062 0.058 0.054 0.052
0.20 0.612 0.356 0.223 0.175 0.150 0.135 0.124 0.115 0.109 0.104
0.40 1.223 0.711 0.445 0.351 0.301 0.269 0.247 0.231 0.218 0.207
0.60 1.835 1.067 0.668 0.526 0.451 0.404 0.371 0.346 0.327 0.311
0.80 2.446 1.423 0.890 0.702 0.602 0.538 0.494 0.461 0.435 0.415
1.00 3.058 1.778 1.113 0.877 0.752 0.673 0.618 0.576 0.544 0.518
IAC Curves
The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:
where: T = trip time (seconds), M = multiplier setpoint, I = input current, Ipu = pickup current
setpoint, A to E = constants.
Table 6-7: GE Type IAC Inverse Curve Constants
IAC Curve Shape A B C D E
IAC Extreme Inverse 0.0040 0.6379 0.6200 1.7872 0.2461
IAC Very Inverse 0.0900 0.7955 0.1000 –1.2885 7.9586
IAC Inverse 0.2078 0.8630 0.8000 –0.4180 0.1947
IAC Short Inverse 0.0428 0.0609 0.6200 –0.0010 0.0221
Table 6-8: IAC Curve Trip Times

Multiplier (TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IAC Extremely Inverse
0.5 1.699 0.749 0.303 0.178 0.123 0.093 0.074 0.062 0.053 0.046
1.0 3.398 1.498 0.606 0.356 0.246 0.186 0.149 0.124 0.106 0.093
2.0 6.796 2.997 1.212 0.711 0.491 0.372 0.298 0.248 0.212 0.185
4.0 13.591 5.993 2.423 1.422 0.983 0.744 0.595 0.495 0.424 0.370
6.0 20.387 8.990 3.635 2.133 1.474 1.115 0.893 0.743 0.636 0.556
8.0 27.183 11.987 4.846 2.844 1.966 1.487 1.191 0.991 0.848 0.741
10.0 33.979 14.983 6.058 3.555 2.457 1.859 1.488 1.239 1.060 0.926
IAC Very Inverse
0.5 1.451 0.656 0.269 0.172 0.133 0.113 0.101 0.093 0.087 0.083
1.0 2.901 1.312 0.537 0.343 0.266 0.227 0.202 0.186 0.174 0.165
2.0 5.802 2.624 1.075 0.687 0.533 0.453 0.405 0.372 0.349 0.331
4.0 11.605 5.248 2.150 1.374 1.065 0.906 0.810 0.745 0.698 0.662
6.0 17.407 7.872 3.225 2.061 1.598 1.359 1.215 1.117 1.046 0.992
8.0 23.209 10.497 4.299 2.747 2.131 1.813 1.620 1.490 1.395 1.323

Multiplier (TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
10.0 29.012 13.121 5.374 3.434 2.663 2.266 2.025 1.862 1.744 1.654
IAC Inverse
0.5 0.578 0.375 0.266 0.221 0.196 0.180 0.168 0.160 0.154 0.148
1.0 1.155 0.749 0.532 0.443 0.392 0.360 0.337 0.320 0.307 0.297
2.0 2.310 1.499 1.064 0.885 0.784 0.719 0.674 0.640 0.614 0.594
4.0 4.621 2.997 2.128 1.770 1.569 1.439 1.348 1.280 1.229 1.188
6.0 6.931 4.496 3.192 2.656 2.353 2.158 2.022 1.921 1.843 1.781
8.0 9.242 5.995 4.256 3.541 3.138 2.878 2.695 2.561 2.457 2.375
10.0 11.552 7.494 5.320 4.426 3.922 3.597 3.369 3.201 3.072 2.969
IAC Short Inverse
0.5 0.072 0.047 0.035 0.031 0.028 0.027 0.026 0.026 0.025 0.025
1.0 0.143 0.095 0.070 0.061 0.057 0.054 0.052 0.051 0.050 0.049
2.0 0.286 0.190 0.140 0.123 0.114 0.108 0.105 0.102 0.100 0.099
4.0 0.573 0.379 0.279 0.245 0.228 0.217 0.210 0.204 0.200 0.197
6.0 0.859 0.569 0.419 0.368 0.341 0.325 0.314 0.307 0.301 0.296
8.0 1.145 0.759 0.559 0.490 0.455 0.434 0.419 0.409 0.401 0.394
10.0 1.431 0.948 0.699 0.613 0.569 0.542 0.524 0.511 0.501 0.493
USER Curves
The relay provides a selection of user definable curve shapes used by the time overcurrent
protection. The User curve is programmed by selecting the proper parameters in the
formula:
A, P, Q, B, K - selectable curve parameters within the ranges from the table: D is the Time
Dial Multiplier.
User Curve can be used on multiple elements only if the time dial multiplier is the same for
each element.
V = I/IPICKUP (TOC setting) is the ratio between the measured current and the pickup setting.
The maximum trip time for the User Curve is limited to 65.535 seconds. The User Curve can
NOTE:
be used for one protection situation only.

NOTE
Parameters A B P Q K
Range 0 to 125 0 to 3 0 to 3 0 to 2 0 to 1.999
Step 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.001
Unit sec sec NA NA sec
Default Value 0.05 0 0.04 1.0 0

Figure 6-15: USER curve configuration settings
Flexcurves
Prospective FlexCurves™ can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide
the best approximate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Click the
Initialize button to populate the pickup values with the points from the curve specified by
the "Select Curve" setting and the "Multiply" value. These values can then be edited to
create a custom curve. Click on the Clear FlexCurve Data button to reset all pickup values
to zero.
Curve data can be imported from CSV (comma-separated values) files by clicking on the
Open button. Likewise, curve data can be saved in CSV format by clicking the Save button.
CSV is a delimited data format with fields separated by the comma character and records
separated by new lines. Refer to IETF RFC 4180 for additional details.
The curve shapes for the two FlexCurves are derived from the following equations.
Eq. 1
, ,
7RSHUDWH DW
7'0î 7IOH[
ZKHQ
,SLFNXS ,SLFNXS
In the above equations, Toperate represents the operate time in seconds, TDM represents
the multiplier setting, I represents the input current, Ipickup represents the value of the
pickup current setting, Tflex represents the FlexCurve™ time in seconds.

Figure 6-16: Flexcurve™ configuration settings
The following settings are available for each custom Flexcurve™.

Select Curve
Range: ANSI Moderately Inverse, ANSI Very Inverse, ANSI Extremely Inverse, IEEE Normally
Inverse, IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, IEC Short Inverse, IAC Extreme Inv, IAC Very
Inverse, IAC Inverse, IAC Short Inverse, User Curve, FlexCurve B (Note: For FlexCurve A, you
can select FlexCurve B as the setpoint, and vice versa for FlexCurve B.)
This setting specifies a curve to use as a base for a custom FlexCurve™. Must be used
before Initialization is implemented (see Initialization below).
Multiply
Range: 0.01 to 30.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
This setting provides selection for Time Dial Multiplier by which the times from the
inverse curve are modified. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is selected
with TDM = 2, and the fault current was 5 times bigger than the PKP level, the operation
of the element will not occur before a time elapse of 495 ms from pickup.
Initialization
Used after specifying a curve to use as a base for a custom FlexCurve™ (see Select
Curve and Multiply above). When the Initialize FlexCurve button is clicked, the pickup
settings will be populated with values specified by the curve selected in this setting.

1.03 × Pickup, ..., 20.00 × Pickup

Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
Default: 0 ms
These settings specify the time to operate at the following pickup levels 1.03 to 20.00.
This data is converted into a continuous curve by linear interpolation between data
points. To enter a custom FlexCurve™, enter the operate time for each selected pickup
point.
Each FlexCurve can be configured to provide inverse time characteristic to more than one
NOTE:
Time Overcurrent Element. However, for computation of the curve operating times, one
NOTE must take into account the setting of the Time Delay Multiplier from the FlexCurve menu,
and the Time Delay Multiplier setting from TOC menu. The true TDM applied to the TOC
element when FlexCurve is selected is the result from the multiplication of both TDM
settings. For example, for FlexCurve Multiplier = 5, and Phase TOC Multiplier = 2, the total
Time Dial Multiplier will be equal to 10. To avoid confusion, it is suggested to keep the
multiplier from the TOC menu equal to 1, and change only the multiplier from the selected
FlexCurve. This way, one can see from the FlexCurve setup, the curve operating times as
related to the multiples of pickup.
Phase timed The relay has one Phase Time Overcurrent protection element per protection group. The
overcurrent settings of this function are applied to each of the three phases to produce trip or pickup
protection per phase. The TOC pickup flag is asserted, when the current on any phase is above the
PKP value. The TOC trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined
by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. The element drops from
pickup without operation, if the measured current drops below 97-98% of the pickup value,
before the time for operation is reached. The selection of Definite Time has a base time
delay of 0.1 s, multiplied by the selected TD multiplier. For example the operating time for
TOC set to Definite Time and a TDM set to 5 will result in 5*0.1 = 0.5 s.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > PHASE TOC
PH TOC FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Phase TOC
function. The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate when the Trip setting is selected, and the
Phase TOC operates. The “ALARM” LED will not turn on if the TOC operates when set to
function Trip. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon phase TOC operation, with the TOC
function selected as Alarm, and will self-reset, when the operation clears. If Latched
Alarm is selected as a TOC function, the “ALARM” LED will flash during TOC operation,
and will stay “ON” after the operation clears until the reset command is initiated. The
output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected.
PH TOC PKP
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the time overcurrent pickup level. For example, a PKP setting of 0.9 x CT
with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current.

PH TOC CURVE
Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse, Definite Time, IEC Curve A/B/C
and Short Inverse, IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short, User Curve, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B
This setting sets the shape of the selected TOC inverse curve. If none of the standard
curve shapes is appropriate, a custom User curve, or FlexCurve can be created. Refer to
the User curve and the FlexCurve setup for more detail on their configurations and
usage.
PH TOC TDM
Default: 1.00
of the element will not occur before an elapsed time from pickup, of 495 ms.
PH TOC RESET
Range: Instantaneous, Linear
Default: Instantaneous
The “Instantaneous” reset method is intended for applications with other relays, such as
most static relays, which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls
below the reset threshold. The “Timed” reset method can be used where the relay must
coordinate with electromechanical relays.
PH TOC DIRECTION
Range: Disabled, Forward, Reverse
Default: Disabled
This setting provides control to the Phase TOC function in terms of permitting operation
upon fault conditions in the selected current flow direction, and blocking it when faults
occur in the opposite direction.
A special case is considered when fault direction is undefined. Then “BLK OC DIR UN”
setting in Neutral Directional defines the fault direction.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate, upon Phase TOC
operation. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether
Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip function is selected.
BLOCK 1/2/3
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Phase TOC menu. When any of the selected
blocking inputs - Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element - turns on,
the phase TOC function will be blocked.

Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
LATCH
SETPOINT
R
PH TOC FUNCTION:
OR
Disabled = 0
AND

Latched Alarm
Alarm LED: TRIP
OR
Trip
Operate Output Relay 1 (TRIP)

AND
SETPOINTS
BLOCK 1: Trip
SETPOINTS
Off = 0 (To Breaker Failure)
PH TOC PICKUP:
BLOCK 2: Message Event Recorder
Off = 0 PH TOC CURVE: :
AND
PH TOC PH A OP
BLOCK 3: Transient Recorder
PH TOC TDM:
OR
Off = 0 PH TOC PH B OP
PH TOC RESET TIME: PH TOC PH C OP
SETPOINTS:
RUN IA > PICKUP PH TOC OP
AND
Autoreclose OUTPUT RELAY 3
(per shot settings) Operate OUTPUT RELAY 4
output relays
upon OUTPUT RELAY 5
OR
selection
Adjust PKP
From TOC PHASE DIRECTIONAL OUTPUT RELAY 6
Block TOC Dir Phase A RUN IB > PICKUP
AND
Block TOC Dir Phase B
LED: PICKUP
Block TOC Dir Phase C
Event Recorder
Adjust PKP Transient Recorder

OR
Figure 6-17: Phase Time Overcurrent Protection Logic Diagram
RUN IC > PICKUP
AND
Phase Currents
Phase A current (IA)

Adjust PKP
Phase B current (IB) PH TOC PKP
Phase C current (IC)
PH TOC PH A PKP
PH TOC PH B PKP
898010A1.cdr
PH TOC PH C PKP
Adjust Phase TOC PKP
Cold Load PKP
6–71
S3 PROTECTION
Phase instantaneous The 350 relay has two identical phase instantaneous overcurrent protection types per
overcurrent Setpoint Group: Phase IOC1, and Phase IOC2. Each consists of three separate
protection instantaneous overcurrent elements; one per phase, with identical settings.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > PHASE IOC1(2)
PH IOC1/2 FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Phase IOC function.
The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate when the Trip function is selected, and the Phase
IOC operates. The “ALARM” LED will not turn on if the IOC operates when set to function
Trip. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon phase IOC operation, and with the IOC function
selected as Alarm, will self-reset when the operation clears. If Latched Alarm is selected,
the “ALARM” LED will flash during IOC operation, and will stay “ON” after the operation
clears, until the Reset command is initiated. The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if
the Latched Alarm or Alarm function is selected.
PH IOC1/2 PKP
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the instantaneous overcurrent pickup level. For example, a PKP setting
of 0.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current.
PH IOC1/2 DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 300.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Default: 0.00 sec
This setting provides selection for the time used to delay the protection operation.
PH IOC DIRECTION
Default: Disabled
This setting provides control to the Phase IOC1(2) function in terms of permitting
operation upon fault conditions in the selected current flow direction, and blocking it,
when faults occur in the opposite direction.
setting in Phase Directional defines the fault direction.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon Phase IOC
operation. Relay outputs operation is available no matter whether Latched Alarm, Alarm,
or Trip function is selected.
BLOCK 1/2/3
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Phase IOC menu. When any one of the selected
blocking inputs - Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element - is turned
on, the phase IOC function will be blocked.

Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
SETPOINT AND LATCH
R
PH IOC FUNCTION:
OR
Disabled = 0
AND
Latched Alarm
Alarm
OR
LED: TRIP
Trip

SETPOINT
AND
BLOCK 1:
Off = 0
Trip
BLOCK 2:
(To Breaker Failure)
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
AND
Off = 0 SETPOINT
OR
PH IOC PICKUP:
Event Recorder
Block Inputs
RUN
Cold Load PKP Transient Recorder
AND
IA > PICKUP SETPOINT
Autoreclose
(per shot settings)
PH IOC PKP DELAY: SETPOINT:
tPKP OUTPUT RELAY 3

From TOC PHASE DIRECTIONAL RUN 0 Operate
OUTPUT RELAY 4
Block TOC Dir Phase A output relays
upon
AND
tPKP OUTPUT RELAY 5
IB > PICKUP
OR
Block TOC Dir Phase B selection

0
Block TOC Dir Phase C OUTPUT RELAY 6
tPKP
0 Message
RUN
Phase IOC OP
AND
IC > PICKUP
Phase IOC A OP
Phase Currents
Phase IOC B OP
Phase IOC C OP
Phase B current (IB)
LED: PICKUP
Figure 6-18: Phase instantaneous overcurrent protection logic diagram
Event Recorder
OR
Transient Recorder
Message
Phase IOC PKP

Phase IOC A PKP
Phase IOC B PKP
6–73
S3 PROTECTION
898009A1.cdr
Phase IOC C PKP
Phase directional The Phase Directional element (one for each of phases A, B and C) is used to discriminate
between faults that occur in the forward direction, and faults that occur in the reverse
direction. The Phase Directional element can be used either individually for control or
alarm by energizing the auxiliary output relays, or as a part of the Phase Time, or
Instantaneous, over-current elements to define the tripping direction. (See the setup for
Phase TOC and Phase IOC elements.)
The polarizing signal for the Phase Directional element is determined by comparing the
phase angle between the current from the phase CTs and the line-line voltage from the
VTs, and the set MTA angle.
The following table shows the operating and polarizing signals used for phase directional
control:
PHASE OPERATING SIGNAL POLARIZING SIGNAL Vpol

ABC PHASE SEQUENCE ACB PHASE SEQUENCE
A Angle of Ia Angle of Vbc × (Angle of MTA) Angle of Vcb × (Angle of MTA)
B Angle of Ib Angle of Vca × (Angle of MTA) Angle of Vac × (Angle of MTA)
C Angle of Ic Angle of Vab × (Angle of MTA) Angle of Vba × (Angle of MTA)
When line voltage is below the minimum polarizing voltage threshold (MIN POL VOLTAGE),
the direction is undefined. In this case, phase overcurrent protection elements are blocked
if “BLK OC DIR UN” setting is enabled and directional is not disabled.
Figure 6-19: Phase A polarization
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > PHASE DIR

PH DIR FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Control
Default: Disabled
When Alarm function is selected, the alarm LED will flash upon detection of Reverse
direction for any phase, and will drop out when the direction changes to Forward for all
phases. When Latched Alarm is selected, the alarm LED will flash upon detection of
Reverse direction, and will stay lit (latched) after the direction for all phases is Forward.
The alarm LED can be reset by issuing the reset command. Detection of Reverse
direction when Control function is selected does not trigger the alarm LED.
PH DIR MTA
Range: 0º to 359º Lead in steps of 1
Default: 30º
This setting sets the Maximum Torque Angle (MTA) for the Phase Directional element to
define the regions of Forward and Reverse directions. This is the angle of maximum
sensitivity, i.e. maximum torque angle by which the operating current leads the
polarizing voltage.
MIN POL VOLTAGE
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.05 x VT
This setting is used to establish the minimum level of voltage for which the phase angle
measurement is reliable. The setting is based on VT accuracy.
BLOC OC DIR UN
Default: Enabled
This setting establishes the procedure under undefined direction (voltage below
threshold). If enabled, OC elements with “Forward” or “Reverse” setting are blocked;
otherwise, they are not.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon Phase directional
operation. Relay outputs operation is available no matter whether Latched Alarm, Alarm
or Trip function is selected.
BLOCK 1/2/3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10[8], Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Phase IOC menu. When any one of the selected
blocking inputs - Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element - is turned
on, the phase directional function will be blocked.

6–76
RESET
S3 PROTECTION
AND
SETPOINT LATCH
R
PHA DIR FUNCTION:
OR
Disabled = 0
898840.cdr
AND
Latched Alarm
Alarm
OR
Control
SETPOINT
BLOCK 1: Ia > 0.05 x CT (Message)
Off = 0 (Event Recorder , Trasient
Recorder )
AND
BLOCK 2:
AND
Off = 0 (Flexlogic )
OR
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
ACTUAL VALUES SETPOINT:

Ia
OUTPUT RELAY 3
Seq = ABC Seq = ACB Operate
Vbc Vcb SETPOINT output relays OUTPUT RELAY 4
upon
OUTPUT RELAY 5
PH DIR MTA selection
SETPOINT OUTPUT RELAY 6
RUN
PHASE DIR OC POLAR
FWD
VOLTAGE TRESHOLD
Vpol
V>= V minimum
REV Ph Dir OC REV (A)
(To Phase IOC 1, 2 and TOC )
Voltage Polarization
Ph Dir OC FWD (A)

Figure 6-20: Phase directional logic diagram
SETPOINT
AND
BLK POC DIR UNDEF

Enabled
Disabled
AND
BLK PH OC DIR UND (A)

AND
(Message)
(Event Recorder , Trasient
Recorder )
PHASE B LOGIC SIMILAR TO PHASE A (Flexlogic )
PHASE C LOGIC SIMILAR TO PHASE A

Ground/Sensitive The relay has one Ground Time Overcurrent protection per setpoint group. The settings of
Ground timed this function are applied to the ground input current to produce trip or pickup flags. The
overcurrent Ground TOC pickup flag is asserted, when the ground current is above the PKP value. The
protection Ground TOC operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by
the selected inverse curve, and the magnitude of the current. The element drops from
pickup without operation if the measured current drops below 97 to 98% of the pickup
value, before the time to operate is reached. The selection of Definite Time has a base time
delay of 0.1 s, multiplied by the selected TD multiplier. For example the operating time for
TOC set to Definite Time and a TDM set to 5 will result in 5*0.1 = 0.5 s.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > GROUND TOC
The settings from the menu for Sensitive Ground TOC, appears only upon selection of the
NOTE:
Sensitive Ground CT when ordering the relay. Otherwise, the relay displays the menu for
NOTE Ground TOC protection.
Sensitive ground CTs are used in cases where the fault current is limited by a grounding
resistor.
GND TOC FUNCTION

Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Ground/Sensitive
Ground TOC function. The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate, if the Ground/Sensitive
Ground TOC function is selected as Trip, and the measured ground current satisfies the
operating condition set by the settings. The “ALARM” LED will not turn on if the TOC
operates when set to the Trip function. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon phase TOC
operation, with the TOC function selected as Alarm, and will self-reset, when this
operation clears. If Latched Alarm is selected as the TOC function, the “ALARM” LED will
flash during TOC operation, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears, until the reset
command is initiated. The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if the Latched Alarm or
Alarm function is selected. Any or all of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate
when the Ground TOC function is selected as Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip.
GND TOC PKP
Default: 1.00 x CT
SENS.GND TOC PKP
Default: 1.00 x CT
with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current.
GND TOC CURVE
This setting sets the shape of the selected over-current inverse curve. If none of the
standard curve shapes is appropriate, a custom User curve, or FlexCurve can be
created. Refer to the User curve and the FlexCurve setup for more detail on their
configurations and usage.

GND TOC TDM

Default: 1.0
of the element will not occur before an elapsed time from pickup, of 495 ms.
GND TOC RESET
GND TOC DIRECTION
Default: Disabled
This setting provides control to the Ground TOC function in terms of permitting operation
upon fault conditions in the selected current flow direction, and blocking it, when faults
setting in Ground Directional defines the fault direction.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon Ground TOC
BLOCK 1/2/3
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Ground TOC menu. When any of the selected
blocking inputs - Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element - turn on,
the ground TOC function is blocked.

Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
SETPOINT LATCH

R
GND TOC FUNCTION:
OR
Disabled = 0
AND
Alarm
Latched Alarm LED: TRIP
OR
Trip

AND
SETPOINTS
BLOCK 1:
Trip
Off = 0 (To Breaker Failure)
SETPOINTS
BLOCK 2:
GND TOC PICKUP: Event Recorder
Off = 0
OR
BLOCK 3: GND TOC CURVE: Transient Recorder
Off = 0
GND TOC TD MULTIPLIER:
Autoreclose
(per shot settings) SETPOINTS:
GND TOC RESET:
OUTPUT RELAY 3
RUN Ig > PICKUP
AND
SETPOINT
Operate OUTPUT RELAY 4
GND TOC DIRECTION:
output relays
OUTPUT RELAY 5
Forward upon
selection OUTPUT RELAY 6
AND
Disabled Message:
Adjust PKP
Reverse GND TOC OP
OR
From GROUND DIRECTIONAL
AND
LED: PICKUP
GND DIR Reverse GND TOC PKP Event Recorder
GND DIR Forward
BLK GND DIR OC UND Transient Recorder
AND
From Ground CT or,
From Sens. Ground CT
Ground/Sens. Ground current (Ig)
898006A1.cdr
Adjust Gnd/S.Gnd TOC PKP
Cold Load PKP
Figure 6-21: Ground/Sensitive Ground timed overcurrent protection: Logic Diagram
6–79
S3 PROTECTION
Ground/Sensitive The relay has one Ground/Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent protection element
Ground instantaneous per setpoint group. The settings of these functions are applied to the gound/sensitive
overcurrent ground current for pickup and trip flags. The Ground IOC pickup flag is asserted, when the
protection ground current is above the PKP value. The Ground IOC operate flag is asserted if the
element stays picked up for the time defined by the Ground IOC PKP Delay setting. If the
pickup time delay is set to 0.00 seconds, the pickup and operate flags will be asserted at
the same time. The element drops from pickup without operation, if the ground current
drops below 97-99% of the pickup value.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > GROUND IOC1(2)
GND IOC FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Ground/Sensitive
Ground IOC function. The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate, if the Ground/Sensitive
Ground IOC function is selected as Trip, and the measured ground current satisfies the
operating condition set by the settings. The “ALARM” LED will not turn on if the element
operates when set to function Trip. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon IOC operation, with
the IOC function selected as Alarm, and will self-reset, when this operation clears. If
Latched Alarm is selected as an IOC function, the “ALARM” LED will flash during the IOC
operating condition, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears, until a reset command
is initiated. The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is
selected. Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate when the
Ground/S.Ground IOC function is selected as Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip.
GND IOC PKP
Range: Disabled, 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
SENS.GND IOC PKP
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the ground overcurrent pickup level specified per times CT. For example,
a PKP setting of 0.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current.
GND IOC DELAY
Default: 0.00 sec
This setting provides selection for pickup time delay used to delay the operation of the
protection.
GND IOC DIRECTION
Default: Disabled
This setting provides control to the Ground IOC1(2) function in terms of permitting
operation upon fault conditions in the selected current flow direction, and blocking it,
setting in Ground Directional defines the fault direction.

OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon Ground IOC
BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Ground IOC menu. When any of the selected
blocking inputs - Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element - turns on,
the ground IOC function is blocked.

6–82
S3 PROTECTION
diagram
Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
SETPOINT LATCH
R
GND IOC FUNCTION:
OR
Disabled = 0
AND
Latched Alarm
Alarm LED: TRIP
OR
Trip
SETPOINT Operate Output Relay 1 (TRIP)

AND
BLOCK 1:
Trip
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
Off = 0 Event Recorder
BLOCK 3:
Transient Recorder
Off = 0
OR
Block Inputs
SETPOINT
Cold Load PKP SETPOINT:
GND IOC PICKUP: SETPOINT
OUTPUT RELAY 3
RUN GND IOC PKP DELAY:
Autoreclose Operate
OUTPUT RELAY 4
(per shot settings) output relays
tPKP upon
AND
Ig > PICKUP OUTPUT RELAY 5
0 selection
SETPOINT
Message: OUTPUT RELAY 6
GND IOC DIRECTION:
Forward Ground IOC OP
AND
Disabled
Reverse LED: PICKUP
Ground IOC PKP Event Recorder
OR
From GROUND DIRECTIONAL
AND
GND DIR Reverse Transient Recorder
GND DIR Forward
BLK GND DIR OC UND
AND
From Ground CT or,
From Sens. Ground CT
898005A1.cdr
Ground/Sens. Ground current (Ig)
Figure 6-22: Ground/Sensitive Ground instantaneous overcurrent protection logic

Ground directional The Ground Directional element is used to discriminate whether a fault occurs in a forward
or in a reverse direction, and it can be used either individually or as a part of the Ground
Time, or Instantaneous over-current elements. (See the setup for Ground TOC, and Ground
IOC elements.)
The operating current for the Ground directional element is the measured current from the
ground CT input terminals. Depending on the ground CT connection, the measured current
from the CT terminals can be either the current from a zero sequence CT, or the zero
sequence current from a residual CT connection (see figure below).
SOURCE
A
E5 E6 E7 SR350
A B C PHASE CURRENT
D5 D6 D7 INPUTS
D8 E8 E8 D8 E8 D8
N IG IG N IG N
GROUND GROUND GROUND
GROUND CURRENT INPUT GROUND CURRENT INPUT GROUND CURRENT INPUT

USED FOR POLARIZING WITH ZERO SEQUENCE CT WITH RESIDUAL CONNECTION
898730.CDR
The polarizing signal for the Ground Directional element is based on the zero sequence
voltage. Depending on the relay’s order code, the zero sequence voltage used for the
polarizing voltage, is either calculated, when three-phase voltages are available, or is
measured from the auxiliary voltage input Vx when the three-phase voltages are not
available. For those relays with available phase VTs, the polarizing voltage for the Neutral
directional element is calculated as follows:
Eq. 2
Please note, that the phase VT inputs must be connected in Wye.
For those relays with available Vx auxiliary voltage input only, the polarizing voltage for the
Ground directional element is three times the zero sequence voltage measured at the Vx
terminals. The Vx input should be connected to measure 3V0 from an open delta VT
configuration as shown on the figure below.

Figure 6-23: Open Delta VT connection
The fault is detected in the Forward direction when the direction of the operating current Ig
is within ± 90° of the polarizing signal. Otherwise the direction is detected as Reverse.
In the case where the voltage drops below the setting of the minimum polarizing voltage,
the ground directional element is undefined. In this case, ground overcurrent protection
elements are blocked if “BLK OC DIR UN” setting is enabled and directional is not disabled.
The diagram below shows the regions for detection of ground current Forward and
Reverse directions with respect to the zero sequence voltage and the selected Maximum
Torque Angle (MTA).

PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > GND DIR
GND (S.GND) DIR FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Control
Default: Disabled
When the Alarm function is selected, the alarm LED will flash upon detection of Reverse
direction, and will drop out when the direction changes to Forward. When Latched
Alarm is selected, the alarm LED will flash upon detection of Reverse direction, and will
stay lit (latched) after the direction changes to Forward. The alarm LED can be reset by
issuing a Reset command. Detection of Reverse direction when the Control function is
selected, does not trigger the alarm LED.
GND (S.GND) DIR MTA
Range: 0° to 359° lead in steps of 1°
Default: 315°
This setting sets the Maximum Torque Angle (MTA), for the Ground Directional element to
define the regions of Forward and Reverse directions. For Voltage polarizing, enter the
maximum torque angle by which the operating current leads the polarizing voltage. This
is the angle of maximum sensitivity.

MIN POL VOLTAGE

Default: 0.05 x VT
The minimum zero sequence voltage level must be selected to prevent operation due to
normal system unbalances, or voltage transformer errors. Set the minimum zero
sequence voltage level to 2% of VT for well balanced systems, and 1% of VT accuracy.
For systems with high resistance grounding or floating neutrals, this setting can be as
high as 20%. The default of 5% of VT is appropriate for most solidly grounded systems.
The following table shows the operating current, and the polarizing signals used for
directional control:
Table 6-9: Ground Directional characteristics
Quantity Operating Current Polarizing Voltage
Ground Ig -Vo/-3Vo*
* Polarizing voltage will be 3Vo when voltage is measured from the auxiliary voltage
channel.
BLOCK OC DIR UN
Default: Enabled
This setting establishes the procedure under undefined direction. If enabled, ground OC
elements with “Forward” or “Reverse” setting are blocked; otherwise, they are not.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon Gnd (S. Gnd)
Directional operation. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter
whether Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip function is selected.
BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Ground Directional menu. One blocking input
going “high” is enough to block the function. The selection for each block can be Contact
input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element.

Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
SETPOINT LATCH
R
GND DIR FUNCTION:
OR
Disabled = 0
AND
Latched Alarm

Alarm
OR
Control
SETPOINT GND DIR REVERSE

BLOCK 1: (Message)
Ig > 0.05 x CT
AND
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
Gnd Dir Reverse
Off = 0
OR
(Event Recorder, Transient Recorder)
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
SETPOINT:
Figure 6-24: Ground directional logic diagram
Ground Current (Ig) OUTPUT RELAY 3

Operate
SETPOINT output relays OUTPUT RELAY 4
SETPOINT
upon
GND DIR MTA OUTPUT RELAY 5
MIN POL VOLTAGE: selection
RUN OUTPUT RELAY 6
Zero Sequence Voltage(-V0) |V0| >MINIMUM
FWD
- 3V_0
REV
REV REVERSE
3I_0
AND
(To Ground TOC and Ground IOC )

AND
SETPOINT
BLK GOC DIR UNDEF FOWARD

AND
Enabled (To Ground TOC and Ground IOC )
BLK GND DIR OC UNDEF

( * ) Polarizing voltage will be 3V0 when voltage is measured from the auxiliary voltage channel
AND
(To Ground TOC and Ground IOC )
(Message)
898018 A2.vsd (Event Recorder , Trasient
Recorder )
(Flexlogic)
6–87
S3 PROTECTION
Neutral timed The relay has one Neutral Time Overcurrent protection element per setpoint group. The
overcurrent settings of this function are applied to the calculated neutral current to produce pickup
protection and trip flags. The Neutral TOC pickup flag is asserted, when the neutral current is above
the PKP value. The Neutral TOC operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for
the time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. The
element drops from pickup without operation, if the neutral current drops below 97-99% of
the pickup value, before the time for operation is reached. The selection of Definite Time
has a base time delay of 0.1 s, multiplied by the selected TD multiplier. For example the
operating time for TOC set to Definite Time and a TDM set to 5 will result in 5*0.1 = 0.5 s.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > NEUTRAL TOC
NTRL TOC FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Neutral TOC
function. The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate if the Neutral TOC function is selected as
Trip, and the neutral current calculated by the relay satisfies the operating condition set
by the settings. The “ALARM” LED will not turn on if the TOC operates when set to
function Trip. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon Neutral TOC operating condition with the
TOC function selected as Alarm, and will self-reset when the operating condition clears.
If Latched Alarm is selected as a TOC function, the “ALARM” LED will flash during TOC
operation, and will stay “ON” after the operation clears, until a reset command is
initiated. The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is
Neutral TOC function is selected as Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip.
NTRL TOC PKP
Default: 1.00 x CT
with 300:5 CT translates into 270A neutral current.
NTRL TOC CURVE
This setting sets the shape of the selected over-current inverse curve. If none of the
standard curve shapes is appropriate, a custom User curve, or FlexCurve can be
created. Refer to the User curve and the FlexCurve setup for more detail on their
configurations and usage.
NTRL TOC TDM
Default: 1.00
selected inverse curve are modified. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is
selected with TDM = 2, and the fault current was 5 times bigger than the PKP level,
operation of the element will not occur before an elapse of 495 ms from pickup.

NTRL TOC RESET

NTRL TOC DIRECTION
Default: Disabled
This setting provides control to the Neutral TOC function in terms of permitting operation
under fault conditions in the selected current flow direction, and blocking it when faults
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate, upon Neutral TOC
BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
There are three blocking inputs provided in the Neutral TOC menu. One blocking input
going “high” is enough to block the function. The selection for each block can include
Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element.

6–90
S3 PROTECTION
Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
SETPOINT LATCH
R
NTRL TOC FUNCTION:
OR
Disabled = 0
AND
Latched Alarm
Alarm LED: TRIP
OR
Trip
AND
SETPOINTS Trip
BLOCK 1: SETPOINTS
Off = 0 Event Recorder
NTRL TOC PICKUP:
BLOCK 2:
NTRL TOC CURVE: Transient Recorder
Off = 0
BLOCK 3: NTRL TOC TDM:
OR
Off = 0 SETPOINTS:
NTRL TOC RESET:
OUTPUT RELAY 3
Autoreclose RUN IN > PICKUP
Operate
(per shot settings) OUTPUT RELAY 4
output relays
AND
upon OUTPUT RELAY 5
selection
SETPOINTS Message: OUTPUT RELAY 6
Adjust PKP
NTRL TOC DIRECTION:
NTRL TOC OP
Forward
AND
Disabled LED: PICKUP
NTRL TOC PKP Event Recorder
Reverse
From NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL
OR
AND
Transient Recorder
Figure 6-25: Neutral Timed Overcurrent Protection: Logic Diagram
NRL DIR REV

NRL DIR FWD
BLK NTRL DIR OC UND
AND
Computed by the relay
Neutral current (IN)
898008A1.cdr
Adjust Neutral TOC PKP
Cold Load PKP

Negative sequence The SR3 relay has one Negative Sequence Overcurrent element per setpoint group. The
timed overcurrent negative sequence overcurrent protection responds to negative sequence |I2|current,
protection where it is calculated as .
The negative sequence overcurrent elements are uniquely suited to detect phase-phase
faults and are not sensitive to balanced loads. While negative sequence elements do not
respond to a balanced load, they do detect the negative sequence current present in an
unbalanced load. For this reason, select an element pickup setting above the maximum
expected I2 current due to load unbalance.
The Negative Sequence TOC1(2) Trip (Alarm) Pickup flag is asserted when the negative
sequence current is above the PKP value. The Negative Sequence TOC1(2) Trip (Alarm)
operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked-up for the time defined by the selected
inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. The element drops from pickup without
operation if the measured current drops below 97-99% of the pickup value, before the time
for operation is reached. When Definite Time is selected, the time for Negative Sequence
TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting. The selection of Definite Time has a base
time delay of 0.1s, multiplied by the selected TD multiplier. For example, the operating time
for TOC set to Definite Time and a TDM set to 5 will result in 5*0.1 = 0.5s.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > NEG SEQ TOC1(2)
NEG SEQ TOC FUNC
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Negative
Sequence TOC function. The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate if the function Trip is
selected, and the negative sequence current computed by the relay, is above the NEG
SEQ TOC PKP setting for a time greater than the selected time under NEG SEQ TOC
DELAY. The “ALARM” LED will not turn on if the negative sequence TOC function is set to
Trip. The “ALARM” LED will flash under the neg. sequence TOC operating condition, with
the negative sequence TOC function selected as Alarm, and will self-reset when this
operating condition clears. Until a reset command is initiated, if Latched Alarm is
selected as a negative sequence TOC function, the “ALARM” LED will flash during the TOC
condition, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears. The output relay #1 “Trip” will not
operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. Any or all of the output relays
3 to 6 can be selected to operate with the negative sequence TOC function selected as
Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip.
NEG SEQ TOC PKP
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting defines the negative sequence TOC pickup level associated with the ratings
of the CTs selected under NEG SEQ CT INPUT.
NEG SEQ TOC CURVE
Range: - ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse- Definite Time- IEC Curve A/B/
C and Short Inverse- IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short, User Curve, FlexCurve™ A/B
Default: Ext Inverse
This setting defines the shape of the selected overcurrent inverse curve.

NEG SEQ TOC TDM

Default: 1.00
This setting provides a selection for Time Dial Multiplier, which modifies the time
response of the selected curve. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is
selected with TDM = 2, and the fault current was 5 times bigger than the PKP level, the
operation of the element will not occur before the elapse of 2.59 seconds from pickup.
NEG SEQ TOC RESET
The reset of the negative sequence timed overcurrent can be selected as either
“Instantaneous” or “Linear”. If Instantaneous reset is selected, the Negative Sequence
TOC element will reset instantaneously providing that the current drops below 97-98%
of the Neg. Seq. TOC PKP level, before the time for operation is reached. When Linear
reset is selected, the time to reset is calculated based on the following linear equation:
Eq. 3
where: TRESET - reset time in seconds; E - energy capacity reached (per unit); M - curve
multiplier; CR - characteristic constant (5 for ANSI, IAC, Definite Time, User Curve.
The 100% “energy capacity” for the TOC element is defined by the selection of PKP, TDM
and points from the inverse curve. A memory variable based on actual values currents is
monitored for accumulation of energy capacity, where if it reaches a level of 100% of the
set energy capacity level, the element operates, and if it goes below 97-98% of this level,
the element will tend to reset. The accumulated energy capacity is used as an input for
computation of the reset time, when the “Linear” reset is selected as a setting.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon the negative
sequence TOC condition. Relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the
BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the negative sequence TOC menu. Any one of the
assigned blocking inputs can block the function. The selections for each block include

Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
LATCH

R
OR
SETPOINT
AND
NEG SEQ TOC FUNCTN:

Disabled = 0
Latched Alarm
Alarm
OR
LED: TRIP
Trip
Operate Output Relay 1

AND
SETPOINTS
NEG SEQ TOC PICKUP To Breaker Failure

Trip
NEG SEQ TOC CURVE
SETPOINTS NEG SEQ TOC TDM

BLOCK 1:
NEG SEQ TOC RESET SETPOINTS
Off = 0
RUN I_2 > PICKUP OUTPUT RELAY 3
AND
BLOCK 2:
Operate
OUTPUT RELAY 4
Off = 0 output relays
OR
I_2 x t = upon
BLOCK 3: OUTPUT RELAY 5
selection
Off = 0 Adjust PKP OUTPUT RELAY 6
Figure 6-26: Negative Sequence Timed Overcurrent logic diagram
Calculated Negative Event Recorder

Sequence Current LED: PICKUP
Transient Recorder
I_2 897807.cdr
Event Recorder
Transient Recorder
6–93
S3 PROTECTION
Neutral The relay has two Instantaneous Overcurrent protection elements per setpoint group. The
instantaneous settings of this function are applied to the calculated neutral current for pickup and trip
overcurrent flags. The Neutral IOC pickup flag is asserted, when the neutral current is above the PKP
protection value. The Neutral IOC operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time
defined by the Neutral IOC Delay setting. If the pickup time delay is set to 0.00 seconds, the
pickup and operate flags will be asserted at the same time. The element drops from pickup
without operation, if the neutral current drops below 97-99% of the pickup value before
the time for operation is reached.
PATH: SETPOINTS > PROTECTION > ETPOINT GROUP 1 (2) > NEUTRAL IOC1(2)
NTRL IOC1(2) FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Neutral IOC
function. The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate if the Neutral IOC function is selected as
Trip, and the neutral current calculated by the relay satisfies the operating condition set
by the settings. The “ALARM” LED will not turn on if the neutral IOC operates when set to
function Trip. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon Neutral IOC operation with the IOC
function selected as Alarm and will self-reset when this operation clears. If Latched
Alarm is selected as an IOC function, the “ALARM” LED will flash during IOC operation and
will stay “ON” after the operating condition clears, until the reset command is initiated.
The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is
Neutral IOC function - Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip - is selected.
NTRL IOC PKP
Range: 0.05 to 20 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the neutral instantaneous overcurrent pickup level.
NTRL IOC DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 300 sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Default: 0.00 sec
This setting sets the neutral instantaneous overcurrent delay.
NTRL IOC DIRECTION
Default: Disabled
This setting provides control to the Neutral IOC1(2) function in terms of permitting
operation upon fault conditions in the selected current flow direction, and blocking it
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon a Neutral IOC
condition. Relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm,
Alarm, or Trip function is selected.

BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Neutral IOC menu. One blocking input going
“high” is enough to block the function. The selection for each block can be Contact input,
Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element.

6–96
S3 PROTECTION
Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
SETPOINT LATCH
NTRL IOC FUNCTION: R
OR
Disabled = 0
AND
Latched Alarm
Alarm LED: TRIP
OR
Trip
AND
SETPOINT
BLOCK 1:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2: Event Recorder
Off = 0
BLOCK 3: Transient Recorder
Off = 0
SETPOINT
OR
SETPOINT SETPOINT:
Block Inputs NTRL IOC PICKUP:
OUTPUT RELAY 3
Cold Load PKP RUN NTRL IOC PKP DLY: Operate
output relay OUTPUT RELAY 4
Autoreclose IN > PICKUP tPKP upon OUTPUT RELAY 5
(per shot settings) 0 selection
Message: OUTPUT RELAY 6
SETPOINT Neutral IOC OP
AND
NTRL IOC DIRECTION:
Forward LED: PICKUP Neutral IOC PKP Event Recorder
AND
Disabled
Reverse
Transient Recorder
From NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL
OR
AND
NRL DIR Reverse
Figure 6-27: Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection: Logic Diagram
NRL DIR Forward

BLK NTRL DIR OC UND
AND
898007A1.cdr
Computed by the relay

Neutral current (IN)

Neutral directional The Neutral Directional element is used to discriminate between faults that occur in the
forward direction, and faults that occur in the reverse direction. The Neutral Directional
element can be used either individually for control or alarm by energizing the auxiliary
output relays, or as a part of the Neutral Time, or Instantaneous, over-current elements to
define the tripping direction. (See the setup for Neutral TOC, and Neutral IOC elements.)
The polarizing signal for the Neutral Directional element can be set to be either voltage
(zero sequence voltage), current (measured ground current), or dual (both).
Depending on the relay’s order code, the zero sequence voltage used for the Neutral
Directional polarizing voltage, is calculated either when three-phase voltages are available,
or is the measured voltage from the auxiliary Vx voltage input when the three-phase
voltages are not available. For those relays with available phase VTs, the polarizing voltage
for the Neutral directional element is calculated as follows:
Eq. 4
Please note that the phase VT inputs must be connected in Wye.
For those relays with available Vx auxiliary voltage input only, the polarizing voltage for the
Neutral directional element is three times the zero sequence voltage measured at the Vx
terminals. The Vx input should be connected to measure 3V0 from an open delta VT
configuration as shown in the figure below.
Figure 6-28: Open Delta VT connection
When “Voltage” polarization is selected, the direction is determined by comparing the

angle between the operating current and the voltage, and the set MTA angle. In cases
where the voltage drops below the setting of the minimum polarizing voltage, the neutral
directional element is undefined (see following table).
When “Current” polarizing is selected, the direction of the neutral current is determined
with reference to the direction of the measured ground current . The fault is detected in the
Forward direction when the ground current typically flowing from the ground point into the
neutral current is within ± 90° of the polarizing current. Otherwise the direction is detected
as Reverse. The neutral directional element is undefined (see following table) if the
polarizing ground current drops below 5% of the ground CT.
The diagram below shows the regions for detection of neutral current Forward and
Reverse directions with respect to the zero sequence voltage and the selected Maximum
Torque Angle (MTA).

When “Dual” polarizing is selected, the Reverse direction is declared if both directional
comparators - the one based on the zero sequence polarizing voltage, and the other based
on measured ground polarizing current - declare Reverse direction. If the direction from
one of the comparators declares Forward direction and the other declares Reverse
direction, the neutral directional element is undefined (see following table). If the polarizing
voltage falls below the set minimum voltage, the direction declared depends on the
polarizing ground current, assuming the measured ground current is above some 5% CTg.
The same rule applies if the ground current falls below 5% CTg. In this case the direction is
determined using the polarizing zero sequence voltage, assuming it is above the set
minimum voltage from the settings menu.
When direction is undefined, the “BLK NOC DIR UNDEF” setting determines whether neutral
overcurrent protection must be blocked (setting = Enabled) or enabled (setting= Disabled).
Table 6-10: Neutral directional element directions
Directional type Current direction Voltage direction Result
Current Undefined - Undefined
FW FW
RV RV
Voltage - Undefined Undefined
FW FW
RV RV

Directional type Current direction Voltage direction Result

Dual Undefined Undefined Undefined
FW RV Undefined
RV FW Undefined
Undefined FW FW
Undefined RV RV
FW Undefined FW
RV Undefined RV
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > NTRL DIR
NTRL DIR FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Control
Default: Disabled
When an Alarm function is selected, the alarm LED will flash upon detection of Reverse
direction, and will drop out when the direction changes to Forward. When Latched
Alarm is selected, the alarm LED will flash upon detection of Reverse direction, and will
stay lit (latched) after the direction changes to Forward. The alarm LED can be reset, by
issuing a Reset command. Detection of Reverse direction when the Control function is
selected, does not trigger the alarm LED.
NTRL DIR POLARIZING
Range: Voltage, Current, Dual
Default: Voltage
This setting specifies the voltage polarizing signal for the detection of Forward and
Reverse directions.
NTRL DIR MTA
Range: 0° to 359° Lead in steps of 1°
Default: 315°
This setting sets the Maximum Torque Angle (MTA), for the Neutral Directional element to
define the regions of Forward and Reverse directions. For Voltage polarizing, enter the
maximum torque angle by which the operating current leads the polarizing voltage. This
is the angle of maximum sensitivity.
MIN POL VOLTAGE
Default: 0.05 x VT
This setting affects only cases where voltage or dual polarizing is selected. The minimum
zero sequence voltage level must be selected to prevent operation due to normal
system unbalances, or voltage transformer errors. Set the minimum zero sequence
voltage level to 2% of VT for well balanced systems, and 1% of VT accuracy. For systems
with high resistance grounding or floating neutrals, this setting can be as high as 20%.
The default of 5% of VT is appropriate for most solidly grounded systems.
Table 6-11: Neutral directional characteristics
Quantity Operating Current Polarizing Voltage Polarizing Current
(VT connection: Wye)
Neutral 3I0 = I a +I b + I c -V0 = -(Va +Vb +Vc)/3 Ig
-3V0 (*)
* Polarizing voltage will be 3Vo when voltage is measured from the auxiliary voltage
channel.

BLK OC DIR UN
Default: Enabled
This setting establishes the procedure under undefined direction conditions. If enabled,
OC elements with a “Forward” or “Reverse” setting are blocked; otherwise, they are not.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon Neutral Directional
BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Neutral Directional menu. One blocking input
going “high” is enough to block the function. The selection for each block can be Contact

Command
LED: ALARM
RESET
AND
OR
SETPOINT
OR
NTRL DIR FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
AND
Latched Alarm
Alarm
OR
Control
SETPOINT NTRL DIR REVERSE

NTRL DIR BLOCK1: (Message)
In > 0.05 x CT
AND
Off = 0
NTRL DIR BLOCK 2:
Ntrl Dir Reverse
Off = 0
OR
NTRL DIR BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
SETPOINT:
SETPOINT

OUTPUT RELAY 3
NTRL DIR POLARIZING:
Voltage Operate OUTPUT RELAY 4
SETPOINT
OR
Dual output relays
OUTPUT RELAY 5
NTRL DIR MTA upon
Current selection OUTPUT RELAY 6
OR
RUN
AND
OUTPUT RELAY 7
SETPOINT
FWD
MIN POL VOLTAGE:
-3V_0
Zero Sequence Voltage(-V0) |V0| >MINIMUM REV
OR
REV
3I_0 REVERSE
AND
(To Neutral TOC and Neutral IOC )

XOR
FORWARD
AND
AND

Figure 6-29: Neutral directional logic diagram
OR
BLK NTRL DIR OC UND

AND
AND
RUN
(Message)
AND
Ground current (Ig) Ig > 0.05 x CT
(Event Recorder , Trasient
Recorder )
REV
Current Polarization (Flexlogic )
Neutral Current (In)
SETPOINT
BLK NOC DIR UNDEF
Enabled
898017A3.cdr
( * ) Polarizing voltage will be 3V0 when voltage is measured from the auxiliary voltage channel
6–101
S3 PROTECTION
Negative sequence The 350 relay has one Negative Sequence Overcurrent element per protection group. The
instantaneous negative sequence over-current protection responds to negative sequence current, where
overcurrent it is calculated as .
protection
The negative sequence over-current elements are uniquely suited to detect phase-phase
faults and are not sensitive to balanced loads. While negative sequence elements do not
respond to balanced load, they do detect the negative sequence current present in
unbalanced load. For this reason, select an element pickup setting above the maximum
expected current due to load unbalance.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > NEG SEQ IOC
NEG SEQ IOC FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Negative
Sequence IOC function. The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate if the function Trip is
selected, and the negative sequence current computed by the relay, is above the NEG
SEQ IOC PKP setting for a time greater than the selected time under NEG SEQ IOC DELAY.
The LED “ALARM” will not turn on if the neg. sequence IOC function is set to Trip. The LED
“ALARM” will flash under the neg. sequence IOC operating condition, with the neg.
sequence IOC function selected as Alarm, and will self-reset, when this operating
condition clears. If Latched Alarm is selected as a neg. seq. IOC function, the LED
“ALARM” will flash during the IOC condition, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears,
until the reset command is initiated. The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if Latched
Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected
to operate with the neg. seq. IOC function selected as Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip.
NEG SEQ IOC PKP
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting defines the negative sequence IOC pickup level.
NEG SEQ IOC DELAY
Default: 0.00 sec
This setting specifies the time delay before IOC operation. .
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon a Neg Seq IOC
condition. Relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm,
Alarm, or Trip function is selected.
BLOCK 1/2/3
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Neg. seq. IOC menu. Any one of the assigned
blocking inputs can block the function. The available selections for each block include

Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
AND S
SETPOINT LATCH
R
NEG SEQ IOC FUNCTN:
OR

Disabled = 0
AND
Latched Alarm
Alarm LED: TRIP
OR
Trip

AND
To Breaker Failure
Trip
Message
NegSeq IOC
SETPOINTS SETPOINTS
BLOCK 1:
NEG SEQ IOC PICKUP: SETPOINT SETPOINTS
Off = 0
RUN NEG SEQ IOC DELAY: OUTPUT RELAY 3
AND
BLOCK 2:
Operate
OUTPUT RELAY 4
Off = 0 tPKP output relays
OR
I_2 > PICKUP 0 upon
selection
Off = 0 OUTPUT RELAY 6
Calculated Negative Event Recorder

Sequence Current
I_2 Transient Recorder

LED: PICKUP
Event Recorder
898795.cdr
Transient Recorder
Figure 6-30: Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent protection logic diagram
6–103
S3 PROTECTION
Voltage elements
Figure 6-31: Voltage elements menu
S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1
PHASE TOC
PHASE IOC1 S3 PHASE UV
PHASE IOC2 PH UV FUNCTION
▼ ▼
GROUND TOC PH UV PKP
GROUND IOC1 PH UV CURVE

S3 PHASE OV PH UV DELAY
GROUND IOC2
PH OV FUNCTION PH UV PHASES
GND DIR
▼ PH UV MIN VOLTAGE
NEUTRAL TOC
PH OV PKP OUTPUT RELAY 3
NEUTRAL IOC1
PH OV DELAY ...
NEUTRAL IOC2
S3 NEUTRAL OV PH OV PHASES OUTPUT RELAY 6
NTRL DIR
NTRL OV FUNCTION OUTPUT RELAY 3 BLOCK 1
NEG SEQ IOC
▼ ... BLOCK 2
NEG SEQ TOC
NTRL OV PKP OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 3
PHASE UV
NTRL OV DELAY BLOCK 1
PHASE OV
OUTPUT RELAY 3 BLOCK 2
NEUTRAL OV
... BLOCK 3
NEGATIVE SEQ OV
OUTPUT RELAY 6
AUXILIARY UV
BLOCK 1
AUXILIARY OV
BLOCK 2
UNDER-FREQUENCY1
BLOCK 3
UNDER-FREQUENCY2
OVER-FREQUENCY1 S3 NEGATIVE SEQ OV
OVER-FREQUENCY2 S3 AUXILIARY UV NEG SEQ OV FUNCTN
THERMAL MODEL AUX UV FUNCTION ▼
S3 AUXILIARY OV
▼ NEG SEQ OV PKP
S3 UNDERFREQUENCY 1/2 AUX OV FUNCTION
AUX UV PKP NEG SEQ OV DELAY
UNDRFREQ 1/2 FUNC ▼
AUX UV CURVE OUTPUT RELAY 3
▼ AUX OV PKP
AUX UV DELAY ...
UNDRFREQ 1/2 PKP AUX OV DELAY
AUX UV MIN VOLTAGE OUTPUT RELAY 6
UNDRFREQ 1/2 DELAY OUTPUT RELAY 3
MIN VOLTAGE ...
... BLOCK 2
OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 6
... BLOCK 1
BLOCK 2 BLOCK 1
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 3 BLOCK 2
BLOCK 1
BLOCK 3
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 3
S3 OVERFREQUENCY 1/2
OVERFREQ 1/2 FUNCTN
▼
OVERFREQ 1/2 PKP
OVERFREQ 1/2 DELAY
OUTPUT RELAY 3
...
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 1
898759A2.cdr
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 3
Phase undervoltage • Undervoltage Protection: For voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a
drop in voltage will result in an increase in the drawn current, which may cause
dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage protection feature can be used

to either cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a specified
voltage setting for a specified time delay.
• Permissive Functions: The undervoltage feature may be used to block the functioning
of external devices by operating an output relay, when the voltage falls below the
specified voltage setting. Note that all internal features that are inhibited by an
undervoltage condition, such as underfrequency and overfrequency, have their own
inhibit functions independent of the undervoltage protection features.
• Source Transfer Schemes: In the event of an undervoltage, a transfer signal may be
generated to transfer a load from its normal source to a standby or emergency power
source.
The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have an inverse time delay
characteristic. The undervoltage delay setpoint defines a family of curves as shown below.
The operating time is given by:
T= D
1- V/Vpu Eq. 5
Where:
T = Operating Time
D = Undervoltage Delay setpoint
V = Voltage as a fraction of the nominal VT Secondary Voltage
Vpu = Pickup Level
At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the Undervoltage Delay setpoint.
NOTE:
NOTE
Figure 6-32: Inverse time undervoltage curves
D=5.0 2.0 1.0
20.0
18.0
16.0
14.0
Time (seconds)
12.0
10.0
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
0.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
% of V pickup
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > PHASE UV
PH UV FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Phase UV function.
The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate if the function is selected as a Trip, and the phase
voltages from the selected “PH UV PHASES” combination are below the PH UV PKP
setting for a time greater than the selected PHASE UV DELAY time. The “ALARM” LED will
not turn on if the phase UV function is set to Trip. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon the UV
operating condition, with the phase UV selected as Alarm, and will self-reset, when this
operating condition clears. If Latched Alarm is selected as a phase UV function, the
“ALARM” LED will flash during the UV condition and will stay “ON” after the condition
clears, until the reset command is initiated. The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if

the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can
be selected to operate when the phase UV function is selected as Latched Alarm, Alarm,
or Trip.
PH UV PKP
Default: 0.75 x VT
This setting defines the phase UV pickup level, and it is usually set to a level, below which
the drawn current from voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors may cause
dangerous motor overheating conditions.
PH UV CURVE
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
Default: Inverse Time
This setting selects the type of timing-inverse time/definite time to define the time of
undervoltage operation based on the selected UV time delay, and the actual
undervoltage condition with respect to the selected UV pickup.
PH UV DELAY
Default: 2.0 s
This setting specifies the time delay used by the selected “PHASE UV CURVE” type of
timing, to calculate the time before UV operation.
PH UV PHASES
Range: Any One, Any Two, All Three
Default: Any One
This setting selects the combination of undervoltage conditions with respect to the
number of phase voltages under the undervoltage pickup setting. Selection of the “Any
Two”, or “All Three” settings would effectively rule out the case of single VT fuse failure.
PH UV MIN VOLTAGE
Default: 0.30 x VT
The minimum operating voltage level is programmable to prevent undesired UV
operation before voltage becomes available.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon a Phase UV
condition. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether
BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default:Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Phase UV menu. One blocking input “high” is
enough to block the function. The available selections for each block include Contact

Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
SETPOINT LATCH
R
PH UV FUNCTION:
OR
Disabled = 0
AND
Latched Alarm
Alarm LED: TRIP
OR

Trip

AND
Trip
SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
PH UV PICKUP:
BLOCK 1:
Off = 0 PH UV CURVE: Message
BLOCK 2: Phase Undervoltage
PH UV DELAY:
Off = 0
OR
AND
BLOCK 3: RUN
AND
Off = 0
SETPOINTS
OUTPUT RELAY 3
Figure 6-33: Phase undervoltage logic diagram
PICKUP Operate OUTPUT RELAY 4

output relays
RUN upon OUTPUT RELAY 5
AND
selection
Phase Voltage Inputs
(associated setpoints) OUTPUT RELAY 6
None SETPOINT
Wye Delta PH UV PHASES:

PICKUP
Van Vab Any One
AND RUN
Vbn Vbc Operate for
programmed Any Two
OR
Vcn Vca combination

All Three LED: PICKUP
Event Recorder
PICKUP Any One
Pickup for
Programmed Any Two
OR
Combination
All Three
SETPOINT
PH UV MIN VOLTAGE:
898014A1.cdr
Van or Vab > Minimum
Vbn or Vbc > Minimum
Vcn or Vca > Minimum
6–107
S3 PROTECTION
Phase overvoltage The phase OV protection can be used to protect voltage sensitive feeder loads and circuits
against sustained overvoltage conditions. The protection can be used to either cause a
trip, or generate an alarm when the voltage exceeds a specified voltage value for the
specified time delay.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > PHASE OV
PH OV FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Phase OV function.
The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate, if the function is selected as a Trip, and the phase
voltages from the selected “PH OV PHASES” combination are above the PH OV PKP
setting for a time greater than the selected PHASE OV DELAY time. The “ALARM” LED will
not turn on if the phase OV function is set to Trip. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon the OV
operating condition, with the phase OV selected as Alarm, and will self-reset, when this
operating condition clears. If Latched Alarm is selected as a phase OV function, the
“ALARM” LED will flash during the OV condition and will stay “ON” after the condition
clears, until the reset command is initiated. The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if
the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can
be selected to operate when the phase OV function is selected as Latched Alarm, Alarm,
or Trip.
PH OV PKP
Default: 1.25 x VT
This setting defines the phase OV pickup level, and it is usually set to a level above which
some voltage sensitive loads and feeder components may experience overexcitation
and dangerous overheating conditions.
PH OV DELAY
Range: 0.1 to 600.0 sec in steps of 0.1
Default: 2.0 s
This setting specifies the time delay before OV operation.
PH OV PHASES
Range: Any One, Any Two, All Three
Default: Any One
This setting selects the combination of overvoltage conditions with respect to the
number of phase voltages over the overvoltage pickup setting.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon a Phase OV
BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Phase OV menu. One blocking input “high” is

Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
LATCH
SETPOINT
R

OR
PH OV FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
AND
Latched Alarm
Alarm LED: TRIP
OR
Trip

AND
Trip
SETPOINTS
BLOCK 1: Message
SETPOINTS
Off = 0 Phase Overvoltage
Figure 6-34: Phase Overvoltage logic diagram
BLOCK 2: PH OV PICKUP:
Off = 0
OR
RUN
AND
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0 Va > PICKUP
SETPOINT
SETPOINTS:
SETPOINT
PH OV PHASES: OUTPUT RELAY 3
RUN PHASE OV DELAY: Operate
Any One OUTPUT RELAY 4
Phase Voltage Inputs output relays
(associated setpoints) Operate for tPKP upon
programmed Any Two OUTPUT RELAY 5
OR
Vb > PICKUP selection

None combination
All Three OUTPUT RELAY 6
Wye Delta
Van Vab RUN

Vbn Vbc
Vcn Vca Vc > PICKUP

Event Recorder
Transient Recorder
LED: PICKUP
Event Recorder
898013.cdr
6–109
S3 PROTECTION
Transient Recorder
Neutral overvoltage The relay has one Neutral Overvoltage element per protection group. This element requires
the three phase Bus VTs to be Wye connected. When setting the pickup for this element, it
is important to consider the error in the VT ratio, as well as the normal voltage unbalance
on the system.
This element should be used with caution. It would normally be applied to give line to
NOTE:
ground fault coverage on high impedance grounded or ungrounded systems, which are
NOTE isolated. This constraint stems from the fact that a measurement of 3V0 cannot
discriminate between a faulted circuit and an adjacent healthy circuit. Use of a time
delayed back-up or an alarm mode allow other protections an opportunity to isolate the
faulted element first.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > NEUTRAL OV
NEUTRAL OV FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm,Trip
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Neutral OV
function. The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate if the function is selected as a Trip and
the neutral voltage is above the NTRL OV PKP setting for a time greater than the selected
NTRL OV DELAY time. The “ALARM” LED will not turn on if the neutral OV function is set to
Trip. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon an OV operating condition, with the neutral OV
function selected as Alarm, and will self-reset, when this operating condition clears. If
Latched Alarm is selected as a neutral OV function, the “ALARM” LED will flash during the
OV condition, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears, until the reset command is
initiated. The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting
is selected. Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate when the
neutral OV function is selected as Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip.
NEUTRAL OV PKP
Default: 0.30 x VT
This setting defines the neutral OV pickup level.
NEUTRAL OV DELAY
Default: 2.0 s
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon a Neutral OV
BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Neutral OV menu. One blocking input “high” is

Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
LATCH
SETPOINT R
OR
NTRL OV FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
AND
Latched Alarm
LED: TRIP

Alarm
OR
Trip

AND
Trip
Message
Neutrl OV Trip (Alarm) - PKP, OP
SETPOINTS
BLOCK 1: SETPOINTS
Off = 0 NTRL OV PICKUP: SETPOINTS:

SETPOINT
RUN NTRL OV DELAY:
AND
Operate
OR
output relays
BLOCK 3: tPKP upon
3V0 > PICKUP OUTPUT RELAY 5
selection
Off = 0
Figure 6-35: Neutral Overvoltage logic diagram
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Calculated Neutral
Voltage V0
LED: PICKUP
Vn = 3V0 Event Recorder
898015A1.cdr
6–111
S3 PROTECTION
Negative sequence The relay has one Negative Sequence Overvoltage element per protection group. The
overvoltage negative sequence overvoltage may be used to detect the loss of one or two phases of the
source, a reversed voltage phase sequence , or non-system voltage conditions.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > NEGATIVE SEQ. OV
NEG SEQ OV FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Negative Sequence
OV function. The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate, if the function is selected as a Trip
and the negative sequence voltage computed by the relay is above the NEG SEQ OV PKP
setting for a time greater than the selected NEG SEQ OV DELAY time. The “ALARM” LED
will not turn on, if the neg. sequence OV function is set to Trip. The “ALARM” LED will flash
upon an OV operating condition with the neg. sequence OV function selected as Alarm,
and will self-reset, when the operating condition clears. If Latched Alarm is selected as a
neg. seq. OV function, the “ALARM” LED will flash during the OV condition, and will stay
“ON” after the condition clears, until the reset command is initiated. The output relay #1
“Trip” will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. Any or all of the
output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate when the neg. seq. OV function is
selected as Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip.
NEG SEQ OV PKP
Default: 0.30 x VT
This setting defines the negative sequence OV pickup level.
NEG SEQ OV DELAY
Default: 2.0 s
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon a Negative Seq. OV
BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Neg. Seq. OV menu. One blocking input “high” is

Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
SETPOINT LATCH
R
NEG SEQ OV FUNCTN:
OR
Disabled = 0
AND
Latched Alarm
Alarm LED: TRIP
OR

Trip

AND
Trip
Message
NegSeq Overvoltage
SETPOINTS SETPOINTS
BLOCK 1: SETPOINTS:
NEG SEQ OV PICKUP: SETPOINT
RUN NEG SEQ OV DELAY:
AND
BLOCK 2: Operate
OUTPUT RELAY 4
output relays
Off = 0 tPKP upon
OR
V_2 or Ö3*V_2 > PICKUP OUTPUT RELAY 5
selection
BLOCK 3:
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Off = 0
Calculated Negative
Sequence Voltage
Phase VT connection
Wye Delta
Figure 6-36: Negative Sequence Overvoltage logic diagram
V_2 Ö3 * V_2
Event Recorder
LED: PICKUP
898016A1.cdr
6–113
S3 PROTECTION
Auxiliary The relay has one Auxiliary Undervoltage element per setpoint group. The input for this
undervoltage element is the voltage from the auxiliary VT relay terminals, where a single voltage from
the line is connected. The time delay characteristic can be programmed as either definite
time or inverse time. A minimum operating voltage level is programmable to prevent
undesired operation before voltage becomes available.
• Undervoltage Protection: For voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a
drop in voltage will result in an increase in the drawn current, which may cause
dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage protection feature can be used
to either cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a specified
voltage setting for a specified time delay.
• Permissive Functions: The undervoltage feature may be used to block the functioning
of external devices by operating an output relay, when the voltage falls below the
specified voltage setting. Note that all internal features that are inhibited by an
undervoltage condition, such as underfrequency and overfrequency, have their own
inhibit functions independent of the undervoltage protection features.
• Source Transfer Schemes: In the event of an undervoltage, a transfer signal may be
generated to transfer a load from its normal source to a standby or emergency power
source.
The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have an inverse time delay
characteristic. The undervoltage delay setpoint defines a family of curves as shown below.
The operating time is given by:
D
T=
1- V/Vpu Eq. 6
Where:
T = Operating Time
D = Undervoltage Delay setpoint
V = Voltage as a fraction of the nominal VT Secondary Voltage
Vpu = Pickup Level
At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the Undervoltage Delay setpoint.
NOTE:
NOTE
Figure 6-37: Inverse time undervoltage curves
D=5.0 2.0 1.0
20.0
18.0
16.0
14.0
Time (seconds)
12.0
10.0
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
0.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
% of V pickup
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > AUXILIARY UV

AUX UV FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Auxiliary UV
function. The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate if the function is selected as a Trip, and
the auxiliary voltage is below the AUX UV PKP setting for a time greater than the selected
AUX UV DELAY time. The “ALARM" LED will not turn on if the auxiliary UV function is set to
Trip. The “ALARM" LED will flash upon UV operation, with the aux. UV function selected as
Alarm, and will self-reset when UV operation clears. If Latched Alarm is selected as a
aux. UV function, the “ALARM" LED will flash during the UV condition, and will stay “ON”
after the condition clears, until the reset command is initiated. The output relay #1 “Trip”
will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. Any or all of the output
relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate when the auxiliary UV function is selected as
Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip.
AUX UV PKP
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0,01
Default: 0.75 x VT
This setting defines the auxiliary UV pickup level.
AUX UV CURVE
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
Default: Inverse Time
This setting selects the type of timing-inverse time/definite time, to define the time of
aux. undervoltage operation based on selected UV time delay, and the actual
undervoltage condition with respect to the selected UV pickup.
AUX UV DELAY
Default: 2.0 s
This setting specifies a time delay used by the selected “AUX UV CURVE” type of timing to
calculate the time before UV operation.
AUX UV MIN VOLTAGE
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0,01
Default: 0.30 x VT
The minimum operating voltage level is programmable to prevent undesired UV
operation before voltage becomes available.
OUTUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon an Auxiliary UV
BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Auxiliary UV menu. One blocking input “high” is

6–116
S3 PROTECTION
Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
LATCH
SETPOINT R
OR
AUX UV FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
AND
Latched Alarm
Alarm LED: TRIP
OR
Trip

AND
Trip
SETPOINTS
Message
AUX UV PICKUP:
Aux. UV Trip (Alarm) OP, PKP, DPO
SETPOINTS
AUX UV CURVE:
BLOCK 1:
AUX UV DELAY: SETPOINTS
Off = 0
OUTPUT RELAY 3
AND
BLOCK 2: RUN
AND
Off = 0
OR
output relays
upon OUTPUT RELAY 5
BLOCK 3:
selection
PICKUP
Figure 6-38: Auxiliary Undervoltage logic diagram
Auxiliary Voltage Input

(Associated setpoints)
Aux V
LED: PICKUP
Event Recorder
SETPOINT
AUX MIN VOLTAGE: 898012A1.cdr
Aux V > Minimum

Auxiliary overvoltage The relay has one Auxiliary Overvoltage element per protection group. The element is
intended for monitoring overvoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage input. A typical
application for this element is monitoring the zero sequence voltage (3V_0) from an open
corner Delta VT connection. The nominal voltage for the auxiliary voltage input is set under
Setpoints > S2 System Setup > Voltage Sensing > Aux VT Secondary.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > AUXILIARY OV
AUX OV FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The selection of Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Auxiliary OV function.
The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate, if the function is selected as a Trip, and the
auxiliary voltage is above the AUX OV PKP setting for a time greater than the selected
AUX OV DELAY time. The “ALARM” LED will not turn on, if the auxiliary OV function is set to
Trip. The LED “ALARM” will flash upon an OV operating condition, with the aux. OV
function selected as Alarm, and will self-reset, when the operating condition clears. If
Latched Alarm is selected as an aux. OV function, the “ALARM” LED will flash during the
OV condition, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears until the reset command is
initiated. The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting
is selected. Any or all of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate when the
auxiliary OV function is selected as Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip.
AUX OV PKP
Default: 0.3 x VT
This setting defines the auxiliary OV pickup level.
AUX OV DELAY
Range: 0.1 to 600.0 sec in steps of 0.1
Default: 2.0 s
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon an Auxiliary OV
BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Auxiliary OV menu. One blocking input “high” is

6–118
S3 PROTECTION
Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
LATCH
SETPOINT
R
AUX OV FUNCTION:
OR
Disabled = 0
AND
Latched Alarm
Alarm LED: TRIP
OR
Trip

AND
Trip
Message
Aux. OV Trip (Alarm) - PKP, OP, DPO
SETPOINTS SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
BLOCK 1: AUX OV PICKUP: SETPOINT
OUTPUT RELAY 3
Off = 0 RUN AUX OV DELAY:
AND
BLOCK 2: output relays
tPKP upon OUTPUT RELAY 5
Off = 0 V > PICKUP
OR
selection
Figure 6-39: Auxiliary Overvoltage logic diagram
Off = 0
Auxiliary Voltage Input

(associated setpoints)
LED: PICKUP
Aux V Event Recorder
898011A1.cdr

Underfrequency The relay is equipped with two Underfrequency elements per setpoint group. These
elements can be used for detecting system underfrequency conditions, and be part of an
automatic load shedding scheme. The need for such protection arises if during a system
disturbance, an area becomes electrically isolated from the main system and suffers a
generation deficiency due to the loss of either transmission or generation facilities. If
reserve generation is not available in the area, conditions of low frequency will occur and
may lead to a complete collapse. The 350 provides two underfrequency elements, which
can automatically disconnect sufficient load to restore an acceptable balance between
load and generation.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > PROTECTION GROUP 1(2) > UNDER-FREQUENCY1(2)
UNDERFREQ 1(2) FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The selection of Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Underfrequency
function. The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate, if the function is selected as a Trip, and
the measured frequency is below the UNDERFREQ PKP setting for a time longer than the
selected UNDERFREQ DELAY time. The LED “ALARM” will not turn on, if the
Underfrequency function is set to Trip. The LED “ALARM” will flash upon underfrequency
operating condition, with the underfreq. function selected as Alarm, and will self-reset,
when the operating condition clears. If Latched Alarm is selected, the LED “ALARM” will
flash during the underfrequency condition, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears,
until reset command is initiated. The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if Latched
Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected
to operate when the Underfrequency function is selected as Latched Alarm, Alarm, or
Trip.
UNDERFREQ 1(2) PKP
Range: 40.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Default: 59.00 Hz
This setting defines the Underfrequency pickup level, and it is usually set to a frequency
level considered dangerous for the stability of the system.
UNDERFREQ 1(2) DELAY
Default: 2.0 s
This setting specifies the time delay before underfrequency operation.
MIN VOLTAGE
Default: 0.70 x VT
The minimum operating voltage level is programmable to prevent undesired
underfrequency operation before voltage becomes available, such as on faults cleared
by downstream protection or fuses.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon an Underfrequency

BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the menu for each of the two Underfrequency
elelements. One blocking input “high” is enough to block the function. The available
selections for each block include Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic
Element.

Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
LATCH
SETPOINT
R
UNDERFREQ FUNCTN:
OR
Disabled = 0
AND

Latched Alarm
Alarm LED: TRIP
OR
Trip

AND
Trip
Message
SETPOINTS
Underfrequency1(2)
BLOCK 1:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
SETPOINTS
Figure 6-40: Underfrequency logic diagram
Off = 0
OR
SETPOINTS
UNDERFREQ PKP: SETPOINT
RUN UNDERFREQ DELAY:
AND
Off = 0 Operate
OUTPUT RELAY 4
output relays
f < PICKUP tPKP upon
OUTPUT RELAY 5
selection
OUTPUT RELAY 6

None SETPOINT
Wye Delta MIN VOLTAGE: Event Recorder
Van Vab Va > Minimum
Vbn Vbc Transient Recorder

Vcn Vca
LED: PICKUP
f=0
Event Recorder
Transient Recorder 898004.cdr

Frequency
Measurement
f ( Va) - frequency
6–121
S3 PROTECTION
Overfrequency The relay is equipped with two Overfrequency elements per setpoint group, ANSI device
number 81O-1, and 81O-2. Voltage channel phase A is used for frequency measurement.
The steady-state frequency of a power system is an indicator of the existing balance
between generated power and the load. Whenever this power is disrupted through
disconnection of significant load or the isolation of a part of the system that has surplus of
generation, it would result in increase of frequency. If the control system of the generators
do not respond fast enough to quickly ramp the turbine frequency back to normal, the
overspeed can lead to turbine trip. The overfrequency elements can be used to control the
turbine frequency at a generating location. This element can also be used for feeder
reclosing as part of the “after load shedding restoration”
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > OVER-FREQUENCY1(2)
OVERFREQ 1(2) FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Overfrequency
function. The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate, if the function is selected as a Trip, and
the measured frequency is above the OVERFREQ PKP setting for a time longer than the
selected OVERFREQ DELAY time. The “ALARM” LED will not turn on if the Overfrequency
function is set to Trip. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon Overfrequency operating
condition, with the overfrequency function selected as Alarm, and will self-reset, when
the operating condition clears. If Latched Alarm is selected, the “ALARM” LED will flash
during the overfrequency condition, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears until
reset command is initiated. The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if the Latched
Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. Any or all of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to
operate when the Overfrequency function is selected as Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip.
OVERFREQ 1(2) PKP
Range: 40.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Default: 60.50 Hz
This setting defines the Overfrequency pickup level, and it is usually set to a frequency
level considered dangerous for the stability of the system.
OVERFREQ 1(2) DELAY
Range: 0.1 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
Default: 2.0 s
This setting specifies the time delay before overfrequency operation.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon an Overfrequency
condition. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the
BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the menu for each of the two Overfrequency
elements. One blocking input “high” is enough to block the function. The available
selections for each block include Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic
Element.

Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
LATCH
SETPOINT
R
OVERFREQ FUNCTN:
OR

Disabled = 0
AND
Latched Alarm
Alarm LED: TRIP
OR
Trip

AND
Trip
Message
Overfrequency1(2)
SETPOINTS
Figure 6-41: Overfrequency logic diagram
BLOCK 1:
SETPOINT
Off = 0 SETPOINTS
OVERFREQ PKP: SETPOINT
RUN OVERFREQ DELAY:
AND
Off = 0
OR
Operate
OUTPUT RELAY 4
output relays
BLOCK 3: tPKP
f > PICKUP upon OUTPUT RELAY 5
Off = 0 selection
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Va < 0.3 x VT
Wye Delta
Frequency Event Recorder
Van Vab Measurement
f ( Va) - frequency
Vbn Vbc Transient Recorder
Vcn Vca
LED: PICKUP
Event Recorder
898002.cdr
Transient Recorder
6–123
S3 PROTECTION
Thermal Model
The thermal overload protection (Thermal Model) can be applied to prevent damage to the
protected cables, dry transformers, capacitor banks, or even overhead lines. Loads
exceeding the load ratings of the protected equipment can, over time, degrade the
insulation, and may, in return, lead to short circuit conditions. As the heating of plant
equipment such as cables or transformers is resistive (I2R), the generated heat is directly
proportional to the square of the flowing current (I2). The relay uses a thermal time
characteristic based on current squared and integrated over time.
The relay will continuously calculate the thermal capacity as a percentage of the total
thermal capacity. The thermal capacity is calculated as follows:
Where:
θ(t) = Thermal capacity (%) at time t
θ(t-1) = Thermal capacity (%) at time t-1
Δt/τ = Time step Δt divided by the heating/cooling time constant τ
I2 = (Iphase/Ipickup )2 = Squared ratio between the actual load current and the pickup setting
τ = Heating and cooling time constant, usually provided by the manufacturer.
The heating time constant is used when the squared load/pickup ratio is greater than the
thermal capacity θ(t-1) estimated in the previous time step. Otherwise the formula uses the
cooling time constant.
The time to trip is estimated when the load current exceeds the PKP setting, and the 49
element picks up. At the same time the thermal capacity will start to increase at a rate
depending on the current amplitude and the prior loading condition of the cable. When the
thermal capacity exceeds the alarm level, the element will generate an alarm signal. The
thermal model alarm can be used as a warning for the start of dangerous overloading
conditions, and can prevent unnecessary tripping. When the thermal capacity exceeds the
trip level, the element will generate a trip signal. As per the formula below, the operate time
(time to trip) is determined from when the element picks up until it trips, and depends on
both the measured load over time, and the equipment heating and cooling time constants.
Where:
TTRIP = Time to trip in seconds
θ2 = 1 = Trip thermal state set to 100%
τ = Heating and cooling time constant, usually provided by the manufacturer.
I2= Squared ratio of the actual phase current and the pickup setting.
The time to trip will start timing out once the level of the computed thermal capacity (%)
becomes higher than 100 % thermal capacity (θ =1 ). The trip flag will dropout when the
Thermal capacity falls below 97% of the pickup level.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > THERMAL MODEL

THERMAL MDL FUNC

Default: Disabled
The thermal capacity will be displayed on the relay even if the Thermal Model Function is
set to “Disabled. The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate only if the function is selected as
a Trip and the thermal capacity value of any phase is over 100%. The LED “ALARM” will
turn on when the function is selected as a Trip or Alarm if the thermal capacity value of
any phase is over the Thermal MDL Alarm setting. This LED will turn off when the thermal
capacity value of all phases is below 97% of the Thermal MDL Alarm setting. If Latched
Alarm is selected as a function setting, the LED “ALARM” will flash if the thermal capacity
value of any phase is over the Thermal MDL Alarm setting, and will stay “ON” when the
thermal capacity value of all phases is below 97% of the Thermal MDL Alarm setting,
until the reset command is initiated. The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if the
Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. Any of the output relays 3 to 6 can be
selected to operate when the Thermal Model Function is selected as Latched Alarm,
Alarm or Trip.
The thermal capacity values are stored in memory and can be cleared either by using
the "Clear Thermal Capacity" command, or by cycling relay control power.
THERMAL MDL PKP
Range: 0.05 to 20 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the level of phase current above which the thermal model starts timing
out the time-to-trip per the logarithmic formula above.
THERMAL MDL ALARM
Range: 70.0 to 110.0% in steps of 0.1%
Default: 80.0%
This setting sets the alarm level for the accumulated thermal capacity above which the
element generates an alarm.
HEAT TIME CONSTANT (τH)
Range: 3.0 to 600.0 min in steps of 0.1 min
Default: 6.0 min
This time constant is used to compute the thermal capacity when the thermal capacity
at each time-step is greater than the one computed in the previous time-step.
COOL TIME CONSTANT (τC)
Range: 1.00 to 6.00 x τH in steps of 0.01 x τH
Default: 2.00 x τH
This time constant is used to compute the thermal capacity when the thermal capacity
at each time-step is less than the one computed in the previous time-step.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon a Thermal Model
condition. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the

BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the menu. One blocking input “high” is enough to
block the function. The available selections for each block include Contact input, Virtual
Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element.

Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
SETPOINT LATCH
R
THERMAL MDL FUNC
OR
Disabled = 0
AND
Latched Alarm
Alarm
OR
LED: TRIP

Trip

AND
Message
Ph A Thermal Alarm
Trip
Ph B Thermal Alarm
Ph C Thermal Alarm
SETPOINT
THERMAL MDL ALARM Event Recorder
Transient Recorder
OR
q > q ALARM
SETPOINTS
THERMAL MDL PICKUP

SETPOINT
HEATING T. CONSTANT
BLOCK 1:
Off = 0 COOLING T. CONSTANT
BLOCK 2: RUN
AND
SETPOINT:
Figure 6-42: Thermal model protection logic diagram
Off = 0
OR
TTRIP (ph A)
THERMAL Operate OUTPUT RELAY 4
Off = 0 output relays
MODEL
upon OUTPUT RELAY 5
OR
TTRIP (ph B)
selection
OUTPUT RELAY 6
TTRIP (ph C)
Message
Ph A Thermal OP
Ph B Thermal OP Event Recorder
Phase Currents Ph C Thermal OP

Transient Recorder
Phase B current (IB)
ACTUAL VALUES
Thermal Capacity ph A, %
Thermal Capacity ph B, %
898762.cdr
Thermal Capacity ph C, %
6–127
S3 PROTECTION
VT fuse fail
If one or two of the three phase to phase voltages drops to less than 70% of nominal, and
at the same time any of the three voltages is greater than 85%, either an alarm or a trip
will occur after a 1 second delay. The 70% threshold allows for the possibility that the
voltage downstream from a blown fuse is pulled up above zero by devices connected
between the open fuse and another phase.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > VT FUSE FAILURE
FUSE FAIL FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Trip
Default: Trip
Sets the Fuse Fail action.
Figure 6-43: Fuse Fail Protection Logic Diagram
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Vab < 70% LOGIC OPERAND
Vbc < 70% OR Fuse Fail
Vca < 70%
AND
1s LOGIC OPERAND
VOLTAGE INPUTS 0 AND Fuse Fail Alarm OP
Vab > 85% Any Alarm OP
Vbc > 85% OR
Vca > 85%
TARGET MESSAGE
Fuse Fail Alarm
State: Operate
Fuse Fail Trip
State: Operate
AND S
LOGIC OPERAND
LATCH Fuse Fail Trip OP
R Any Trip OP
SETTING Set Dominant
Fuse Fail Function
= Disabled
= Alarm
= Trip
Command
RESET
898802.cdr

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS
S4 Controls
Figure 6-44: Main controls menu
S4 CONTROLS
CHANGE SEPNT GROUP S4 CHANGE SETP GROUP S4 AR SETUP
VIRTUAL INPUTS SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE AR FUNCTION
LOGIC ELEMENTS ▼ ▼
S4 LOGIC ELEMENT 1
▼ BLK GROUP CHANGE NUMBER OF SHOTS
LE 1 FUNCTION
BREAKER CONTROL DEAD TIME SHOT 1
▼
COLD LOAD PICKUP S4 VIRTUAL INPUTS DEAD TIME SHOT 2
LE 1 ASSERTED
BREAKER FAIL VIRTUAL INPUT 1 DEAD TIME SHOT 3
TRIGGER SOURCE 1
AUTORECLOSE ▼ DEAD TIME SHOT 4
TRIGGER SOURCE 2
SYNCHROCHECK VIRTUAL INPUT 2 RST N/READY TIME
TRIGGER SOURCE 3
... INCOMPLETE SEQ TIME
PICKUP TIME DELAY
VIRTUAL INPUT 32 RESET TIME
DROPOUT TIME DELAY
BLOCK AR
OUTPUT RELAY 3
S4 LOGIC ELEMENTS EXTERNAL INITIATE
...
LOGIC ELEMENT 1 PH IOC1 INITIATE
OUTPUT RELAY 6
LOGIC ELEMENT 2 PH IOC2 INITIATE
BLOCK 1
LOGIC ELEMENT 3 GND IOC1 INITIATE
BLOCK 2
▼ GND IOC2 INITIATE
BLOCK 3
LOGIC ELEMENT 4 NTRL IOC1 INITIATE
... NTRL IOC2 INITIATE
LOGIC ELEMENT 16 S4 BREAKER FAIL PHASE TOC INITIATE
BF FUNCTION GND TOC INITIATE
▼ NTRL TOC INITIATE
S4 BREAKER CONTROL
BF CURRENT NEG SEQ IOC INIT
LOCAL MODE
BF EXT INITIATE NEG SEQ TOC INIT
▼
BF TIME DELAY 1 OUTPUT RELAY 3
RESET
BF TIME DELAY 2 ...
REMOTE OPEN
OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 6
REMOTE CLOSE
... SELECT SETP GROUP
KEYPAD BKR OPEN
KEYPAD BKR CLOSE OUTPUT RELAY 6
S4 AR SHOT 1
S4 CLP BLOCKING S4 AUTORECLOSE PH IOC1 INITIATE
CLP BLK FUNCTION AR SETUP ▼
▼ AR SHOT 1 BLOCK PH IOC1
OUTAGE TIME AR SHOT 2 BLOCK PH IOC2
CLP BLOCKING TIME ▼ BLOCK GND IOC1
CLP EXT INITIATE AR SHOT 3 BLOCK GND IOC2
BLOCK PH IOC1 AR SHOT 4 BLOCK NTRL IOC1
BLOCK PH IOC2
BLOCK NTRL IOC2
BLOCK GND IOC1
BLOCK PH TOC
BLOCK GND IOC2 S4 SYNCHRO CHECK
BLOCK GND TOC
BLOCK NTRL IOC1 FUNCTION
BLOCK NTRL TOC
BLOCK NTRL IOC2 ▼
BLOCK NEG SEQ IOC
BLOCK NEG SEQ IOC DEAD BUS LEVEL
BLOCK NEG SEQ TOC
RAISE PH TOC PKP LIVE BUS LEVEL
RAISE GND TOC PKP DEAD LINE LEVEL
RAISE NTRL TOC PKP LIVE LINE LEVEL
RAISE NSEQ TOC PKP MAX VOLT DIFFERENCE
OUTPUT RELAY 3 MAX ANGLE DIFFERENCE
... MAX FREQUENCY SLIP
OUTPUT RELAY 6 BREAKER CLOSING TIME
898767A3. cdr
SELECT SETP GROUP DEAD CONDITIONS
SYNCHRO BYPASS
SYNCHRO CHECK BLOCK
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6

S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Change setpoint group

The 350 relay has two identical setpoint groups- Group 1 and Group 2 for all protection
elements. Switching between these two groups is available automatically by assigning an
input (contact, virtual, remote, logic element), or via communications.
Group 1 is the default setpoint group. The relay can automatically switch from Group 1
protections to Group 2 protections, and vice versa, by setting up the switching conditions
under “Change Setpoint Group”. Under some application conditions, such as an
overcurrent element pick up, it may not be desirable to change setpoint groups. A setpoint
change can also be prevented if the breaker is open, so that a fault detected before a
reclosure will not cause a group change while the breaker is open. In such cases, the user
can set a condition under “BLK GROUP CHANGE”, where if asserted, the active setpoint
group will stay active, even if the input configured to switch to the other setpoint group is
asserted. For example if the active group was Group 1 at the time of a trip, the breaker
opens, and the input configured under “BLK GROUP CHANGE” is asserted, the relay will
maintain Setpoint Group 1, even if the input “SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE” is asserted. Vice versa,
if the “BLK GROUP CHANGE” input is asserted; the relay will not switch from Group 2 to
Group 1, even if the input under “SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE” is de-asserted.
The relay will default to Setpoint Group 1, if both the input “SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE” and the
blocking input “BLK GROUP CHANGE” are de-asserted.
Switching from Group 1 to Group 2 can be also initiated by the Autoreclose, or the Cold
Load Pickup functions. If the setpoint group selected in the Autoreclosure menu is different
from the active setpoint group, then the Autoreclosure function will force the relay to apply
the Autoreclosure selected setpoint group. The Autoreclosure function will then apply the
AR shot settings to the corresponding protections. The relay will revert to the previous
setpoint group after detecting the Autoreclosure resets.
Similarly, if “Enabled” and not blocked by the Autoreclosure, the Cold Load Pickup function
will force the relay to apply the protections of the other setpoint group, if the one selected
under the CLP menu is different from this, being in-service. The relay will revert to the
setpoint group used originally, after the CLP blocking function resets.
PATH: CONTROLS > CHANGE SPNT GROUP
SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting selects an input used to change from Setpoint Group 1 to Setpoint Group 2,
when asserted. If no group change supervision is selected, Setpoint group 2 will stay
active as long as the “SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE” input is asserted, and will revert to Group 1,
when this input is de-asserted.
BLOCK GROUP CHANGE
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting defines an input that can be used to block changing setpoint groups. When
the assigned input is asserted, changing from one setpoint group to the other one is
blocked.

SETPOINT
SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE
Off
LED: Setpoint Group 2
AND
Autoreclose
Use Setpoint Group 2
OR
Setpoint Group 2
OR

Cold Load Pickup
Setpoint Group 2
SETPOINT
AND
BLK GROUP CHANGE
Off
Figure 6-45: Switching setpoint groups - Logic diagram
AND
ACTUAL VALUES
Group 1 Active
LED: Setpoint Group 1
Default to Setpoint Group 1

OR
AND
898791.cdr
6–131
S4 CONTROLS
Virtual inputs
There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input
commands entered via the relay keypad, or by using communication protocols.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > VIRTUAL INPUTS.
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
The state of each virtual input can be controlled under SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROL >
VIRTUAL INPUTS menu. For this purpose, each of the virtual inputs selected for control need
be “Enabled” under SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS, and its type “Self-
Reset” or “Latched” specified.
If Self-Reset type was selected, entering “On” command will lead to a pulse of one
protection pass. To prolong the time of the virtual input pulse, one can assign it as a trigger
source to a Logic Element with a dropout timer set to the desired pulse time. If “Latched”
type is selected, the state of the virtual input will be latched, upon entering “On” command.
Refer to the logic diagram in the S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS chapter for more
details.

Figure 6-46: Virtual inputs scheme logic
ACTUAL VALUES
898774.cdr
V INPUT 1 NAME:
V Input 1 Status
(Operand)
OR
LATCH
R
S
AND AND AND
“Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0"

“Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1"
V INPUT FUNCTION
SETPOINT
SETPOINT
V INPUT 1 TYPE
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
Self-Reset
Latched
Logic elements
The 350 relay has 16 Logic Elements available to build simple logic using the state of any
programmed contact, virtual, or remote input, or from the output operand of a protection,
or control element. Changing the state of any of the assigned inputs used as trigger
sources, will change the state of the Logic Element, unless a blocking input is present. The
logic provides for assigning up to three triggering inputs in an “OR” gate for Logic Element
operation, and up to three blocking inputs in an “OR” gate for defining the block signal.
Pickup and dropout timers are available for delaying Logic Element operation and drop-
out respectively. In addition, the user can define whether to use the “ON”, or “OFF” state of
the programmed element by selecting ASSERTED: “On” or “Off”.

Referring to the Logic Element logic diagram below, the Logic Element can be set to one of
four functions: Control, Alarm, Latched Alarm, or Trip. When Alarm or Latched Alarm is
selected, the output relay #1 (Trip) is not triggered during Logic Element operation. The Trip
output relay will be triggered when Trip is selected as the function, and the Logic Element
operates. The Logic Element function can be also selected as Control, and used with other
relay elements without turning on the “ALARM” and “TRIP” LEDs.
The “PICKUP” LED will turn on upon a Logic Element pickup condition except when the
Logic Element function is selected as Control.
The “ALARM” LED will turn on upon Logic Element operation if the Logic Element function
selected is either Alarm, or Latched Alarm.
The “TRIP” LED will turn on upon Logic Element operation if the Logic Element function is
selected as Trip.
The option to trigger auxiliary output relays is provided for any of the selected Logic
Element functions.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > S4 LOGIC ELEMENTS
LE1(16) FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Control, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
This setting defines the use of the Logic Element. When Trip is selected as a function, the
Logic Element will trigger Output Relay # 1 (Trip) upon operation.
LE1(16) ASSERTED
Range: On, Off
Default: Off
This setting defines the Logic Element state “On” or “Off” to be used as an output. The
asserted “On” selection provides an output “high” when the LE is "On". If asserted “Off” is
selected, then the LE output will be “high”, when the LE is “Off”.
TRIGGER SOURCE 1, 2, 3
Range: Off, Any input from the list of inputs
Default: Off
Each of the three trigger sources is configurable by allowing the assigning of an input
selected from a list of inputs. This input can be a contact input, a virtual input, a remote
input, or an output flag from a protection, or control element. See the list of available
inputs from the table below.
TRIGGER LOGIC
Range: OR, AND
Default: OR
This setting defines trigger source operation as either “OR” or “AND”. When set to “OR”
any of the inputs will trigger the Logic Element. When set to “AND” all three sources must
be asserted before the Logic Element is triggered.
PKP TIME DELAY
Range: 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms
Default: 0 ms
This setting specifies the pickup time delay before Logic Element operation.
DPO TIME DELAY
Range: 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms
Default: 0 ms
This setting specifies the time delay from a reset timer that starts upon expiry of the
pickup time delay and prolongs the operation of the Logic Element until this time expires.

OUTPUT RELAYS 3 to 6
Any or all of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon a Logic Element
operating condition. The selection of auxiliary relay outputs is available no matter
whether the Control, Alarm, Latched Alarm, or Trip function is selected.
BLOCK 1, 2, 3
Range: Off, Any input from the list of inputs
Default: Off
Each of the three blocks is configurable by allowing the assigning of an input selected
from a list of inputs. This input can be a contact input, a virtual input, a remote input, or
an output flag from a protection, or control element, as well as an input from any of the
other seven logic inputs. See the list of available inputs from the table below
BLOCK LOGIC
Range: OR, AND
Default: OR
This setting defines block source operation as either “OR” or “AND”. When set to “OR” any
of the inputs will block the Logic Element. When set to “AND” all three sources must be
asserted before the Logic Element is blocked.
A Logic Element can be used to provide under-voltage supervision when overcurrent
conditions are detected. The logic from the Logic Element below, see figure: Example of
Block Logic setting from EnerVista, shows that overcurrent trip will not be initiated unless
the relay detects either auxiliary or phase under-voltage conditions. In any other cases,
with both under-voltage elements dropped out, Overcurrent trip will not be initiated.
Each Logic Element can include output from another logic element , as shown in the
figure: Example of Block Logic setting from EnerVista.
Figure 6-47: Example of Block Logic setting from EnerVista

6–136
S4 CONTROLS
Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
LATCH
SETPOINT R
OR
LOGIC EL FUNCTION
Disabled = 0
AND
Latched Alarm
Alarm LED: TRIP
OR
Trip
Control
AND
SETPOINT
TRIGGER LOGIC SETPOINT

tPKP
OR OUTPUT RELAY 3
AND Operate OUTPUT RELAY 4
output relays
SETPOINT upon OUTPUT RELAY 5
selection
TRIGGER SOURCE 1
Figure 6-48: Logic Element logic diagram
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Off
TRIGGER SOURCE 2
Off
SETPOINT Event Recorder
TRIGGER SOURCE 3 PKP TIME DELAY Transient Recorder
SETPOINT
Off
LE1 ASSERTED STATE: RST TIME DELAY
tPKP Message
On tPKP
Logic Elem1 OP
AND
SETPOINT Off tRST
BLOCK LOGIC
tPKP
OR
AND Logic Elem1 DPO
SETPOINT
BLOCK 1
LED: PICKUP
Off
BLOCK 2
Logic Elem1 PKP
Off
898755A1.cdr
BLOCK 3
Off

Table 6-12: List of logic inputs

Input Type Input Name
Contact Inputs BKR 52a input (CI1)
BKR 52b input (CI2)
Contact Input 3
Contact Input 4
Contact Input 5
Contact Input 6
Contact Input 7
Contact Input 8
Virtual Inputs Virtual Input 1
Virtual Input 2
Virtual Input 3
Virtual Input 4
Virtual Input 5
Virtual Input 6
Virtual Input 7
Virtual Input 8
Virtual Input 9
Virtual Input 10
Virtual Input 11
Virtual Input 12
Virtual Input 13
Virtual Input 14
Virtual Input 15
Virtual Input 16
Virtual Input 17
Virtual Input 18
Virtual Input 19
Virtual Input 20
Virtual Input 21
Virtual Input 22
Virtual Input 23
Virtual Input 24
Virtual Input 25
Virtual Input 26
Virtual Input 27
Virtual Input 28
Virtual Input 29
Virtual Input 30
Virtual Input 31
Virtual Input 32
Remote Inputs Remote Input 1
Remote Input 2
Remote Input 3
Remote Input 4
Remote Input 5
Remote Input 6

Input Type Input Name

Remote Input 7
Remote Input 8
Remote Input 9
Remote Input 10
Remote Input 11
Remote Input 12
Remote Input 13
Remote Input 14
Remote Input 15
Remote Input 16
Remote Input 17
Remote Input 18
Remote Input 19
Remote Input 20
Remote Input 21
Remote Input 22
Remote Input 23
Remote Input 24
Remote Input 25
Remote Input 26
Remote Input 27
Remote Input 28
Remote Input 29
Remote Input 30
Remote Input 31
Remote Input 32
Logic Elements Logic Element #1
Logic Element #2
Logic Element #3
Logic Element #4
Logic Element #5
Logic Element #6
Logic Element #7
Logic Element #8
Breaker control
The Breaker Control menu is designed to trip and close the breaker from the relay either
remotely (LOCAL MODE setting set to "OFF," or the selected contact input deselected) or
locally (the input from the LOCAL MODE setpoint asserted). While in LOCAL MODE, the
REMOTE OPEN and CLOSE setpoints are not active.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > BREAKER CONTROL

LOCAL MODE
Elements1 to 16
Default: Off
The LOCAL MODE setting places the relay in local mode. The relay is in Remote Mode, if
not forced into Local Mode by this setpoint (i.e. LOCAL MODE set to "OFF," or the selected
input de-asserted).
RESET
Elements1 to 16
Default: Off
The RESET setting resets the latched alarm or Trip LEDs, and the latched relays.
REMOTE OPEN
Elements1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting specifies the input which when asserted, initiates a trip (output relay #1 TRIP
energized) and opens the breaker.
REMOTE CLOSE
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting specifies the input which when asserted initiates a close (output relay #2
CLOSE energized) and closes the breaker.
KEYPAD BKR OPEN
Range: Yes, No
Default: No
This setting provides flexibility to the user to open the breaker from the keypad. Selecting
“Yes” will introduce a pulse of 100ms to the "trip" output relay. The setting is active, when
the selected input under LOCAL MODE setpoint is asserted
KEYPAD BKR CLOSE
Range: Yes, No
Default: No
This setting provides flexibility to the user to close the breaker from the keypad. Selecting
“Yes” will introduce a pulse of 100ms to the "close" output relay. The setting is active,
when the selected input under LOCAL MODE setpoint is asserted
By default, the breaker control mode is set to "Remote" ( LOCAL MODE set to "OFF"). In this
mode, only the REMOTE OPEN and REMOTE CLOSE setpoints are active. The rest of the
setpoints with exception of the RESET setpoint are deactivated, regardless of the status of
their selected inputs.
Local Mode is set if the input for the LOCAL MODE setpoint is asserted. In this mode, the
REMOTE OPEN and REMOTE CLOSE setpoints are deactivated, regardless of the status of
their selected inputs. Breaker Open and Breaker Close commands from the KEYPAD BKR
OPEN and KEYPAD BKR CLOSE setpoints will be active, if the breaker operation is set to
Local Mode (i.e. the selected input under the LOCAL MODE setpoint asserted).
Cold load pickup

The 350 can be programmed to block the instantaneous over-current elements, and raise
the pickup level of the time over-current elements, when a cold load condition is detected.
The cold load condition is detected during closing of the breaker on a feeder that has been

de-energized for a long time. The feeder inrush current and the motor accelerating current
during breaker closing may be above some over-current protection settings. The diagram
shows the slow decaying of the cold load current starting at about 500% of the nominal
current at the time of breaker closing, decaying down to 300% after 1 second, 200% after
2 seconds, and 150% after 3 seconds.
Figure 6-49: Cold load pickup
500
Current (% of nominal)
400
300
NORMAL TRIP SETTING
200
X
PICKUP PICKUP
100
OUTAGE
0
-1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Time (seconds)
LOAD ENERGIZED 898750.CDR
The relay detects Cold Load condition (Cold Load Pickup armed), if the currents on all three
phases drop below 3% of the CT nominal rating for the period of time greater, than the
Outage Time Before Cold Load setting. The Cold Load condition can be immediately
initiated (Outage Time Before Cold Load timer bypassed), by asserting a contact input
selected for External CLP Initiate.
The second timer Cold Load Pickup Block is used to specify the time of blocking the
instantaneous over-current elements, and the time of raised pickup levels of the time over-
current elements, after breaker closing. The timer starts when at least one of the three
phase currents is above 10% of CT nominal. Upon timer expiration, the settings return to
normal.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > COLD LOAD PICKUP
CLP BLK FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
If set to Alarm, the alarm LED will flash upon detection of Cold Load Pickup condition,
and will turn off upon clearing the condition. If Latched Alarm setting is selected, the
alarm LED will flash during the Cold Load Pickup condition, and will remain ON, when the
condition is cleared. The Alarm LED turns OFF upon manual or remote reset command.
OUTAGE TIME
Range: 1 to 1000 min in steps of 1 min
Default: 20 min
This timer starts when the feeder is de-energized (currents drop below 3% of CT
nominal). The Cold Load Pickup is armed after its time expiration.

CLP BLOCKING TIME

Range: 1 to 1000 sec in steps of 1 sec
Default: 5 s
This setting sets the time of blocking for the selected instantaneous overcurrent
elements, and the time of raised pickup level of the time overcurrent elements. This timer
starts when currents bigger than 10% of CT nominal are detected.
CLP EXT INITIATE
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic Input 1
to 16
Default: Off
This setting allows the user to select Contact Input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic
Element, and force the CLP element into the Cold Load Pickup armed state, bypassing
the timer Outage Time Before Pickup.
BLOCK PH IOC1(2)/ BLOCK GND [S.GND] IOC1(2)/ BLOCK NTRL IOC1(2) / BLOCK NEG SEQ
IOC
Range: No, Yes
Default: No
Each instantaneous over-current element from the list can be selected for block or not,
upon cold load pickup condition.
RAISE PH TOC PKP/ RAISE GND [S.GND] TOC PKP/ RAISE NTRL TOC PKP/RAISE NSEQ TOC
PKP
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1%
Default: 0%
The pickup level of each time over-current element from the list can be raised by 0 to
100%, upon cold load pickup condition.
OUTPUT RELAYS 3 to 6
Each of the output relays can be programmed to operate when cold load pickup
function is armed.
SELECT SETP GROUP
Range: Active Group, SP Group 1 Active, SP Group 2 Active
Default: Active Group
The CLP blocking function will block the IOC, and adjust the TOC pickup levels for the
over-current elements from whichever Setting Group is active, if the setting Active Group
is selected.

6–142
Command
RESET
S4 CONTROLS
SETPOINT
OUTAGE TIME BEFORE
COLD LOAD LED: ALARM
AND
AUTORECLOSE ACTIVE ENABLE RESET
AND
LATCH
OR
Ia < 3% CT
Ib < 3% CT RUN
AND
Cold Load
SETPOINT
Ic < 3% CT
Pickup SETPOINT
BLOCK TIME COLD LOAD
armed OUTPUT RELAY 3
OR
(External Input) ENABLE
Operate
SETPOINT output relays OUTPUT RELAY 4
AND
upon OUTPUT RELAY 5
CLP INITIATE
selection
Ia < 10% CT
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OR
Ib < 10% CT RUN
Ic < 10% CT
SETPOINT
Record Event
CLP FUNCTION:
Message
Disabled
Cold Load PKP Blk
AND
Alarm
OR
Latched Alarm
AND
SETPOINT SETPOINT
Raise
BLOCK PH IOC1 RAISE PH TOC PKP
AND
Block Pickup
AND
Yes = 1, No = 0 Raise by Percent
SETPOINT
SETPOINT
Figure 6-50: Cold load pickup logic diagram
BLOCK PH IOC2 Block

AND
RAISE NTRL TOC PKP Raise

Yes = 1, No = 0
AND
Pickup
Raise by Percent
SETPOINT
BLOCK NTRL IOC1 Block
AND
SETPOINT
Yes = 1, No = 0 Raise
RAISE GND/S.GND TOC PKP
AND
Pickup
SETPOINT Raise by Percent
BLOCK NTRL IOC2 Block

AND
Yes = 1, No = 0 SETPOINT
Raise
RAISE NEG SEQ TOC PKP
AND
SETPOINT Pickup
Raise by Percent
BLOCK GND.S.GND IOC1
Block
AND
Yes = 1, No = 0
SETPOINT
Select
SETPOINT Select Setpoint Group
AND
Group
BLOCK GND.S.GND IOC2 Group No.
Block
AND
Yes = 1, No = 0
SETPOINT
BLOCK NEG SEQ IOC
Block
AND
898706A2.cdr
Yes = 1, No = 0

Breaker failure
The Breaker Failure function monitors the phase currents, after a trip command from the
protection elements is initiated. If any phase current is above the set current level after the
BF DELAY time expires, a breaker failure will be declared, and will operate the selected
output relays. The Breaker failure scheme provides also an external input to initiate
breaker failure via Contact Input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > BREAKER FAIL
BF FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
If set to Alarm, the alarm LED will flash upon detection of Breaker Failure condition, and
will turn off upon clearing the condition. If Latched Alarm setting is selected, the alarm
LED will flash during the Breaker Failure condition, and will remain ON, when the
condition is cleared. The Alarm LED turns OFF upon manual or remote reset command.
BF CURRENT
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting selects the current level to be monitored by the BF logic, after the
programmed time delays.
BF EXT INITIATE
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting allows the user to select Contact Input, Virtual or Remote Input, Logic
Element to initiate the Breaker Failure logic.
BF TIME DELAY 1
Range: 0.03 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.10 s
This timer starts when breaker trip command is issued from any of the protection
elements.
BF TIME DELAY 2
Range: 0.00 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00 s
This timer does not start until a trip condition is recognized, BF TIMER DELAY 1 has
expired, and at least one of the phase currents is above the BF CURRENT setting.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Each of the output relays can be programmed to operate upon detection of breaker
failure.

6–144
S4 CONTROLS
Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
LATCH
SETPOINT
R
OR
BF FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
AND
Latched Alarm
OR
Alarm Message
Breaker Failure
Event Recorder
Transient Recorder
Figure 6-51: Breaker failure logic diagram
SETPOINT
Phase Currents BF CURRENT:

SETPOINT
SETPOINT
Phase A current (Ia) Ia > PICKUP OUTPUT RELAY 3
BF TIME DELAY 2
Phase B current (Ib) Ib > PICKUP RUN
OR
output relays
AND
upon OUTPUT RELAY 5
tPKP
Phase C current (Ic) Ic > PICKUP selection
OUTPUT RELAY 6
From Protection operation
Trip
SETPOINT
SETPOINT BF TIME DELAY 1

RUN
OR
BF EXT INITIATE
tPKP
Off = 0 898001.cdr
Range: Contact Input,
Virtual Input, Remote Input,
Logic Element

Autorecloser
The automatic recloser is intended for use on single three-pole tripping breaker
applications. Up to four reclosing “shots” can be programmed with independent set of
protection elements for initiation, and individual dead time prior to each subsequent shot.
A typical example for selection of individual set of overcurrent protection elements for
initiation is the selection of instantaneous overcurrent protections for the first AR initiation,
and selection of time overcurrent protections after the first reclose. This would provide
longer time before the breaker opens, and allow the fuses to burn off, if the fault is still
present.
To synchronize the Reclose function with the breaker status feedback, it is recommended
NOTE:
that a debounce of 2 cycles is used, regardless of whether the breaker status is detected
NOTE using one or both contacts.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > AUTORECLOSE > AR SETUP
AR FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
This setting enables or disables the Autorecloser function.
NUMBER OF SHOTS
Range: 1 to 4, step 1
Default: 1
The maximum number of reclosures that will be attempted before AR Not Ready.
DEAD TIME SHOT 1 to 4
Range: 0.1 to 600.0 s, step 0.1 s
Default: 1.0 s
This setting specifies the dead time delay before each reclosure. Four time delay settings
are to be configured and used to time out before the first, second, third, or fourth
breaker reclosure.
RST N/READY TIME
Range: 0.1 to 600.0 s, step 0.1 s
Default: 10 s
This setting specifies the reset AR Not Ready time. Upon breaker close, the timer times
out, and resets the AR lockout.
INCOMP SEQ TIME
Range: 0.1 to 600.0 s, step 0.1 s
Default: 5.0 s
This timer is used to set the maximum time interval allowed for single reclosure shot. The
timer starts timing out for both situations: upon AR initiate to open the breaker, where
the breaker doesn’t open, or whenever breaker reclose command is issued, where the
breaker doesn’t close. Upon incomplete sequence time expiry, the AR goes into AR Not
Ready mode.
RESET TIME
Range: 0.1 to 600.0 s, step 0.1 s
Default: 5.0 s
This time is used to reset the AR into AR ready mode after successful reclosure. If no
breaker tripping occurs within the reset time, the AR shot counter is reset.

BLOCK AR
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input1 to 32, Remote Input1 to 32, Logic
Elements1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting provides selection for contact input, virtual input, remote input, or logic
element to block off the AR scheme.
EXT INITIATE
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting provides selection for contact input, virtual input, remote input, or logic
element to initiate the AR scheme.
PH IOC1/2 INITIATE
Range: Off/On
Default: Off
When set to “On,” the operation of this element initiates the AR sequence.
GND [S.GND] IOC1/2 INITIATE
Range: Off/On
Default: Off
NTRL IOC1/2 INITIATE
Range: Off/On
Default: Off
PHASE TOC INITIATE
Range: Off/On
Default: Off
NTRL TOC INITIATE
Range: Off/On
Default: Off
GND [S.GND] TOC INITIATE
Range: Off/On
Default: Off
NSEQ TOC INITIATE
Range: Off/On
Default: Off
When set to “ON,” the operation of this element initiates the AR sequence.
AR READY - RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays can be selected to operate upon Autoreclose Status
detected as “AR READY”.

AR IN-PROGR - RELAY 3 to 6
detected as “AR IN-PROGRESS”.
AR N/READY - RELAY 3 to 6
detected as “AR LOCKOUT”.
SELECT SETP GROUP
Range: Active group, SP Group 1 Active, SP Group 2 Active
Default: SP Group 1 Active
The Autoreclose function will be executed in the setpoint group selected as a setting in
“SELECT SETP GROUP”, or in the active setpoint group if the setting “Active Group” is
selected.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > AUTORECLOSE > AR SHOT 1(4)
BLOCK PH IOC1/2 Shot 1 to 4
Range: Off/On
Default: Off
If set to “On” for the selected shot, the operation of the element will initiate breaker trip
after the corresponding breaker reclosing shot.
BLOCK NTRL IOC1/2 Shot 1 to 4
Range: Off/On
Default: Off
BLOCK GND/S.GND IOC1/2 Shot 1 to 4
Range: Off/On
Default: Off
BLOCK PH TOC Shot 1 to 4
Range: Off/On
Default: Off
If set to “On” for the selected shot, the operation of the element will initiate a breaker trip
BLOCK GND TOC Shot 1 to 4
Range: Off/On
Default: Off

BLOCK NSEQ TOC Shot 1 to 4

Range: Off/On
Default: Off
If set to “ON” for the selected shot, the operation of the element will initiate a breaker trip
BLOCK NTRL TOC Shot 1 to 4
Range: Off/On
Default: Off

SETPOINT SETPOINT
AR FUNCTION AR DEAD TIME 1
Disabled=0 STATUS AND t, sec

Enabled=1 AR OUT OF 0
SERVICE
STATUS SETPOINT
AR BLOCK AR DEAD TIME 2
SHOT COUNTER = 0
STATUS AND t, sec
INPUT AR READY 0
AND SHOT COUNTER = 1 SETPOINT
AR BLOCK CB close
Disabled=0 STATUS (command) INCOMP SEQ. TIME:
SHOT COUNTER = 2 SETPOINT
AND AR IN PROGRESS
OR TO INCOMPLETE
AR DEAD TIME 3 t, sec
AND 0 SEQUENCE TIME
SHOT COUNTER = 3
AND t, sec
0
AND
SETPOINT

AR DEAD TIME 4
AND AND
AND CB open
t, sec
SET
(command)
S Q 0
SETPOINT
R CLR Q
MAX NUMBER OF SHOTS
1..4
OR
AND OR
AND >= TO SHOT
COUNTER = MAX
SHOT COUNTER
SETPOINT SHOT COUNTER++

AR INITIATE SHOT COUNTER = 0
Disabled=0
Figure 6-52: Autoreclose logic diagram
INPUT
AND
BRK CLOSED
AND
CLOSED = 1 AND
OPENED = 0 SETTING
FROM SHOT
COUNTER = MAX
AR RESET TIME
AND
AND 0
OR t, sec
AND
AND
SETPOINT
INCOMP SEQ. TIME:
OR t, sec STATUS
AND 0
AR LOCKOUT
SETPOINT
OR
RESET LOCKOUT
DELAY
AND seg
0
AND
FROM INCOMPLETE
SEQUENCE TIME
AND
AR READY
Task Time (5-10 ms)
AR BLOCK AND ms
0 898000.cdr
AR IN PROGRESS
AR OUT OF SERVICE
6–149
S4 CONTROLS
The Automatic Reclosure function is designed to perform up to four breaker

autoreclosings, with a configurable dead time before each reclosing shot. Upon AR
function enabled, and breaker status “closed”, the AR is set into “AR Ready” state. If an
intermittent feeder fault occurs such as overhead conductor touching tree branch, one or
more of the overcurrent protection elements enabled under AR initiate menu will operate
and issue a breaker trip command. If the breaker opens, the dead time configured under
the first AR shot will start timing out. After this time expires, the AR scheme will produce the
first breaker reclosing shot. Upon breaker close and no fault conditions, the overcurrent
elements set for initiation on the first AR shot will not operate, and the reclosing is declared
successful. The remaining of the configured AR sequence will be executed. The AR Reset
time will start timing out, where upon time expiry resets the AR counter. The AR sequence is
reset with AR function into “AR Ready” state.
If the fault is permanent, the configured AR sequence will be executed in full, where the
breaker opens after the last reclosing shot and the AR function goes into lockout.
The reclosure scheme passes through the following states during operation:
AR NOT READY: When in this state, the AR is blocked. The AR NOT READY occurs if any of
the following conditions are present:
• The maximum shot number was reached.
• The incomplete sequence AR INCOM SEQ TIME timer times out.
• The AR BLOCK INPUT is set
AR READY: To reach this state the AR RESET NOT READY timer times out from NOT READY
state or the AR RESET TIME timer times out from WAIT RST TIME state. In this state the
autorecloser is waiting for reclose Initiation (RI) event to start the reclosure process.
WAIT FOR 52 OPEN: Once a Reclose Initiation event occurs the autorecloser is waiting for
breaker status OPEN or otherwise the AR INCOM SEQ TIME timer will time out. If the AR
INCOM SEQ TIME expires, the autorecloser will go into NOT READY state. However if the
breaker opens, the AR scheme will start the configured DEAD TIME timer, and will be put
into WAIT DEAD TIME state.
WAIT DEAD TIME: In this state the autorecloser is waiting for the relevant AR DEAD TIME
SHOT timer to time out. If during this time out the breaker status changes to CLOSE, a
Reclose Initiation or an AR BLOCK input occurs the autorecloser process ends in a NOT
READY state. If not, the WAIT FOR 52 CLOSE state is reached.
WAIT FOR 52 CLOSE: In this state upon reclosing command, the autorecloser is waiting for
the breaker to CLOSE. If the AR INCOM SEQ TIME timer times out or a new Reclose Initiation
occurs and it’s the last shot then the autorecloser ends in a NOT READY state. If a new
Reclose Initiation occurs and it is not the last from the programmed sequence, the
autorecloser goes into the WAIT FOR 52 OPEN status.
WAIT RESET TIME: In this state, when the AR RST TIME timer times out the number of shots
is reset and the autorecloser goes into AR READY state waiting for a new AR execution.If
the breaker status changes to OPEN or an AR BLOCK input occurs, or a new Reclose
Initiation happens and it’s the last shot then the autorecloser ends in a NOT READY state.
If a new Reclose Initiation different from the last shot occurs the autorecloser goes into the
WAIT FOR 52 OPEN status for the next shot.
Reclose Initiation is produced by a trip with the relevant permission enabled.
Synchrocheck
The Synchrocheck element is used for monitoring the connection of two parts of the circuit
by the close of a breaker. This element verifies that voltages (VL and VB) at both sides of the
breaker are within the magnitude, angle and frequency limits set by the user. VL and VB are
the Line and Busdbar voltage values measured by the device.

Calculated voltages are not suitable for synchrocheck. Under the following conditions,
IMPORTANT:
the Synchrocheck function is disabled:
• Wye is selected under “VT Connection” and a Delta voltage input (Vab VT, Vbc VT,
Vca VT) is selected under “Auxiliary VT input”
• Delta is selected under “VT Connection” and a Wye voltage input (Van VT, Vbn VT,
Vcn VT) is selected under “Auxiliary VT input”
Due to the discrete computation of the analog incoming data measurements, fixed at a
IMPORTANT:
frequency rate of a quarter of power cycle, the next constraint between settings must
be taken into account:
• At 50 Hz: 1.8 x ΔFmax <Max Angle Diff

• At 60 Hz: 1.5 x ΔFmax Angle Diff The non-compliance of this requirement could
cause a synchrocheck close condition out of the limits set by settings.
The non-compliance of this requirement could cause a synchrocheck close condition
out of the limits set by settings.
Synchrocheck (or Synchronism Check (25)) is defined as the comparison of the voltage
difference of two circuits with different sources to be either linked through an impedance
element (transmission line, feeder, etc.), or connected through parallel circuits of defined
impedance. The voltage comparison between both sides of a breaker is performed before
closing the breaker, in order to minimize internal damage that could occur due to the
voltage difference, both in magnitude and angle. This is extremely important in steam
generating plants, where reclosing output lines with angle differences could lead to severe
damage to the turbine axis.
The difference in voltage level and phase angle in a given moment is the result of the
existing load between remote resources connected through parallel circuits (load flux), as
well as a consequence of the impedance of those elements connecting them (even if there
is no load flux in parallel circuits, or because sources to be connected are completely
independent and isolated from one another).
In interconnected systems, the angle difference between both ends of an open breaker is
usually negligible, as its sources are remotely connected through other elements
(equivalent or parallel circuits). However, in isolated circuits as in the case of an
independent generator, the difference in angle, voltage levels and relative slip of voltage
phasors can be very important. It can also be that the relative slip of voltage values is very
low or null so that they will be rarely in phase. Luckily, due to the changing conditions of a
power system (connection-disconnection of loads, sources, and new inductive-capacitive
elements) the relative slip between phasors is not null and they can be synchronized.
In the first case, even if we must take into consideration the length of the line whose ends
(sources) will be connected for determining the angle difference between them, this is not
enough to fix the synchronism conditions before closing the breaker. Experience tells us
that the window of angle difference between voltage phasors must be fixed to a value of
15º to 20º.
VOLTAGE INPUTS
In order to perform the synchrocheck function, the device uses only one voltage from each
end of the breaker. Voltage values to be compared must be on the same basis, either
phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground voltage. Also, they must be the same at both ends of
the breaker. It is not possible to compare a phase-to-ground voltage at one end with a
phase-to-phase voltage at the other end.

Additionally, if on one end, three voltages have been connected, the necessary voltage on
the other end for synchrocheck will only be single-phase voltage. If there is only one
voltage (either phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground) at both ends of the breaker, this must
be the same phase in both cases.
CLOSING PERMISSION LOGIC
If the voltage at one or both ends of the breaker is null, the synchrocheck function cannot
establish the necessary parameters to give conditions for closing, and therefore does not
issue synchrocheck permission. If the user wants to enable the closing permission for
cases where there is a of loss of one or both voltages at both ends of the breaker, the
synchrocheck function incorporates closing permission logic for the following cases.
• Dead Line-Dead Bus,
• Live Line-Dead Bus,
• Dead Line-Live Bus,
• Any Line-Dead Bus,
• Dead Line-Any Bus,
• One Live-Other Dead,
• Not Both Live
LIVE LINE-LIVE BUS CONDITION
In the Live Line-Live Bus case, once the Voltage difference has been successfully verified in
magnitude, the slipping frequency must be checked. If the frequency difference between
Line and Bus Voltages is lower than 30 mHz, then the closing permission is granted, but if
the frequency difference is greater than the Maximum Frequency Slip setting the closing
permission is not granted. Otherwise, the function must check the angle difference by
taking into account the Breaker Closing Time setting.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > SYNCHROCHECK
SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION:
Default: Disabled
This setting enables or disables the Synchrocheck function.
DEAD BUS LEVEL
Range: 0 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.10 x VT
This setting specifies the voltage level considered as the dead Bus.
LIVE BUS LEVEL
Default: 0.50 x VT
This setting specifies the voltage level considered as the live Bus.
DEAD LINE LEVEL
Range: 0 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.10 x VT
This setting specifies the voltage level considered as the dead Line.
LIVE LINE LEVEL
Default: 0.50 x VT
This setting specifies the voltage level considered as the live Line.

MAX VOLT DIFFERENCE

Default: 0.10 x VT
This setting specifies the maximum difference in the module between the line and
busbar voltage to allow the synchrocheck element to close.
MAX ANGLE DIFFERENCE
Range: 2 to 80 degrees in steps of 1
Default: 10 degrees
This setting specifies the maximum difference in angle between the line and busbar
voltage to allow the synchrocheck element to close.
MAX FREQUENCY SLIP
Range: 0.05 to 5.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.05 Hz
This setting specifies the maximum difference in frequency (slip) between the line and
busbar voltage to allow the synchrocheck element to close.
BREAKER CLOSING TIME
Range: 0 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.10 s
This setting specifies the estimated breaker Closing and is used for establishing the
Closing order in a moment that allows the busbar and line voltages to be in phase.
DEAD CONDITIONS
Range: None, DL-DB (Dead Line-Dead Bus), LL-DB (Live Line-Dead Bus), DL-LB (Dead Line-
Live Bus), AL-DB (Any Line-Dead Bus), DL-AB (Dead Line-Any Bus), OL-OD (One Live-Other
Dead), NBL (Not Both Live)
Default: None
For each setpoint value in the Range, this setting enables the Closing permission signal
to be issued as follows:
– Dead Line-Dead Bus: the Closing permission signal is issued for a dead line and
dead bus Condition (without voltage at both sides of the breaker).
– Live Line-Dead Bus: the Closing permission signal is issued for a live line and dead
bus Condition (without voltage at the side of the breaker that correspond to the
busbar voltage).
– Dead Line-Live Bus: the Closing permission signal is issued for a dead line and live
line voltage).
– Any Line-Dead Bus: the Closing permission signal is issued for any line but dead
bus voltage).
– Dead Line-Any Bus: the Closing permission signal is issued for any bus but a dead
line Condition (without voltage at the side of the breaker that correspond to the
line voltage).
– One Live-Other Dead: the Closing permission signal is issued if bus and line
Condition are different.
– Not Both Live: for if bus and line Condition are not both live.

SYNCHRO BYPASS
Range: Off, On, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting allows the user to bypass the Synchrocheck function by force by selecting
On, Contact Input, Virtual Input, or Remote Input.
SYNCHRO CHECK BLOCK
Range: Off, On, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting allows the user to select Contact Input, Virtual Input, or Remote Input and
force the Synchronism Check block.
OUTPUT RELAYS 3-6
Each of the output relays can be programmed to operate when the Sync Close Op
element is set.

SETPOINT
BYPASS = 1
AND
STATUS Measure value
<
Breaker Status OPEN=1 abs(Angline-Angbus)
AND
abs(Vline-Vbus) SETPOINT Internal Calculation
SETPOINT Message/Event Recorder
AND
Max Angle Diff Internal Calculation - New Angle Diff
BLOCK = 1 abs(Freqline-Freqbus)
Synchrocheck Close OP
AND
Break Close Time Angle Correction =
OR
0 Value
SETPOINT SETPOINT <

FUNCTION Enabled = 1 Message Max Voltage Diff
Dead Bus >= Live Bus
AND
Max Frequency Slip
AND
AND
>= <
Message
AND
Dead Line >= Live Line Internal Value
AND
<
Min Frequency Slip
>=
SETPOINT

Dead Bus Level
Live Bus Level
DL-DB
AND
SETPOINT
Dead Line Level
Live Line Level LL-DB
AND
Aux(Bus) Voltage Input
Dead Bus
Vaux Voltage <= SETPOINTS:

DL-LB OUTPUT RELAY 3
AND
SETPOINT Line Voltage Inputs Live Bus
Figure 6-53: Synchrocheck Logic diagram

OR
Aux VT Input > output relays

OUTPUT RELAY 5
upon
Van VT Van Line Voltage selection
ANYL-DB OUTPUT RELAY 6
Vbn VT Vbn Line Voltage
AND
Message/Event Recorder OUTPUT RELAY 7
Vcn VT Vcn Line Voltage Dead Line
Synchrocheck Cond
Vab VT Vab Line Voltage
<=
Message/
Vbc VT Vbc Line Voltage DL-ANYB Event Recorder
AND Synchrocheck OP
Vca VT Vca Line Voltage Live Line
>
DL-LB
SETPOINT
AND
Dead Line-Dead Bus ONEL-OTHERD

OR
LiveLine-Dead Bus
Dead Line-Live Bus

898842A1.cdr
AND
ANY Live-Dead Bus LL-DB
Dead Line-ANY Bus
ONE Live-OTHER Dead

NOT BOTH L
NOT BOTH Live
AND
6–155
S4 CONTROLS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S5 Inputs/Outputs
Figure 6-54: Main inputs/outputs menu
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS S5 CONTACT INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS SELECT DC VOLTAGE
VIRTUAL INPUTS ▼
CONTACT INPUT 1 S5 CONTACT INPUT 1
CONTACT INPUT 2 DEBOUNCE TIME
CONTACT INPUT 3
...
CONTACT INPUT 10[8] S5 CONTACT INPUT 10[8]
DEBOUNCE TIME
S5 OUTPUT RELAYS
RLY 1 TRIP S5 RELAY 1 TRIP
RLY 2 CLOSE RLY 1 SEAL-IN
RLY 3 AUXILIARY BLOCK RLY 1 TRIP
▼
RLY 4 AUXILIARY
S5 RELAY 2 CLOSE
RLY 5 AUXILIARY
RLY 2 SEAL-IN
RLY 6 AUXILIARY
BLOCK RLY 2 CLOSE
S5 RELAY 6 AUXILIARY
OUTPUT TYPE
S5 VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 S5 VIRTUAL INPUT 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 2 VI 1 FUNCTION
VIRTUAL INPUT 3 ▼
▼ V INPUT 1 TYPE
VIRTUAL INPUT 4
...
VIRTUAL INPUT 32 S5 VIRTUAL INPUT 32
VI 32 FUNCTION
▼
898768A1.cdr V INPUT 32 TYPE
Contact inputs
The 350 relay is equipped with eight (8) contact inputs, which can be used to provide a
variety of functions such as for circuit breaker control, external trips, blocking of protection
elements, etc. All contact inputs are wet type contacts (refer to the 350 typical wiring
diagram) that require an external DC voltage source. The voltage threshold (17V, 33V, 84V,
166V) is selectable, and it applies for all eight contact inputs.
The contact inputs are either open or closed with a programmable debounce time to
prevent false operation from induced voltage. Because of de-bouncing, momentary
contacts must have a minimum dwell time greater than half power frequency cycle. The
debounce time is adjustable by the user.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > CONTACT INPUTS
SELECT DC VOLTAGE
Range: 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
Default: 84 V

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
52a BKR INPUT 1

Range: Select alpha-numeric name
Default: 52a (CI#1)
52b BKR INPUT 2
Default: 52b (CI#2)
CONTACT INPUT X [3 to 10]
Default: Input X
DEBOUNCE TIME
↘
CONTACT INPUT X [1 TO 10]
Range: 1 to 64 ms
Default: 2 ms
Each of the contact inputs 3 to 8, can be named to reflect the function it represents within
the application. Up to 18 alpha-numeric characters are available for names.
The debounce time is used to discriminate between oscillating inputs. The state will be
recognized if the input is maintained for a period consisting of the protection pass plus the
debounce setting.
Contact Input 1 and Contact Input 2 are named by the factory as 52a and 52b respectively
NOTE:
and are used for monitoring the breaker open/close state when wired to the breakers
NOTE auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b.
Output relays
The 350 relay is equipped with seven electromechanical output relays: two special relays
designated for Breaker Trip and Close (Relay 1 “Trip”, Relay 2 “Close”), four general purpose
relays (Auxiliary Relays 3 to 6), and one Critical Failure relay for fail-safe relay indication.
The special purpose relays have fixed operating characteristics and the general purpose
relays can be configured by the user. Logic diagrams for each output relay are provided for
detailed explanation of their operation.
Operation of these breaker-control relays is designed to be controlled by the state of the
circuit breaker as monitored by a 52a or 52b contact.
• The Trip and Close relays reset after the breaker is detected in a state corresponding
to the command. When a relay feature sends a command to one of these special
relays, it will remain operational until the requested change of breaker state is
confirmed by a breaker auxiliary contact and the initiating condition has reset.
• If the initiating feature resets, but the breaker does not change state, the output relay
will be reset after a default interval of 2 seconds.
• If neither of the breaker auxiliary contacts, 52a nor 52b, is programmed to a logic
input, the Trip Relay is de-energized after either the delay programmed in the Breaker
Failure feature, or a default interval of 100 ms after the initiating input resets. The
Close Relay is de-energized after 200 ms.
• If a delay is programmed for the Trip or Close contact seal-in time, then this delay is
added to the reset time. Note that the default setting for the seal-in time is 40 ms.

52a Contact 52b Contact Relay Operation

Configured Configured
Yes Yes Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an
Yes No Trip Relay remains operational until 52a indicates an
No Yes Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an
open breaker. Close Relay remains operational until 52b
No No Trip Relay operates until either the Breaker Failure delay
expires (if the Breaker Failure element is enabled), or 100
ms after the feature causing the trip resets. Close Relay
operates for 200 ms.
Output Relay 1 "Trip" The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RELAY 1 TRIP
SEAL IN TIME
Default: 0.04 s
This setting defines the time to be added to the reset time of the Relay 1 Trip output, thus
extending its pulse width. This is useful for those applications where the 52 contacts
reporting the breaker state are faster than the 52 contacts that are responsible for
interrupting the coil current.
BLOCK RLY 1 TRIP
Range: Disabled, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Disabled
This setting defines a block to the Trip Output relay. When the selected input is asserted,
the Trip Output relay will be blocked.

SETPOINT (BREAKER)
52b CONTACT
Contact input
AND
LED: BREAKER OPEN
52b contact (Breaker Open = 1)
Breaker Open
OR
SETPOINT (BREAKER)

52a CONTACT
OR
SETPOINT
OR
Contact input No feedback timer
AND
change Trip Output Seal-In time
2 sec
AND
52a contact (Breaker Close = 1)
AND tRST
SETPOINT
BLOCK TRIP RLY
Figure 6-55: Relay 1 "TRIP" logic diagram
Disbaled = 0 At least one

contact LED: TRIP
OR
(Selected Input, ON = 1)
AND
programmed
OR
Relay ( Ready = 1)
OR
TRIP
OR
OR
(TRIP)
TRIP
AND
TRIP (Protection, Controls) TRIP
To Breaker Failure
Local Open (Relay Keypad)
Trip request
timed reset
OR
Remote Open timer
RUN
100 ms
LED: TRIP
SETPOINT (BF)
RESET (Relay Keypad)
BF FUNCTION:
SETPOINT (BF)
RESET (Communications) Disabled = 0
BF TIME DELAYS
OR
Latched Alarm
OR
RUN
OR
RESET (Input)
898775.cdr
Alarm
AND
Breaker Control
tRST
6–159
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Output Relay 2 PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RELAY 2 CLOSE
"Close" SEAL IN TIME
Default: 0.04 s
This setting defines the time to be added to the reset time of the Relay 2 Close output,
thus extending its pulse width. This is useful for those applications where the 52 contacts
reporting the breaker state are faster than the 52 contacts that are responsible for
interrupting the coil current.
BLOCK RLY 2 CLOSE
Range: Disabled, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Disabled
This setting defines a block to the Close Output relay. When the selected input is
asserted, the Close Output relay will be blocked. The block function can be useful for
breaker maintenance purposes.

SETPOINT (BREAKER)
52a CONTACT
Contact input
AND
LED: BREAKER CLOSED
52a contact (Breaker Closed = 1)
Breaker Closed
OR

SETPOINT (BREAKER)
52b CONTACT
OR
OR
Contact input No feedback timer
AND
change RUN
2 sec
AND
52b contact (Breaker Open = 1)
SETPOINT
Close Output Seal-In time

AND
tRST
At least one
Figure 6-56: Relay 2 "CLOSE" logic diagram
OR
contact
AND
programmed
CLOSE
SETPOINT
OR
BLOCK CLOSE RLY
OR
Disbaled = 0 CLOSE (CLOSE)
OR
(Selected Input, ON = 1)
timed reset
OR
AND
Relay Status ( Ready = 1)
Close request
Local Close (Relay Keypad)

timer
RUN
200 ms
OR
Remote Close
Breaker Failure
AND
OR
Autoreclose In-Progress
898776.cdr
AND
Autoreclose
6–161
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Auxiliary Output The 350 relay is equipped with four auxiliary output relays numbered from 3 to 6. All these
Relays 3 to 6 relays are available for selection for operation of protection, control, or maintenance
features. Each auxiliary relay can be selected as either Self-Reset, or Latched. If the Self-
Reset type is selected, the output relay will be energized as long as the element is in
operating mode and will reset when the element drops out. If the Latched type is selected,
the output relay will stay energized, after the element dropout, and will be de-energized
upon the reset command.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RELAY 3(6) AUXILIARY
OUTPUT TYPE
Range: Self Reset, Latched
Default: Self Reset
Figure 6-57: Auxiliary relays
Message & Event Recorder

Output Relay ( 3 - 6 )
898777.cdr
Operate Aux
OR
OR
AND
AND AND
AND
OR
RESET (Communications)
RESET (Relay Keypad)
OR
Breaker Control
RESET (Input)
RELAY (3-6) AUXILIARY

SETPOINT
From Maintenance Feature

From Protection Feature
assigned aux. outputs:
OUTPUT TYPE
From Control Feature

Relay( Ready = 1)
Self-Reset
Latched

Critical Failure Relay The 350 relay is also equipped with one output relay (# 7 - “Critical Failure Relay”) for fail-
#7 safe indication. There are no user-programmable setpoints associated with this output
relay. The logic for this relay is shown below.
The Critical Failure Relay (Output Relay 7) is a form C contact (refer to the Typical Wiring
Diagram) with one NO and one NC contacts (no control power). Output relay 7 is energized
or de-energized (state change) depending on the following conditions:
1. Output Relay 7 will be de-energized, if the relay is not IN-SERVICE or the control power
is not applied to the relay
2. Output Relay 7 will be energized when the control power is applied to the relay and
the relay is IN-SERVICE mode.
3. Output Relay 7 will stay de-energized, when the control power is applied, if the relay
was not programmed as “Ready”, or upon major self-test failure during relay boot up.
4. Output Relay 7 will change state from energized to de-energized if the 350 relay
experiences any major self-test failure.

Figure 6-58: Output relay 7: Critical Failure Relay
De-energize Output Relay # 7
898778.CDR
(Critical Failure Relay)
To Output Relays 1 to 6
In Service
LED: TROUBLE
LED: IN SERVICE
OR

ANY MAJOR ERROR
(Forces the Relay into “Not Ready” state)
ANY MAJOR ERROR
( Not Ready = 1)
S1 SETPOINTS / S1 RELAY SETUP / S1 INSTALLATION / RELAY STATUS
OR
(See all major errors listed in the

table below)
Major Error XX
Major Error 1
Major Error 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
Virtual inputs
There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input
commands entered via the relay keypad, or by using communication protocols.

PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS

VI x FUNCTION
Range: Disabled/Enabled
Default: Disabled
The Virtual Input is enabled and ready to be triggered when set to Enabled. All virtual
inputs will appear under the S4 CONTROLS > SETPOINTS > S4 VIRTUAL INPUTS menu.
VI x TYPE
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset
When the Self-Reset type is selected, the Virtual Input will be evaluated for one
protection pass only, upon “On” initiation and it will reset. When the Latched type is
selected, the virtual input will keep the state “On” until reset command “Off” is initiated.
See also the Virtual Inputs section under S4 CONTROLS, on how to trigger a virtual input
NOTE:
signal state.
NOTE
Virtual input programming begins with enabling the Virtual Input Function, and selecting
the Virtual Input Type Self-Reset or Latched under SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS >
VIRTUAL INPUTS. Next, the user can assign a command On/Off to the enabled Virtual Input
under SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > S4 VIRTUAL INPUTS. Referring to the Virtual Inputs logic
diagram below, a Virtual Input type can be selected to be either Self-Reset, or Latched.
When Self-Reset is selected and the “On” command is executed, the virtual input is
evaluated as a pulse at a rate of one protection pass. To prolong the time of the virtual
input pulse, one can assign it as a trigger source to a logic element with a dropout timer
set to the desired pulse time. Selecting the Latched type, will latch the virtual input state,
when the “On” command is executed.
The "On" state of the Virtual Input will not be retained in the case of cycling of the relay
NOTE:
control power supply.

NOTE

Figure 6-59: Virtual inputs scheme logic
ACTUAL VALUES
898774.cdr
V INPUT 1 NAME:
V Input 1 Status
(Operand)
OR
LATCH
R
S
AND AND AND

“Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0"
“Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1"
V INPUT FUNCTION
SETPOINT
SETPOINT
V INPUT 1 TYPE
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
Self-Reset
Latched
Remote inputs
Remote Inputs are available for programming under the EnerVista SR3 Setup software.

GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 7: Maintenance
Maintenance
Information about the relay and the breaker can be obtained through the features
included in the Maintenance page.

M1 RELAY INFORMATION CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
Figure 7-1: Main maintenance menu
MAINTENANCE
M3 TRIP COIL
M1 RELAY INFO M1 RELAY INFO
TRIP COIL FUNCTION
M3 BKR MAINTENANCE RELAY NAME
▼
M4 BKR MONITOR ▼
TRIP COIL DELAY
▼ ORDER CODE
BYPASS BKR STATUS
M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE MAIN FIRMWARE REV
OUTPUT RELAY 3
M6 FACTORY SERVICE MAIN BUILD DATE
...
MAIN BUILD TIME
OUTPUT RELAY 6
MAIN BOOT REVISION
MAIN BOOT DATE
MAIN BOOT TIME M3 CLOSE COIL
COMM FIRMWARE REV ▼
COMM BUILD DATE CLOSE COIL DELAY
COMM BUILD TIME BYPASS BKR STATUS
COMM BOOT REVISION OUTPUT RELAY 3
COMM BOOT DATE ...
COMM BOOT TIME OUTPUT RELAY 6
SERIAL NUMBER
ETHERNET MAC ADR M3 BKR TRIP COUNTER
FPGA VERSION TRIP COUNT FNCTN
▼
M3 BKR MAINTENANCE INITIAL TRIPS
TRIP COIL TRIP COUNTER LIMIT
CLOSE COIL OUTPUT RELAY 3
BKR TRIP COUNTER ...
▼ OUTPUT RELAY 6
RESET COUNTERS
M3 RESET COUNTERS
M4 BKR MONITOR RST BKR TRIP COUNT
TRIP COIL
▼ M5 AMBIENT TEMP
CLOSE COIL AMBIENT TEMP
BKR TRIP COUNTER ▼
HI ALARM LEVEL
M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE LOW ALARM LEVEL
AMBIENT TEMP HYSTERESIS LEVEL
TIME DELAY
898761A1.cdr OUTPUT RELAY 3
M6 FACTORY SERVICE
...
ENTER FACT. PSWD
OUTPUT RELAY 6
M1 Relay information
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M1 RELAY INFO
RELAY NAME
Range: alpha-numeric name of up to 18 characters
Default: Motor Name
ORDER CODE
350-EP5S5HSMCP3EDN
This screen shows the relay Order Code.

CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M1 RELAY INFORMATION
RMIO
Range: G, GG, GGG
Displays the validated RMIO. This value will be seen only if the RMIO module is installed.
MAIN FIRMWARE REVISION
1.41
This screen shows the relay Main Firmware Revision.
MAIN BUILD DATE
Aug 16 2010
This screen shows the relay Main Firmware Build Date.
MAIN BUILD TIME
15:57:46
This screen shows the relay Main Firmware Build Time.
MAIN BOOT REVISION
1.20
This screen shows the relay Main Boot Code Revision.
MAIN BOOT DATE
Dec 11 2009
This screen shows the relay Main Boot Code Build Date.
MAIN BOOT TIME
10:44:54
This screen shows the relay Main Boot Code Build Time.
COMM HARDWARE REVISION
C
This screen shows the relay Comm Hardware Revision.
COMM FIRMWARE REVISION
1.40
This screen shows the relay Comm Code Revision.
COMM BUILD DATE
Aug 16 2010
This screen shows the relay Comm Code Build Date.
COMM BUILD TIME
16:20:45
This screen shows the relay Comm Code Build Time.
COMM BOOT REVISION
1.30
This screen shows the relay Comm Boot Code Revision.
COMM BOOT TIME
16:22:41
This screen shows the relay Comm Boot Code Build Time.
SERIAL NUMBER
ML0A08999014
Each relay has a unique serial number.
ETHERNET MAC ADR
00:A0F4:00:33:00
This screen shows the Ethernet MAC Address of the relay.

M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
FPGA VERSION
1.00
This screen shows the FPGA Version.
M3 Breaker maintenance
Trip coil
The Trip coil monitoring is performed by a built-in voltage monitor on the Form A output
relay: #1 Trip. The voltage monitor is connected across the Form A contact, and effectively
the relay detects healthy current through the circuit. To do that, an external jumper must
be made between terminals “A2” and “A3” for Trip coil monitoring.
Trip coil is effectively normal. If the Trip coil circuit gets disconnected, or if in general a high
resistance is detected in the circuitry, a Trip alarm will be set and the “ALARM” and
“MAINTENANCE” LEDs will be on.
Example 1: The figure below shows the connections of the breaker trip coil to the relay’s
trip output relay for voltage monitoring of the trip circuit.
To monitor the trip coil circuit integrity, use the relay terminals “A2” and “B3” to connect the
NOTE:
Trip coil, and provide a jumper between terminals “A2” and “A3” (voltage monitor).
NOTE
Figure 7-2: Trip Coil circuit with voltage monitoring

DC +
Output Relay 2 (TRIP)

External
A2 jumper
B3
V
A3
52a
contact
Trip
Coil
898797.cdr
DC -
Example 2: Some applications require that the Trip coil be monitored continuously,
regardless of the breaker position (open or closed). This can be achieved by connecting a
suitable resistor (see the table) across breaker auxiliary contact 52a in the trip circuit. With
such connections, the trickle current will be maintained by the resistor when the breaker is
open. For these applications the setting for “BYPASS BKR STATUS” should be set to
ENABLED.

CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
Figure 7-3: Trip circuit with continuous monitoring

DC +
Trip - form A contacts
External
A2 jumper
B3
V
A3
52a contact R By-pass

resistor
Trip
Coil
DC - 898787.cdr
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M3 BKR MAINTENANCE
TRIP COIL FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
Selecting Alarm, or Latched Alarm, enables the Trip Coil Monitor monitoring function. The
“ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs will light up upon detection of a trip coil circuitry
problem. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon Trip Coil Monitor operating condition, with the
Trip Coil Monitor function selected as Alarm, and will self-reset, when the condition
clears. If Latched Alarm is selected, the “ALARM” LED will flash during the Trip Coil
Monitor condition, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears, until the reset command
is initiated. Any or all of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate when the Trip Coil
Monitor function is selected as Alarm, or Latched Alarm.
TRIP COIL DELAY
Default: 5 s
This setting defines the Trip Coil Monitor Delay, before targets appear on the display,
“ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs light up on the front panel, and selected output
relays operate.
BYPASS BKR STATUS
Default: Disabled
Set the “BYPASS BKR STATE” to Enabled when a by-pass resistor is connected across the
breaker auxiliary contact for continuous Trip circuit integrity monitoring. The circuits will
be monitored regardless of breaker position. When “BYPASS BKR STATE” is set to
Disabled, monitoring of the trip coil will be blocked when the breaker is open.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any, or all, of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon detection of Trip Coil,
or a Trip coil circuitry problem. The selection of the relay outputs operation is available
no matter whether the Alarm, or Latched Alarm, function is selected.

Figure 7-4: Trip coil monitoring logic diagram
Trip Coil Montr OP

Message
LED: ALARM
898020.cdr
OUTPUT RELAY 3
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Transient Recorder
OR
SETPOINT
Event Recorder
output relays
LATCH
selection
Operate
R
S
upon
AND AND
RESET
Command
MAINTENANCE
LED:
Trip Coil Montr PKP

Message
SETPOINT
TRIP COIL DELAY:
tPKP
AND
OR
AND
OR
From output relay 1 TRIP
Trip Coil current above
TRIP COIL FUNCTION:
52a/b INPUTS
Breaker Closed
BYPASS BKR STATE

SETPOINT
SETPOINT
threshold
Trip
Latched Alarm
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
Disable = 0
Alarm
Close coil
Close coil monitoring is performed by a built-in voltage monitor on the Form A output relay:
#2 Close. The voltage monitor is connected across the Form A contact, and effectively the
relay detects healthy current through the circuit. To do that, an external jumper should be
made between terminals “B4”, and “B5” for Close coil monitoring.

Close coil is effectively normal. If the Close coil circuit gets disconnected, or if in general a
high resistance is detected in the circuitry, a Close Coil alarm will be set and the “ALARM”
and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs will be on.
Example 1: The figure below shows the connection of the breaker close coil to the relay’s
close output relay for voltage monitoring of the close circuit.
To monitor the close coil circuit integrity, use the relay terminals “B4” and “A4” to connect
NOTE:
the Close coil, and provide a jumper between terminals “B4” and “B5” (voltage monitor).
NOTE
Figure 7-5: Close Coil circuit with voltage monitoring

DC +
Output Relay 2 (CLOSE)

External
B4 jumper
A4
V
B5
52b
contact
Close
Coil
898792.cdr
DC -
Example 2: Some applications require that the Close Coil be monitored continuously,
regardless of the breaker position (open or closed). This can be achieved by connecting a
suitable resistor (see the table) across breaker auxiliary contact 52b in the Close circuit.
With such connections, the trickle current will be maintained by the resistor when the
breaker is closed. For these applications the setting for “BYPASS BKR STATUS” should be set
to ENABLED.
Figure 7-6: Close Coil circuit with continuous monitoring
DC +
Close - form A contacts
External
B4 jumper
A4
V
B5
52b contact R By-pass

resistor
Close
Coil
DC - 898793.cdr

PATH: MAINTENANCE > M3 BKR MAINTENANCE

CLOSE COIL FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
Selecting Alarm, or Latched Alarm, enables the Close Coil Monitor monitoring function.
The “ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs will light up upon detection of a close coil
circuitry problem. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon a Close Coil Monitor operating
condition, with the Close Coil Monitor function selected as Alarm, and will self-reset,
when the condition clears. If Latched Alarm is selected, the “ALARM” LED will flash during
the Close Coil Monitor condition, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears, until the
reset command is initiated. Any or all of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate
when the Close Coil Monitor function is selected as Alarm, or Latched Alarm.
CLOSE COIL DELAY
Default: 5 s
This setting defines the Close Coil Monitor Delay, before targets appear on the display,
“ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs light up on the front panel, and selected output
relays operate.
BYPASS BKR STATUS
Default: Disabled
Set the “BYPASS BKR STATE” to Enabled when a by-pass resistor is connected across the
breaker auxiliary contact for continuous Close circuit integrity monitoring. The circuits
will be monitored regardless of breaker position. When “BYPASS BKR STATE” is set to
Disabled, monitoring of the close coil will be blocked when the breaker is closed.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any, or all, of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon detection of a Close
coil circuitry problem. The selection of the relay outputs operation is available no matter
whether the Alarm, or Latched Alarm, function is selected.

Figure 7-7: Close coil monitoring logic diagram
LED: ALARM
Close Coil Montr OP

Message
898021.cdr
OUTPUT RELAY 3
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Transient Recorder
OR
SETPOINT:
Event Recorder
output relays
LATCH
selection
Operate
R
S
upon
AND AND
RESET
Command
MAINTENANCE
LED:
Close Coil Montr PKP

Message
CLOSE COIL DELAY:
SETPOINT
tPKP
AND
OR
AND
OR
From output relay 2 CLOSE
Close Coil current above
CLOSE COIL FUNCTN:
52a/b INPUTS
Breaker Open
BYPASS BKR STATE

SETPOINT
SETPOINT
Close
threshold
Latched Alarm
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
Disable = 0
Alarm
Breaker trip counter

When the total number of breaker trips detected reaches the TRIP COUNTER LIMIT
setpoint, an output will occur.
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M3 BKR MAINTENANCE > BKR TRIP COUNTER

TRIP COUNT FUNCTN

Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, or Alarm setting enables the BKR Trip Counter
function. The “ALARM” LED will turn on when the Total breaker trips reaches the TRIP
COUNTER LIMIT setting. The “ALARM” LED will flash when the BKR Trip Counter reaches
the TRIP COUNTER LIMIT setting with function selected as Alarm, and will reset, when the
trip counter is reset. The “ALARM” LED will latch when Latched Alarm is selected, until
the counter is reset, and the reset targets command is initiated.
Any or all of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate when the number of breaker
trips reaches the “TRIP COUNTER LIMIT,” regardless of the selected trip counter function.
INITIAL TRIPS
Default: 0
This setting defines the number of breaker trips, that occurred before enabling the
breaker trip counter for breaker monitoring.
TRIP COUNTER LIMIT
Default: 1 trip
This setting defines the limit number for breaker trips. The BKR TRIP COUNTER will
operate and produce an output if the number of breaker trips reaches the set limit.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any, or all, of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate, upon the BKR TRIP
COUNTER condition.

Command
RESET
LED: ALARM
S
AND
LATCH
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
SETPOINT R
OR
TRIP COUNTER FUNC
AND
Disabled = 0
Latched Alarm
OR
Alarm
SETPOINT
OUTPUT RELAY 3
Operate
OUTPUT RELAY 4
output relays
upon

OUTPUT RELAY 5
selection
SETPOINT OUTPUT RELAY 6
INITIAL BKR TRIPS
SETPOINT
ACTUAL VALUES
TRIP COUNTER LIMIT
Figure 7-8: BKR trip counter logic diagram
BRK TRIP COUNTER

RUN
Breaker
Message
Initial trips
Counter = Initial trips +
Trip command new trips
TOTAL = LIMIT Trip Counter PKP
Increment
OR
REMOTE/LOCAL BKR OPEN CMD Counter
AND
BKR CLOSE Set to Zero
Trip Counter OP
Counter = 0
Trip Counter Reset

AND
SETPOINT
Event Recorder
RST BKR TRIP COUNT Transient Recorder

No = 0
Yes
898773A1.cdr
7–11
M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
M4 BREAKER MONITOR CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
M4 Breaker monitor
The status of the breaker trip and close coils, as well as the trip and close circuits, can be
monitored under MAINTENANCE > M4 BKR MONITOR. In the case where a breaker coil or
circuit fails, the relay will display the message "Unhealthy" for the corresponding coil.
Further information on the breaker is provided under BKR TRIP COUNTER, where the
350 stores the number of trips. The counter can be reset under M3 RESET COUNTERS >
RST BKR TRIP COUNT set to "Yes".
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M4 BKR MONITOR
TRIP COIL
Healthy
Range: Healthy, Unhealthy
CLOSE COIL
Healthy
Range: Healthy, Unhealthy
BKR TRIP COUNTER
5
Number of Trips
M5 Relay maintenance
Ambient temperature
The SR3 has a temperature monitor feature that measures the ambient temperature
around the chassis of the relay. The relay extrapolates the ambient temperature from an
internal temperature sensor inside the product. This feature can be used to signal the
customer that the product is being subjected to temperatures that can degrade the
product life and proper action should be initiated. For example the air conditioning,
heating or ventilation system should be checked.
The purpose of the feature is to measure the immediate temperature around the product.
There are several factors that can alter the measurement that need to be considered for
the application of this feature.
• Any forced air flow or obstructions that can interrupt even distribution of the ambient
temperature.
• Installation of the relay should be for normal operation (CT, VT, inputs, outputs).
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE > AMBIENT TEMP
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the ambient temperature functionality. If the operating condition is
satisfied when Alarm is selected as the function, the “ALARM” LED will flash upon the
activating condition, and will automatically reset when the condition clears. If Latched
Alarm is selected, the LED “ALARM” will flash upon the activating condition, and will stay
“ON” after the condition clears, until a reset command is initiated. Any assignable output
relays can be selected to operate when this function is enabled.

CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
HI ALARM LEVEL
Range: 20°C to 80°C in steps of 1°C
Default: 60°C
This setting specifies the temperature level monitored by the Ambient Temperature
Alarm high logic. The alarm will occur when the temperature remains above this level.
LOW ALARM LEVEL
Range: -40°C to 20°C in steps of 1°C
Default: 10°C
This setting specifies the temperature level monitored by the Ambient Temperature
Alarm low logic. The alarm will occur when the temperature remains below this level.
HYSTERESIS LEVEL
Range: 2°C to 10°C in steps of 1°C
Default: 2°C
This setting allows the user to select the dropout level for the feature.
TIME DELAY
Range: 1 to 60 min in steps of 1 min
Default: 1 min
This timer starts when either the high or low level thresholds have exceeded their
respective levels.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Ambient Temperature
Alarm operation.

7–14
M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
SETTING
AMB TEMP ALARM
Disabled = 0
Alarm
OR
Latched Alarm
SETTINGS ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS

AMB TEMP ALARM Output Relay 3
Operate
output Output Relay 4
Hi Alarm Level relays upon Output Relay 5
selection
Low Alarm Level Output Relay 6
RUN SETTING
T > High Temp TIME DELAY LOGIC OPERAND
OR RUN
Amb Temp HI Alarm PKP
RUN AND
OR Any Alarm OP
T < Low Temp tRST AND S
Amb Temp HI Alarm OP
LATCH
R TARGET MESSAGE
Amb Temp HI Alarm
State: Pickup
Amb Temp HI Alarm
Figure 7-9: Ambient Temperature Alarm logic diagram
State: Operate
KEYPAD RESET
INPUTS
Emergency Restart Input OR LOGIC OPERAND
AND
Lockout Reset Input AND Amb Temp LO Alarm PKP
Remote Reset Input AND
AND Any Alarm OP
AND S OR
Amb Temp LO Alarm OP
SETTINGS LATCH
S4 CONTROLS
R TARGET MESSAGE
Emergency Restart
Amb Temp LO Alarm
Off = 0 State: Pickup
Lockout Reset
Amb Temp LO Alarm
Off = 0 State: Operate
Remote Reset
898779.cdr
Off = 0

CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance
The 350 requires minimal maintenance. As a microprocessor-based relay, its
characteristics do not change over time. The expected service life of a 350 is 20 years
when the environment and electrical conditions are within stated specifications.
While the 350 performs continual self-tests, it is recommended that maintenance be
scheduled with other system maintenance. This maintenance can involve in-service, out-
of-service, or unscheduled maintenance.
In-service maintenance
1. Visual verification of the analog values integrity, such as voltage and current (in
comparison to other devices on the corresponding system).
2. Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages, and LED indications.
3. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust, or loose wires.
4. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
Out-of-service maintenance
1. Check wiring connections for firmness.
2. Analog values (currents, voltages, RTDs, analog inputs) injection test and metering
accuracy verification. Calibrated test equipment is required.
3. Protection elements setting verification (analog values injection or visual verification
of setting file entries against relay settings schedule).
4. Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change
of state forcing or as part of the system functional testing.
5. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, or dust.
6. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-
FASTPATH:
energized state once per year, for one hour continuously.
Unscheduled maintenance (system interruption)

• View the event recorder and oscillography for correct operation of inputs, outputs, and
elements.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE

GE
Grid Solutions
Appendix
Appendix
Warranty
For products shipped as of 1 October 2013, GE warrants most of its GE manufactured
products for 10 years. For warranty details including any limitations and disclaimers, see
our Terms and Conditions at https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm
For products shipped before 1 October 2013, the standard 24-month warranty applies.
350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A–1

REPAIRS
Repairs
The firmware and software can be upgraded without return of the device to the factory.
For issues not solved by troubleshooting, the process to return the device to the factory for
repair is as follows:
• Contact a GE Grid Solutions Technical Support Center. Contact information is found in
the first chapter.
• Obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number from the Technical Support
Center.
• Verify that the RMA and Commercial Invoice received have the correct information.
• Tightly pack the unit in a box with bubble wrap, foam material, or styrofoam inserts or
packaging peanuts to cushion the item(s). You may also use double boxing whereby
you place the box in a larger box that contains at least 5 cm of cushioning material.
• Ship the unit by courier or freight forwarder, along with the Commercial Invoice and
RMA, to the factory.
Customers are responsible for shipping costs to the factory, regardless of whether the
unit is under warranty.
• Fax a copy of the shipping information to the GE Grid Solutions service department.
Use the detailed return procedure outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/support/ret_proc.htm
The current warranty and return information are outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm
A–2 350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHANGE NOTES
Change notes
Manual Revision history
Table 1: Revision History

MANUAL P/N RELEASE DATE
1601-9086-A1 12 May 2009
1601-9086-A2 4 June 2009
1601-9086-A3 4 June 2009
1601-9086-A4 30 June 2009
1601-9086-A5 30 June 2009
1601-9086-A6 6 December 2010
1601-9086-A7 18 January 2011
1601-9086-A8 10 May 2010
1601-9086-A9 9 December 2011
1601-9086-AA 29 February 2012
1601-9086-AB 29 September 2012
1601-9086-AC 29 February 2012
1601-9086-AD 13 June 2013
1601-9086-AE 12 July 2013
1601-9086-AF 20 August 2013
1601-9086-AG 26 August 2014
1601-9086-AH 27 February 2015
1601-9086-AJ 10 June 2015
1601-9086-AK 17 December 2015
Table 2: Major Updates for 350-AK

Page Number CHANGES
Manual revision number from AJ to AK
Branding change to Grid Solutions

CHANGE NOTES
Table 2: Major Updates for 350-AK

Page Number CHANGES
Order codes: added Accessories list
Specifications, Data capture, updated Clock Accuracy
Specifications, Metering: added Energy Accuracy
Specifications, Power Supply:
- Changed High Range Power Supply Range to 250 VDC
- Added Fuse rating
Chapter 1 Specifications, Control: updated Breaker Failure values
Specifications, Testing and certification:
- Added EAC certification
- Added Country of origin, Date of manufacture,
Declaration of Conformity
- Updated Dielectric voltage withstand test levels
Specifications, Environmental: added Noise specification
Chapter 2 Added table of adapter plate part numbers to Mounting

section
Added Upgrading the software
Chapter 3 Updated Downloading and saving setpoints
Added Uninstalling files and clearing data
Chapter 5 Updated Quick setup - Front control panel section
Updated Subnet IP Mask default value
Updated Buffer Setup default value
Chapter 6 Updated Trigger Position default value
Updated Synchrocheck logic diagram
Chapter 7 Added General maintenance
Appendix Added Repairs
General Minor corrections
Table 3: Major Updates for 350-AJ

Page Number CHANGES
Manual revision number from AH to AJ
Updated RS485 Wiring diagram
Chapter 2
Updated IRIG-B Connection diagram
Chapter 3 Updated firmware filename format
Chapter 5, 6, Changed TOC PICKUP range lower value from 0.04 to 0.05
Chapter 7 Updated TIME DELAY default to 1 min
Table 4: Major Updates for 350-AH

Page Number CHANGES
Manual revision number from AG to AH
Chapter 1 Updated Order Codes and table to add Synchrocheck
Chapter 4 Added Redundancy and IEEE 1588 PTP
Chapter 6 Added OPC-UA, Redundancy, and Synchrocheck

CHANGE NOTES
Table 4: Major Updates for 350-AH

Page Number CHANGES
Table 5: Major Updates for 350-AG

Page Number CHANGES
Manual revision number from AF to AG
Chapter 1 Added note to specifications
Chapter 1 Changed Time Delay Accuracy to Curve Timing Accuracy
Chapter 3 Updated hardware and software requirements.
Replaced image for Transient Recorder Viewer window with
Chapter 3 updated image.
Table 6: Major Updates for 350-AF

Page Number CHANGES
Manual revision number from AE to AF
Software revision number from 1.5x to 1.60
Added 67P Order Codes for models with Directional
Chapter 1 protection (Order Code Other Protection characters “P” and
“R”)
Updated Order Codes adding programmable LEDs option
Chapter 1 (Language character “L”) and removing Chinese option
(Language character “C”)
Chapter 3, 6 Added section on programmable LEDs
General Increased VT Ratio setting to 1500:1
Added new 67N and 67G settings to define directional
Chapter 6 effect on overcurrent elements when direction cannot be
calculated
Changed Time Delay Multiplier maximum to 50.00 and
General
minimum to 0.05
Chapter 1, 4 Changed Power Metering maximum to 100 from 3000
Table 7: Major Updates for 350-AE

Page Number CHANGES
Manual revision number from AD to AE
Chapter 6 Clarify SR3 IEC 61850 GOOSE details
Table 8: Major Updates for 350-AD

Page Number CHANGES
Manual revision number from AC to AD

CHANGE NOTES
Table 8: Major Updates for 350-AD

Page Number CHANGES
Chapter 1 Updated Type Tests table
General Minor Corrections
Table 9: Major Updates for 350-AC

Page Number CHANGES
Manual revision number from AB to AC
Chapter 1 Revise time delay parameters
Chapter 2 Revise Non-drawout-Adapter plate mounting drawing
Chapter 6 Add missing setpoint titles
Table 10: Major Updates for 350-AB

Page Number CHANGES
Manual revision number from AA to AB
Chapter 1 Add Case design option N (relay with non-drawout design)
Chapter 2 Add dimensions, mounting and wiring for non-drawout unit
Table 11: Major Updates for 350-AA

Page Number CHANGES
Manual revision number from A9 to AA
Chapter 2 Revise Control Power parameters
Table 12: Major Updates for 350-A9

Page Number CHANGES
Manual revision number from A6 to A9
General Add support for additional safety/protection elements

Page Number CHANGES
Manual revision number from A5 to A6
Add Protection Elements 67G and 67N to Protection
Chapter 1
Functions
Chapter 1 Add Comm option 3E to Order Code Table
Chapter 7 Add Ambient Temp section (Ch 7 - Maintenance)

CHANGE NOTES

Page Number CHANGES
General Increase number of Logic Elements to 16
Table 14: Major Updates for 350 A1 to A5

Page Number CHANGES
Manual revision numbers from A1 to A5

GE Multilin 350 Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Multilin 350 Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Multilin 350 Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE

This product cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or

Indicates practices not related to personal injury.

For further assistance

2. INSTALLATION Mechanical installation ...................................................................................................2 - 1

3. INTERFACES Front control panel interface........................................................................................3 - 2

350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL i

4. ACTUAL VALUES Actual values overview ...................................................................................................4 - 1

ii 350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

5. QUICK SETUP - Quick Setup settings.........................................................................................................5 - 2

6. SETPOINTS Setpoints Main Menu........................................................................................................6 - 1

350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL iii

7. MAINTENANCE M1 Relay information....................................................................................................... 7 - 2

iv 350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

350 Feeder Protection System

350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–1

Description of the 350 Feeder Protection System

1–2 350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Figure 1-1: Single line diagram

79 27P 59P 59_2 59N 81U 81O VTFF

Table 1-1: Protection functions

350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–3

ANSI Device Description

Figure 1-2: Main Menu structure

ACTUAL VALUES ACTUAL VALUES

[SENS] GND CT PRIMARY

PH TOC FUNCTION PHASE TOC

PH IOC1 FUNCTION PH TOC CURVE

GND IOC1 FNCTN PH TOC TDM

NTRL IOC1 FNCTN GROUND TOC

M4 BKR MONITOR PH IOC1 PICKUP

1–4 350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

350 order codes

350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–5

1–6 350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND/NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TIME OVERCURRENT (51P/51N/51G/

TOC (Time Overcurrent) and IOC (Instantaneous Overcurrent)

NOTE PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND/NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT

350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–7

PHASE DIRECTIONAL (67P)

GROUND DIRECTIONAL (67G)

NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL (67N)

THERMAL MODEL (49)

1–8 350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–9

PARAMETER ACCURACY RESOLUTION RANGE

Full scale for CT Input is 3 x CT

1–10 350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–11

COLD LOAD PICKUP BLOCKING

1–12 350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

PHASE/AUX VOLTAGE INPUTS

350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–13

Testing and certification

Test Reference Standard Test Level

1–14 350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Power Frequency Immunity EN61000-4-7/IEC60255-22-7 Class A & B

Applicable Council Directive According to

350 FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–15